The URL can be used to link to this page

Imp. Proj. #457ACOUNCIL KWO11VA.3, 0 o k ; 0 Originating Department Approved for Agenda Agenda Section Ord. & Res. Manager 1 6-25-90 Item No. By: Dan Donahue By: 10.2 1-031i'61,41 • I I 1 • 11 1 &A. W G I PE•• N pin ilk Mr.30 am WRIze i k , Lem wo oif 47 VER • jUniS • MENOMIMS • Milk •vo The City received seven bids for Improvement Project 457A on June 22, 1990. The City Engineer will present the results on Monday evening. The apparent low bidder was Shingobee Builders Inc. at $183•,8 (Engineer's Estimate $180,000). / e: ? cql Kk MOTION BY SECOND BY A n 1/0 tn - I TO: Review: Administration: Finance: CITY OF NEW HOPE RESO=ON AWARDI14G CONTRACr FOR THE 00NSIRUCITON • SC•NCE IN• (JSTRY PARK SITE (2WU4G AND PAR1KING LOr IMPF4VEMENTS (DaWVEMENT PRO= NO. 457A) BE IT RESOLVED by the City Council of the City of New Hope as follows: 1. That bids for the construction of Improvement Project 457A were duly opened at the New Hope City Hall, 4401 Xylon Avenue North, at 11:30 a.m. on the 22nd day of June, 1990. 2. That advertisement for bids for the construction of said improvement was published in the New Hope-Golden Valley Post, the official newspaper of the City, on the 30th day of May, 1990, and in the Construction Bulletin on the 1st and 8th days of June, 1990. t 3. It is hereby found and determined by this Council that the bid of Shingobee Builders Inc. for the construction of said project in the amount of $183,923.86 is the lowest responsible bid submitted for the construction of said improvement; that Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc., Engineers for the City, have recommended to this Council the said low bid for the award of the contract for the construction to the designated lowest responsible bidder. 4. The Mayor and Manager are authorized and directed to enter into an improvement contract for the construction of said nprovement in the name of the City with the lowest responsible bidder, subject to the said contractor furnishing a public contractor's surety bond, conditioned as required by law. Adopted by the City Council of the City of New Hope, Hennepin County, Minnesota, this 22nd day of June, 1990. Mayor Attest: City Clerk (J Our File No. 3471' SCIENCE INDUSTRY PARK GRADING PARKING LOT -457A NEW HOPEMN CONTRACTORS 1. PENN CONTRACTING 2. GAMMON BROS. 48 3* ALBER CONST. HARDRIVES, INC. 5. DAVE PERKINS CONST. 6. TALBERG LAWN & LANDSCAPE 0 7 W.B.MILLER 8. MUNN BLACKTOP 9. P. & H. WAREHOUSE SALES cr) DRIVEWAY DESIGN, INC. 11. STENGER EXC.CO. 12. ABLE FENCE, INC. 13. NYEN EXC.INC. 14. KEVITT EXC. 15. FENC-CO INC. G.P. LAWN SPRINKLER SERVICE 17. CROWLEY COMPANY 19. 20. BID TIME: C.S.D.T. BID DATE:JUME 22, 1990 TOTAL BASE BID N6. aDl- oc c" Engineers Estimate $180,000 June 25, 1990 Otto G. Bonestroo, P.E. Robert W. Rosene, P.E. Joseph C. Anderlik, P.E. Marvin L. Sorvala, P.E. Ricfiard E. Turner, P.E. James C. Olson, P.E. Glenn R, Cook, P.E. Thomas E. Noyes, P.E. Robert G. Schunicht, P.E. Susan M. Eberlin, C.P.A. City of New Hope 4401 Xyion Avenue North New Hope, MN 55428 Attn: Daniel Donahue Keith A. Gordon, P.E. Richard W. Foster, P.E. Donald C. Burgardt, P.E. Jerry A. Bourdon, P.E. Mark A. Hanson, P.E. Ted K. Field, P.E. Michael T Rautmann, P.E. Robert R. Pfefferle, PE. David O. Loskota, P.E. Thomas W. Peterson, P.E. Michael C. Lynch, PE. James R. Maland, P.E. Kenneth P. Anderson, P.E. Mark R. Rolfs, P.E. Robert C. Russek, A.I.A. Thomas E. Angus, P.E. Howard A. Sanford P.E. Daniel J. Edgerton, P.E. Mark A. Seip, RE, Philip J. Caswell, P.E. Ismael Martinez, P.E. Mark a Wallis, P.E. Re: Science Industry Park Site Grading & Parking Lot Improvements - Project No. 457A Softball & Soccer Field Lighting - Project No. 457B Our File No.'s 3471, 34120 Dear Dan: Thomas R. Anderson, A.I.A. Gary F Rylander, P.E. Miles B. Jensen, P.E. L. Phillip Gravel III, P.E. Rene C. Plumart, A.I.A. Agnes M. Ring, AJC.P. Jerry D. Pertzsch, P.E. Cecilio Olivier, PE. Charles A. Erickson Leo M. Pawelsky Harlan M. Olson Bids were received September 22, 1990 for the above projects. Listed below is the low bid for each project compared to the engineers estimate: No. of Bids Engineers Low Bid Estimate Project 457A (Grading) 6 $180,000.00 Project 4513 (Lighting) 4 110,000.00 Low Bid Contractor $183,923,86 Shingobee Builders Inc. 109,467.92 Total Construction & Equipment Inc. $293,295.42 As noted the engineers estimate is slightly less than the low bid amount. Although our firm has not specifically worked with each contractor, I have spoke with each contractor and it appears they are each more than capable of doing the work. Total Construction & Equipment Inc. is intending to provide the Musco Lighting System which is the preferred system by the City. Relative to the amended permit required from the Department of Natural Resources, it is anticipated we will receive the amended permit the week of July 4. I have spoke with Ceil Strauss at the DNR and she does not anticipate any difficulty. 2335 West Highway 36 9 St. Paul, Minnesota 55113 ® 612 - 636 -4600 City of New Hope Mr. Daniel Donahue June 25, 1990 In summary, it's recommended each project be awarded to the respective low bidder contingent upon the amended permit from the DNR being approved. If you have any questions please contact this office. Yours very truly, BONESTROO, ROSENE, ANDERLIK & ASSOCIATES, INC. Mark Hanson MH:lk 2 CITY OF NEW HOPE FIVE YEAR CAPITAL IMPROVEMNET BUDGET FUND AVAILABILITY AND NET COST FOR PERIOD 1988 -1992 FUND /DEPARTMENT YEA DESCRIPTION ROAD & GEN FUND TRADE IN FIN. BY --------------- REQUESTED COST---- - CEN, 1989 1940 1991 ---- ----- ___ _ -- - - " -- 1992 BRIDGE SURPLUS OR SALE OPERATIONS REPLA FIRE _ " ----- - - -- NOSE REPLACEMENT �- ' _'_O - 0 - - -- 5,000 1992 --- -------- -- ---- ---- ---- ---• --- -• 5,000 p ____________________ _ FIRE GEAR REPLACEMENT 1992 FIRE PAGERS 5,400 0 0 0 1942 3,883 0 5,400 0 0 3,883 , TOTAL FIR ,D - -- - �- SPARTMEI[T__ - • - --- -- $819,165 $532,233 $27,433 $24,633 $201,333 $28,533 ._ -•-_ - - - -- ----------•----- PARK & RECREATION INDUSTRIAL BALLFIEID 50 $500,000 56, $O -- 1988 PAR ECREATION RESURFACE TENNIS COURTS 8 10,000 66,000 ______ __ _______ 1988 10,000 00 - 0 0 PARK & RECREATION HEATER FOR NORTHWOOD SHELTER lggg 0 0 0 PARK & RECREATION PAINTSTRIPPER 3,000 3,000 p p 0 e 1988 2,500 2,500 0 PARK & RECREATION UPGRADE BALLFIELDS- SUNNYHOLLOW 1988 6,000 6,000 p 0 0 c 0 p PARK & RECREATI * ON FLOOR SCRUBBER 0 0 PARK & RECREATION UPGRADE BLEACHERS 1988 1,000 1,000 0 0 PARK & RECREATION AGRILIME FOR HOCKEY RINKS 1988 59000 5,000 0 0 0 0 PARK & RECREATION SAND VOLLEYBALL COURTS 1988 2,000 2,Q00 0 0 0 0 1988 2,000 PARK $ RECREATION DRINKING FOUNTAIN 2,000 p 0 0 � PARK & RECREATION 3 HANDMOWERS 1988 2,200 2,200 0 0 1988 1,800 0 0 PARK & RECREATION HANDICAPPED ASSESSIBILITY 1,800 0 0 0 0 PARK & RECREATION OUTFIELD FENCES 1988 7,200 7,200 0 0 0 0 1988 1,000 PARK & RECREATION SKATE 7IlE FOR SHELTER 1,000 p p p p � - PARK & RECREATION PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT 1988 3,000 3,000 0 0 0 1988 21,500 0 PARK & RECREATION ICE SWEEPING BROOMS 2 1,500 0 0 0 0 --'� PARK & RECREATION PLAYER BENCHES 1988 1,500 1,500 0 0 1988 2,000 0 0 PARK & RECREATION JORDAN PARK 2,000 0 0 0 0 PARK R. vrrDCA- - 1988 44,000 44 nnn CITY OF NEW HOPE MEMORANDUM DATE: June 18, 1990 TO: Dan Donahue, City Manager FROM: Shari French, Parks and Recreation Director SUBJECT: FUNDING FOR INDUSTRIAL BALLFIELD I suggest that the following funds in the 1990-91 CIP be dedicated to the new ballfield: From 1990 CIP: Carry-over from 1989 $63,000 Irrigation 18,,000 Drinking fountain 2,200 Bleachers 3,500 Traffic park 20,0D0 Ballfield complex 85,000 Sealcoat park paths 5,000 From 1991 CIP: Bleachers 3,500 Storage bldg. 50,000 Sun shelter 25,000 Sealcoat paths 5,000 From 1990 Street Budget: Sealcoating surplus 0,000 From 1984 CIP Sinking Fund Interest earnings 20,000 Larry Watts has said that there is money in the 1984 CIP Sinking Fund. This money is from interest earnings. He said that there is over $20,000 available here. With all the above, we come to a total of $320,200. If bids come a little higher, I suggest that Larry be consulted again as whether the sinking fund could cover any more of the cost, if Council is willing to spend the money. , Y6 °I,4 Ci�1- f��ZNT�J Originating Department Parks and Recreation Shari French By: Approved for Agenda Agenda Section Consent 7/23/90 Item No. By: I / 1 6.13 RESOLUTION ADJUSTING THE 1990 -91 CAPITAL IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM AUTHORIZING THE TRANSFER OF $102,702.50 TO SCIENCE INDUSTRY PARK SITE GRADING AND PARKING LOT IMPROVEMENTS (IMPROVEMENT PROJECT This resolution will enable staff to use CIP funds to fund the new ballfields grading and parking lot improvements (457) approved at the 6/25/90 Council meeting. Funds budgeted in the 1990 CIP for the project total $81,125. An additional $102,702.50 is needed. Park Increase 1990 CIP Allocation Fountain Traffic Park Sealcoat Park Paths 1991 CIP Allocation Sealcoat Park Paths Storage Bldg. for Ballfields Sun Shelter Site Grading & Lot Impr. 102,702.50 $102,702.50 Decrease $2,200.00 20,000.00 502.50 5,000.00 50,000.00 25,000.00 $102,702.50 MOTION BY 2 4 SECOND BY L`'' L( ) Review: Administration: Finance: RFA -001 CITY OF NEW HOPE RESOLUTION NO. 90 -136 RESOLUTION ADJUSTING THE 1990 -91 CAPITAL IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM AUTHORIZING TRANSFER OF $102,702.50 TO SCIENCE INDUSTRY PARK SITE GRADING AND PARKING LOT IMPROVEMENTS (PROJECT 457A) WHEREAS, the City Is Capital Improvement Program was established in the 1990 City Budget for the years 1990 and 1991; and WHEREAS, Park priorities have changed; and WHEREAS, Bids came in higher than anticipated for the Science Industry Park; and WHEREAS, the Capital Improvement Fund should be amended to reflect these changes. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED, that the 1990 -91 Capital Improvement Budget be amended as follows: Park Increase Decrease 1990 CIP Allocation Fountain Traffic Park Sealcoat Park Paths 1991 CIP Allocation Sealcoat Park _Paths Storage Bldg. for Ballfields Sun Shelter Site Grading ,& Lot Impr. $102,702.50 $102,702.50 $2,200.00 20,000.00 502.50: 5,000.00 50,000.00 25,000.00 $102,702.50 Adopted by the City Council of the City of New Hope, Hennepin county, Minnesota, this 23rd day of July, 1990. 4 aLe-z' Mayor Attest: /,, X - City Clerk I Originating Department Approved for Agenda Agenda Section I I Consent Parks and Recreation 10/22/90 Item No. B Y : Shari French By: 6.8 APPROVAL OF BILL SUBMITTED BY NSP FOR PAYMENT OF COST TO CONNECT ELECTRICAL SERVICE TO SCIENCE INDUSTRIAL BALLFIELD (PROJECT 457A) - $1,100.00 When plans were made to build the Science Industry Park ballfields NSP told the City that it would charge to bring service from the street to the transformer for electrical power. The bill has been received in the amount of $1,100. Staff recommends payment of the bill, charging Project 457A for the expenditure. MOTION BY SECOND BY TO: Review: Administration: Finance: NORTHERN STATES POWER COMPANY 414 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MN 55401 -1927 TELEPHONE: (612) 330 -7659 CITY OF NEW HOPE 8860 EAST RESEARCH CENTER ROAD NEW HOPE, MN 55428 101690 OCT 16, 1990 03760 - 14.38.03 -09 -00 433394 $1,100.00 DESCRIPTION INVOICE IN CONNECTION WITH EXTEND UNDERGROUND PRIMARY CABLE FRbM TRANSFORMER SERVING THE PUBLIC WORKS BUILDING ON INTERNATIONAL PARKWAY; OVER TO, AND UNDER EAST RESEARCH CENTER ROAD; AND THEN UNDERGROUND TO TRANSFORMER BY THE SHELTER BUILDING AMOUNT DUE: $ 1,100.00 TERMS: NET CASH - DUE ON RECEIPT OF THIS INVOICE PLEASE RETURN A COPY OF THIS INVOICE WITH YOUR PAYMENT COUNCIL . @c Originating Department Approved for Agenda Agenda Section Parks and Recreation 1 11/26/90 1 Consent Shari French Item No. By: I By: 6.4 RESOLUTION APPROVING CHANGE ORDER #1 WITH SHINGOBEE BUILDERS, INC. FOR IMPROVEMENT PROJECT NO. 457A (SCIENCE INDUSTRY PARK GRADING AND PARKING LOT IMPROVEMENTS) IN THE AMOUNT OF $834.43. A change order is necessary related to the Science Industry Park project. The additional work involved providing for additional quick couplers at the end of each sprinkler run for the underground watering system. This will allow the system to be cleaned through the quick couplers rather than the last sprinkler head. The total cost of the change order is $834.43. Staff recommends approval. SECOND BY - C l Review: Administration: Finance: t1 A CITY OF NEW HOPE RESOLUTION NO. 90 -212 RESOLUTION APPROVING CHANGE ORDER # 1 WITH SHINGOBEE BUILDERS, INC. FOR SCIENCE INDUSTRY PARK GRADING AND PARKING LOT IMPROVEMENTS (IMPROVEMENT PROJECT 457A) IN THE AMOUNT OF $834.43 WHEREAS, The City of New Hope authorized on June 25, 1990, Improvement Project 457A, for the contractual sum of $183,923.86; and WHEREAS, Additional quick couplers at the end of each sprinkler run were deemed necessary to complete the project in the best possible manner, totaling $834.43. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED, that the City Council of the City of New Hope approves change order #1 to the contract with Shingobee Builders, Inc. in the amount of $834.43 as part of Improvement Project #457A (Science Industry Park Grading and Parking Lot Improvements) which brings the total contract to $184,758.29. Adopted by the City Council of the City of New Hope, Hennepin County, Minnesota, this 26th day of November, 1990. e� , a�� Mayor Attest: ��-� -� City Clerk November 12, 1990 City of New Hope 4401 Xylon Avenue N. New Hope, Minnesota 55428 Attn: Shari French Re: Science Industry Park Grading and Parking Lot Improvements Project No. 457A Our File No. 3471 Dear Shari: Attached is Change Order No. 1 for the above project. As noted this change order provides for additional quick couplers at the end of each sprinkler run. This will allow the system to be cleaned through the quick couplers rather than the last sprinkler head. It was determined after the project was bid by public works to include the additional couplers. We recommend approval of this change order in the amount of $843.43. If you have any questions please contact me at this office. _2 Yours very truly, I:i ANDERLIK c4z ASS "OCIN - FES, 1 11 , 4C. Encl. A. Hanson Ah Otto G. Bonestroo, P.E. Keith A. Gordon, P.E. James R. Maland, P.E. Thomas R. Anderson, A.I.A. Bonestroo Robert W. Rosene, P.E. Richard W. Foster, P.E. Kenneth P. Anderson, P.E. Gary P Rylander, P.E. Joseph C. Anderlik, P.E. Donald C. Burgardt, P.E. Mark R. Rolfs, P.E. Miles B. Jensen, P.E. A" Rosene Marvin L. Sorvala, P.E. Jerry A. Bourdon, P.E. Robert C. Russek, A.I.A. L. Phillip Gravel III, P.E. Richard E. Turner, P.E. Mark A. Hanson, P.E. Thomas E. Angus, P.E. Rene C. Plumart, A.I.A. James C. Olson, P.E. Ted K. Field, P.E. Howard A. Sanford, P.E. Agnes M. Ring, A.I.C.P. Glenn R. Cook, P.E. Michael T Rautmann, P.E. Daniel J. Edgerton, PE. Jerry D. Pertzsch, PE, A ssociates Thomas E. Noyes, P.E. Robert G. Schunicht, P.E. Robert R. Pfefferle, P.E. David O. Loskota, P.E. Mark A. Seip, P.E. Philip J, Caswell, P.E. Cedlio Olivier, P.E. Charles A. Erickson Susan M. Eberlin, C.P.A. Thomas W Peterson, PE. Ismael Martinez, P.E. Leo M. Pawelsky Engineers $c Architects Michael C. Lynch, P.E. Mark D. Wallis, PE. Harlan M. Olson November 12, 1990 City of New Hope 4401 Xylon Avenue N. New Hope, Minnesota 55428 Attn: Shari French Re: Science Industry Park Grading and Parking Lot Improvements Project No. 457A Our File No. 3471 Dear Shari: Attached is Change Order No. 1 for the above project. As noted this change order provides for additional quick couplers at the end of each sprinkler run. This will allow the system to be cleaned through the quick couplers rather than the last sprinkler head. It was determined after the project was bid by public works to include the additional couplers. We recommend approval of this change order in the amount of $843.43. If you have any questions please contact me at this office. _2 Yours very truly, I:i ANDERLIK c4z ASS "OCIN - FES, 1 11 , 4C. Encl. A. Hanson Ah 4401 Xylon Avenue North New Hope, Minnesota 55428 Phone: 533 -1521 November 27, 1990 Shingobee Builders 279 N. Medina Street Loretto, MN 55357 SUBJECT: CHANGE ORDER #1 - IMPROVEMENT PROJECT 457A SCIENCE INDUSTRY PARK GRADING AND PARKING LOT IMPROVEMENTS Enclosed are two fully executed copies of the above- ref e renced Change Order for your records. Please forward one copy to your bonding company. If you have any questions, please contact me. Sincerely, Valerie Leone City Clerk enc. cc: City Engineer Family Styled City For Family living COUNCIL !� • • • • Originating Department Approved for Agenda Agenda Section Parks and Recreation 1 8/12/91 1 Consent Shari French Item No. By: BY: / 6.5 ACCEPTANCE OF IMPROVEMENT PROJECT NO. 457SCIENCE INDUSTRY PARK GRADING AND PARKING LOT IMPROVEMENTS (VICTORY PARK) AND AUTHORIZATION OF FINAL PAYMENT The grading and parking lot improvements for Victory Park have been completed (Project 457). The project was constructed by Shingobee Builders. Mark Hanson, City Engineer, has recommended acceptance and staff have concurred. The project cost has been increased by $9,641.66 due to additional storm sewer needed along the railroad tracks (130 and changing the four foot fence along the foul lines as bid to six foot fencing for safety. Staff recommends acceptance and release of final payment of $5,669.76 as soon as the IC -134 form has been submitted to the City Clerk. M �� , SECOND BY 112242� Review: Administration: Finance: 1.'1TIf1 July 22, 1991 City of New Hope 4401 Xylon Ave. N. New Hope, MN 55428 Attn: Ms. Shari French Otto G. Bonestroo, P.E. Robert W. Rosene, P.E. Joseph C. Anderlik, P.E. Marvin L. Sorvala, P.E. Richard E. Turner, P.E. Glenn R. Cook, P.E. Thomas E. Noyes, P.E. Robert G. Schunicht P.E. Susan M. Eberlin, C.P.A. Re: Science Industry Park Grading and Parking Lot Improvements Project No. 457 Our File No. 3471 Dear Shari, Keieh A. Gordon, P.E. Richard W. Foster, P.E. Donald C. Burgardt, P.E. Jerry A. Bourdon, P.E. Mark A. Hanson, PE. Ted K. Field, PE. Michael T Rautmann, PE. Robert R. Pfefferle, P.E. David O. Loskota, P.E. Thomas W. Peterson, P.E. Michael C. Lynch, P.E. James R. Maland, P.E. Kenneth P. Anderson, P.E. Mark R. Roifs, P.E. Robert C. Russek, A.LA. Thomas E. Angus, P.E. Howard A. Sanford, P.E. Daniel J. Edgerton, P.E. Mark A. Seip, P.E. Philip J. Caswell, PE. Ismael Martinez, P.E. Mark D. Wallis, P.E. Thomas R. Anderson, A.I.A. Gary F. Rylandef, P.E. Miles B. Jensen, PE. L. Phillip Gravel III, P.E. Rene C. Plumart, A.I.A. Agnes M. Ring, A.I.C.P Jerry D. Pertzsch, P.E. Cecilio Olivier, P.E. Robert R. Dreblow, PE. Gary W Morien, P.E. Karen L. Wemeri, P.E. Keith R. Yapp, P.E. Charles A. Erickson Leo M. Pawelsky Harlan M. Olson Attached is the 7th & Final Pay Request for the above project. The final contract amount is $194,399.95 which is 5.2% ($9,641.66) above the bid amount plus Change Order No. 1. The added cost is due to additional storm sewer constructed along the railroad tracks (130') and changing the 4' high fencing along the foul lines as bid to 6' high. In addition, 379 cubic yards of additional topsoil borrow was required. All work has been satisfactorily completed and we recommend final payment once the IC -134 Forms have been submitted. Final payment is $5,669.76. If you have any questions, please contact this office. Yours very truly, Encl. 3471.cor 2335 West Highway 36 # St. Paul, Minnesota 55113 a 612- 636 -46 00 REQUEST FOR PAYMENT DATE: Jul 15, 1991 PLACE: New hop _Minn PROJECT:Scienc Ind Park Gradi & Park Lot Impr PROJECT NO.:4 FILE NO.: 3471 CONTRACTOR: Sc hinaobe e Bui lders, Inc. ADDRESS: 279 N Medina Street L MN 55357 REQUEST FOR PAYMENT NO.: 7 & FIN AL SUMMARY: 1. Original Contract Amount 2. Change Order - ADDITION 3. Change Order - DEDUCTION 4. Revised Contract Amount 5. Value Completed to Date 6. Material on Hand 7. Amount Earned 8. Less Retainage 0 X FOR PERIOD: From: Feb. 7, 1991 To: July 8, 1991 SPE CIFIED CONTRA COMPLETION DAT $ 834.43 9. Sub -Total 10. Less Amount Paid Previously 11. AMOUNT DUE THIS REQUEST FOR PAYMENT NO.: 7 & F OWNER APPROVAL: By By Date: 3471PR Recommended for Approval by: $ 183,923.86 $ _ 184,758.29 $ 194 ,399.95 $ 0.00 $ _ 194 $ _ 0.00 $ 194,399.95 $ 188,730.19 $ _= 5.669.76 Approved By: SHINGOBEE B UILDERS, INC. nt " acto T By: PROJECT: Industry Park Gradi & Park Lot Impr PLACE: Ne Hope, Minnesota CONTRACTOR: S chin go bee Builders, Inc. STATEMENT OF WORK Contract Item Concrete curb and gutter removal Site grading Select topsoil borrow, CV 27 ", Class 3, RCP Salvage and reinstall 27" RCP apron 12 ", Class 5, RCP 12" RCP apron Class 2 rip rap Granular filter material Geotextile filter material Reconstruct existing manhole Type II CBMH w /R3067V casting Salvage and reinstall hydrant 3" Class 52, DIP Fittings 3" gate valve and box 1" capped blowout with tee Infield aggregate Class 5, 10OX crushed aggregate base course 2331 bituminous base course mixture Unit L. F. L. S. C. Y. L. F. Each L. F. Each C. Y. C. Y. S.Y. L. F. Each Each L. F. Lbs. Each Each Ton Unit Price $1.08 28,080.00 8.64 54.00 1,620.00 32.40 324.00 81.00 16.20 5.40 431.57 1,080.00 1,188.00 12.96 1.08 432.00 270.00 11.34 PAYMENT NO.: 7 & FINAL FILE NO.: 3471 DATE: July 15 1991 Est'd Quantity uantity To Date 110 L S 1,500 30 1 30 1 8 6 16 1.9 1 1 320 240 1 2 320 Ton 9.50 1,500 Ton 19.39 200 Page 1 116 100X 1,879 32 1 162 2 8 6 16 1 1 320 240 1 1 370.11 Amount. To Date $125.28 28,080.00 16,234.56 1,728.00 1,620.00 5,248.80 648.00 648.00 97.20 86.40 1,080.00 1,188.00 4,147.20 259.20 432.00 270.00 4,197.05 1,648.08 15,656.76 199.19 3,862.29 3471PR PROJECT:Scien Industry Par Gra & Park Lot Impr PLACE: New Hope. Minne CONTRACTOR: Sch obee Buil Inc. STATEMENT O WO RK Con tract Item 2341 bituminous wear course mixture Bituminous material for mixture Bituminous material for tack 4" solid line, white paint Concrete curb & gutter, Design B612 2" thick bituminous walk 4" thick concrete walk 6" thick concrete curb under fence 4' chn.lk. fence, green vinyl coated 6' chn.lk. fence, green vinyl coated 4' chn.lk. fence gate, 10' wide green vinyl coated 6' chn.lk. fence gate, 4' wide green vinyl coated Backstop Building Scoreboard Player's bench Drinking fountain and water service Turf irrigation system 3" rock mulch PAYMENT NO.: 7 & FINAL FILE NO.: 3471 DATE: J 15. 1991 Page 2 3471PR Unit Est'd Quantity Amount Unit Price Quantitj To Date To Date Ton 21.60 200 200.69 4,334.90 Ton 129.60 22 22.05 2,857.68 Gal. 2.16 110 120 259.20 L.F. 0.11 1,100 1,015 111.65 L.F. 7.45 1,150 1,016 7,569.20 S.F. 0.35 11,950 11,880 4,158.00 S.F. 1.30 3,200 3,261 4,239.30 S.F. 4.86 900 912 4,432.32 L.F. 11.12 440 L.F. 13.45 680 1,092 14,687.40 Each 572.40 1 1.5 858.60 Each 378.00 2 2 756.00 L.S. 3,105.00 L S 100X 3,105.00 L.S. 8,297.64 L S 100X 8,297.64 L.S. 4,708.80 L S 100X 4,708.80 Each 354.24 2 2 708.48 L.S. 2,786.40 L S 100X 2,786.40 L.S. 10,800.00 L S 100X 10,800.00 S.Y. 7.41 70 31.5 233.42 Page 2 3471PR PROJECT:Scie Industr Park _Gradin & Park Lot Impr PLACE: New HODe. M innesot a CONTRACTOR: Sc hinaobe e Builder Inc. STATEMEN OF W ORK Unit Contr Item Unit P rice Marshall seedless ash Each 234.36 Black Hills spruce Each 159.84 Goldflame spirea Each 35.64 Juniper - Hughes Each 17.82 Seed w /3" existing topsoil, PAYMENT NO.: 7 & FINAL FILE NO.: 3471 DATE: July 15, 1991 Est'd Quantity Amount (qu antity To Date To Date 18 16 3,749.76 4 4 639.36 4 4 142.56 3 3 53.46 mulch & fertilizer Acre 1,933.20 2 Sod with 3" existing topsoil S.Y. 1.19 18,000 Silt fence L.F. 2.16 800 TOTAL, BASE BID WORK CHANGE O RDER NO. 1 - A QUICK COUPLERS Quick couplers for turf irrigation system L.S. $834.43 1 TOTAL BASE BID TOTAL CHANGE ORDER NO. 1 TOTAL WORK COMPLETED TO DATE 2.64 5,103.65 18,000 21,420.00 900 1,944.00 $193,565.52 1 $193,565.52 834.43 $194,399.95 $834.43 Page 3 3471PR CONTRACTOR TOTAL BASE BID ADDENDUM NO. 1 SCIENCE INDUSTRY PARK SITE GRADING & PARKING LOT IMPROVEMENTS CITY PROJECT NO. 457A FILE NO. 3471 NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA June 19, 1990 OPENING TIME: 11 :30 A.M., C.D.S.T_. OPENING DATE: Friday, June 22, 1990 ADDENDUM NO. 1 PLAN SHEET 6/6 The backstop and fencing details which notes "Fencing Posts 5' Spacing (Typical)" shall read "Fencing Posts 10' Spacing (Typical) ". BONESTROO, ROSENE, ANDERLIK & ASSOCIATES, INC. 2335 WEST TRUNK HIGHWAY 36 ST. PAUL, MINNESOTA 55113 3471S "M t � r 23,000. Water Alain - Specific Requirements General Requirements 24,000. Severs - Specific Requirements General Requirements Plate 1 -16 'Type II Catch Basin Manhole Plate 1 -25 Bedding Methods for RCP, VCP, & DIP Plate 1 -25A Improved Foundation for RCP, VCP, & DIP Plate 1 -28 Flared End Section and Trash Guard Plate 2 - 1A Gate Valve & Box and Hydrant Installation Plate 2 -9 Concrete Thrust Blocking Plate 4 -1 Concrete Curb and Gutter Plate 4 -3 Pedestrian Curb Ramp Plate 4 -9 B618 Curb & Gutter Construction at Catch Basin Plate SP -60 Concrete Collar on Type II Catch Basin Plate SP -89 Silt Fence Erosion Control Soils Investigations Supplemental Conditions of the Contract Conditions of the Contract r ►: F 3471S ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS Sealed bids will be received by the City of New Hope, Minnesota in the City Hall at 4401 Xylon Avenue N. until 11:30 A.M., C.D.S.T., on Friday, June 22, 1990, at which time they will be publicly opened and read aloud for the fur- nishing of all labor and materials and all else necessary for the following: SCIENCE INDUSTRY PARK - SITE GRADING a PARKING LOT IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 457A 10,000 cu.yds. Common Excavation LUMP SUM Irrigation for Softball & Soccer Field LUMP SUM Backstop and Outfield Fencing for Softball Field 3,500 Sq.yds. Bituminous Surfacing 608 Lin.ft. B612 Concrete Curb 4.0 Acres Sodding and Seeding with miscellaneous storm severs, landscaping and correlated appurtenances. Plans and specifications, proposal forms and contract documents may be seen at the office of the City Clerk, New Hope, Minnesota, and at the office of Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc., Consulting Engineers, 2335 W. Trunk Highway 36, St. Paul, Mn. 55113. Each bid shall be accompanied by a bidder's bond naming the City of New Hope as obligee, certified check payable to the Clerk of the City of New Hope or a cash deposit equal to at least five percent (5Z) of the amount of the bid, which shall be forfeited to the City in the event that the bidder fails to enter into a contract. The City Council reserves the right to retain the deposits of the three lowest bidders for a period not to exceed 45 days after the date and time set for the opening of bids. No bids may be withdrawn for a period of forty-five (45) days after the date and time set for the opening of bids. Payment for the work will be by cash or check. Contractors desiring a copy of the plans and specifications and proposal forms may obtain them from the office of Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc., upon payment of a deposit of $30.00. See "Information to Bidders" for plan/specification deposit refund policy. The city Council reserves the right to reject any and all bids, to waive irregularities and informalities therein and further reserves the right ti award the contract to the best interests of the City. Daniel Donahue, Manager City of New Hope, Minnesota 34715 a) Were a prime bidder who submitted a bona-fide bid to the owner, or b) Submitted quotes to at least two prime bidders which are identified with the returned plans and ,ire- ifications, The following- Planholders need not return plans and specifications in order to receive a refund of deposit: a) Low prime bidder, or b) Successful low subcontractors and suppliers who notify the receptionist within 15 days of the bide q� Shingobee Builders Inc. CONTRACTOR $183,923.86 TOTAL BASE BID PROPOSAL FOR SCIENCE INDUSTRY PARK SITE GRADING & PARKING LOT IMPROVEMENTS CITY PROJECT NO. 457A FILE NO. 3471 NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 1990 OPENING TIME: 11:30 A.M. C.D.S.T. OPENING DATE: Friday, June 22, 1990 Honorable City Council City of New Hope 4401 Xylon Avenue North New Hope, Minnesota 55428 Dear Council Members: The undersigned, being familiar with your local conditions, having made the field inspections and investigations deemed necessary, having studied the plans and specifications for the work including Addenda Nos. 1 and being familiar with all factors and other conditions affecting the work and cost thereof, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, tools, materials, skills, equipment and all else necessary to completely construct the project in accordance with the plans and specifications on file with your Clerk and Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc., 2335 W. Trunk Highway 36, St. Paul, Minnesota 55113, as follows: 110 Lin.ft. Concrete curb and gutter removal @ One DOLLARS Eight CENTS $ 1.08 /lin.ft. $ 118.80 LUMP SUM Site grading @ Twenty -eight Thousand, Eighty DOLLARS No CENTS LUMP SUM $ 28,080.00 1,500 Cu.yds. Select topsoil borrow, CV @ Eight DOLLARS Sixty -four CENTS $ 8.64 /cu.yd. $ 12,960.00 30 Lin.ft. 27 ", Class 3, RCP @ Fifty -four DOLLARS No CENTS $ 54.00 /lin.ft. $ 1,620.00 1 Each Salvage and reinstall 27" RCP apron @ One Thousand Six Hundred Twenty DOLLARS No CENTS $1,620.00 /each $ 1,620.00 30 Lin.ft. 12 Class 5, RCP @ Thirty -two DOLLARS Forty CENTS $ 32.40 / lin.ft. $ 972.00 1 Each 12" RCP apron @ Three Hundred Twenty -four DOLLARS No CENTS $ 324.00 /each $ 324.00 P -1 8 Cu.yds. Class 2 rip rap @ Eighty -one DOLLARS No CENTS $ 81.00 /cu.yd. $ 648.00 6 Cu.yds. Granular filter material @ Sixteen DOLLARS Twenty CENTS $ 16.20 / cu.yd. $ 97.20 16 Sq.yds. Geotextile filter material @ Five DOLLARS Forty CENTS $ 5.40 /sq.yd. $ 86.40 1.9 Lin.ft. Reconstruct existing manhole @ Four Hundred Thirty -one DOLLARS Fifty -seven CENTS $ 431.57 /lin.ft. $ 819.98 1 Each Type II catch basin manhole w /R3067V casting @ One Thousand, Eighty DOLLARS No CENTS $1,080.00 /each $ 1,080.00 1 Each Salvage and reinstall hydrant @ One Thousand Eighty -eight DOLLARS No CENTS $1,188.00 /each $ 1,188.00 320 Lin.ft. 3 ", Class 52, DIP @ Twelve DOLLARS Ninety -six CENTS $ 12.96 /lin.ft. $ 4,147.20 240 Lbs. Fittings @ One DOLLARS Eight CENTS $ 1.08 /lb. $ 259.20 1 Each 3 gate valve and box @ Four Hundred Thirty -two DOLLARS No CENTS $ 432.00 /each $ 432.00 2 Each 1" capped blowout with tee @ Two Hundred Seventy DOLLARS No CENTS $ 270.00 /each $ 540.00 320 Ton Infield aggregate @ Eleven DOLLARS Thirty -four CENTS $ 11.34 /ton $ 3,628.80 1,500 Ton Class 5, 100X crushed aggregate base course @ Nine DOLLARS Fifty CENTS $ 9.50 /ton $ 14,250.00 200 Ton 2331 bituminous base course mixture @ Nineteen DOLLARS Thirty -nine CENTS $ 19.39/ton $ 3,878.00 200 Ton 2341 bituminous wear course mixture @ Twenty -one DOLLARS Sixty CENTS $ 21.60 /ton $ 4,320.00 22 Ton Bituminous material for mixture @ One Hundred Twenty -nine DOLLARS Sixty CENTS $ 129.60 /ton $ 2,851.20 110 Gals. Bituminous material for tack @ Two DOLLARS Sixteen CENTS $ 2.16 /gal. $ 237.60 1,100 Lin.ft. 4" solid line, white paint @ No DOLLARS Eleven CENTS $ 0.11 /lin.ft. $ 121.00 1,150 Lin.ft. Concrete curb and gutter, Design B612 @ Seven DOLLARS Forty -five CENTS $ 7.45 /lin.ft. $ 8,567.50 P -2 11,950 Sq.ft. 2" thick bituminous walk @ No DOLLARS Thirty_ CENTS $ 0.35 ft. $ 4, 182.50 3,200 Sq.ft. 4" thick concrete walk @ On DOLLARS Thirty CENTS $ 1.30_/ $ 4,160.0 900 Sq.ft. 6" thick concrete curb under fence @ Four DOLLARS Eighty -six C $ 4. Isq.ft $ 4,374.00 440 Lin.ft. 4' chain link fence, green vinyl coated @ E leven DOLLARS Twel CENTS $ 11.12 lin. .$ 4,892. 680 Lin.ft. 6' chain link fence, green vinyl coated @ Thirte DOLLAR Forty -five CENTS 13.45 /lin .$ 9,146 1 Each 4' chain link fence gate (10' wide) green vinyl coated @ Five Hundred S eventy -two DOLLARS Forty CENT 572.40 each 572.40 2 Each 6' chain link fence gate (4' wide) green vinyl coated @ Three Hundred Sevent DOL LAR S No CENTS $ 3 �$ 756.00 LUMP SUM Backstop @ Three Thousa One Hund red Five DOLLA No CENT LUMP SUM 3105.0 LUMP SUM Building @ Eight Thousand Two Hundred Ninety -se DO Sixty-four C ENTS L UMP SUM 8 LUMP SUM Scoreboard @ Four Thousand Seven Hundred _ Eight D OLL ARS E ight y C ENTS LUM SUt L_� 4 ,708.80 2 Each Player's bench @ Three Hundred Fifty -four DOLLARS T wenty -four CE NUS 354.24 /e ach 708.48 LUMP SUM Drinking fountain and water service @ Two Thousand Seven Hundred Eighty -six DOLLARS Forty CE NTS LUMP SUM $ 2,786.40 LUMP SUM Turf irrigation system @ Ten T housand Eight H DOLLARS No CENTS LUMP SUM $ 10,800.0 70 Sq.yds. 3" rock mulch @ Seven DOLL Forty -one CENTS $ 7 /sq.yd. $ 518.70 18 Each Marshall seedless ash @ Two H Thirty-four DOLLARS Thirty -six CENTS $ 234.36/each ^ 4,218 4 Each Black Hills spruce @ One Hundred Fifty - ni ne D OLLA RS Eighty - four C 159.54Leach 6 39.36 4 Each Goldflame spirea @ Thi rty - DOLLARS Sixty -nine CENZ§ 3 5.69 /each $ 14 3 Each Juniper - Hughes @ Seventeen DOLLARS Eighty -two CENTS $ 17.82 /each $ 53.46 P -3 3471pr 2.0 Ac. Seed w /3" existing topsoil, mulch & fertilizer @ One Thousand Nine Hundred Thirty -three DO Twenty CENTS $1,9 $ 3,866.40 18,000 Sq.yds. Sod with 3" existing topsoil @ One DOLLARS Ninetee CENT 1.19 /sq.yd. $ 21. 800 Lin.ft. Silt fence @ Two DOLLARS Sixteen CENTS 2.16 (lin.ft. 1,728.0 TOTAL BASE BID ..............................$ 183 The final amount of the contract shall be determined by multiplying the final measured quantities of the various items actually constructed and installed by the unit prices stated therefor, in the manner prescribed in the specifica- tions. However, the low bidder shall be determined by adding the sums result- ing from multiplying the quantities stated by the unit prices bid therefor. Accompanying this bid is a bidder's bond, certified check or cash deposit in the amount of five percent (5z) DOLLARS CENTS ($ ) which is at least five percent (5X) of the amount of my /our bid made payable to the City of New Hope, Minnesota, and the same is subject to forfeiture in the event of default on the part of the undersigned or failure on the part of the undersigned to execute the prescribed contract and bond within fifteen (15) days after its submittal to me /us. In submitting this bid it is understood that the Owner retains the right to reject any and all bids and to waive irregularities and informalities therein and to award the contract to the best interests of the Owner. In submitting this bid it is understood that payment will be by cash or check. It is understood that bids may not be withdrawn for a period of 45 days after the date and time set for the opening of bids. It is understood that the Owner reserves the right to retain the certified check or bond of the three lowest bidders as determined by the Owner for a period not to exceed 45 days after the date set for the opening of bids. Respectfully submitted, 279 North Medina Street Address Lore MN 55357 City, State & Zip Code 612 - 479 -1300 Telephone No. (A Corporation) Shingobe Builders I nc. (An Individual) Name of Bidder (A Partnership) By Gae B. Veit Title President Gae B. Veit Printed Name of Signer P -4 3471pr 1700. ADJUST MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURES General Requirements 1700.1. DESCRIPTION: This work shall consist of adjusting manholes, removing and replacing frames, adjusting catch basins and gate valve boxes. 1700.2. LOCATION: The plans indicate the locations of each manhole, catch basin and gate valve within the project. The necessary vertical adjustments will be determined by the Engineer, and generally as indicated on the schedule of adjustments. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of all existing structures during the course of the work. The Engineer shall assist with the initial location of all manholes, catch basins and gate valve boxes. The Contractor along with the Engineer and a representative of the Owner shall inspect all manholes, catch basins and gate valve boxes prior to beginning construction. Any foreign material found in these structures will be removed immediately by the Owner's forces. Thereafter, the Contractor will be responsible for removing any such foreign material which may enter the structures during the construction period. 1700.3. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS: 1700.3.1. Adjust Manhole & Catch Basin Frames; .. Where existing frame is within 0.10 feet of plan grade no adjustment is to be made. In such cases the crown or gutter shall be either lowered or raised, as the case may be, to put the street and frame at the same grade. Where the frame must be adjusted upward the Contractor shall accomplish this adjustment with standard concrete adjustment rings of the same size as the cone or slab opening. Each adjusting ring shall be placed in a full mortar bed with the frame also resting in a full mortar bed. Adjusting rings needed to raise the casting to grade shall be incidental to the adjust item. Where the frame is to be adjusted downward, this shall be accomplished by removing the necessary number of adjustment rings from the structure. The frame shall then be reset in a full mortar bed to grade. Regardless of the direction of adjustment, no shims allowed. The minimum thickness of all mortar joints inch with a maximum allowable thickness of 1/2 inch. All the joint shall be wiped clean from the inside of all a - ranhole castings must be replaced prior to the placing course. iy material will be shall be at least 1/4 excess mortar from rings and frame. All of the final wear 3/89-GENERAL Copyright 1989 Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderl & Associates, Inc. I Care shall be taken to prevent sand, chunks of concrete or any other debris from entering the structures. 1700.3.2. Remove and Replace Manhole and Catch Basin Frames: Where included in the proposal or the Specific Requirements of Section 1700, the Engineer may elect to have the Contractor remove all manhole and catch basin castings and rings if any at the beginning of the construction work. The Contractor then shall cover the openings with suitable steel plates and continue to construct and compact the subbase and base courses. Prior to placing the curbing or final wear course, the Contractor shall raise all structures to final grade following all construction requirements outlined in 1700.3.1. drainage into catch basins must be maintained during the time the casting is removed.. During the same time period, the Contractor shall be responsible to keep surface water and dirt from entering the sanitary sewer system. Adjusting rings needed to raise the casting to grade shall be incidental to the remove and replace item. 1700.3.3. Reconstruct Manhole & Catch Basins: Where the Engineer requires, or where it is impossible to adjust the structure with the addition or removal of adjustment rings, reconstruction will be necessary. In such cases it will be necessary to add or remove manhole sections. Pre-cast manhole joints shall be rubber O-ring gasket type to match existing joint. In absence of, the O-ring joint, older style manhole joints shall be sealed using a material similar to Ram-Nek or equal gasket material applied in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. 1700.3.4. Adjust Valve Boxes: Valve boxes shall be adjusted to grade prior to the placing of the final wear course. Thorough tamping of the material around the valve box is required. All valve boxes are the sectional screw-threaded adjustable type. 1700.3.5. Valve Box Extensions® Where valve boxes cannot be adjusted without the use of extensions this item will be necessary. The contractor shall remove the upper sections, place the necessary extension and replace the upper section. Thorough tamping of material around the valve box is required. Valve box extensions that fit inside the regular top section are not acceptable. 3/89-GENER&L Copyright 1989 Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc. 1700.4.4. Adjust Valve Boxes: Adjusting valve boxes will be measured by the number of valve boxes adjusted. 1700.4.5. Valve Box Extensions: Valve box extensions shall be measured by the lineal feet of extensions furnished and installed. 1700.5. BASIS OF PAYMENT: Payment for manhole and valve adjustments at the contract unit price shall be payment in full for all costs incidental o these items. Payment shall be made based on the following schedule: Item No. Item Unit 1700.501 Adjust Manhole & Catch Basin Frames Each 1700.502 Remove and Replace Manhole & Catch Basin Frame Each 1700.503 Reconstruct manhole Lin.ft. 1700.504 Adjust Valve Boxes Each 1700.505 Valve Box Extensions Lin.ft. End of Sectic1#1 1700-3 1 3/89-GENERAL Copyright 1989 Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc. 23,000. WATER MAIN General Requirements 23,000.1. DESCRIPTION: This work shall consist of the construction of water mains in accordance with the requirements of the Contract. Under the number- ing system used herein number 23,000.2. - 23,000.2.G inclusive, deal with MATERIALS; 23,000.3. - 23,000.3.L8 inclusive, deal with CONSTRUCTION REQUIRE- MENTS; 23,000.4. - 23,000.4.1. inclusive, deal with METHOD OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT. It is intended that when the Standard Specifications do not cover the subject matter necessary to be covered that the additional numbers in the appropriate section may be utilized in the "Specific Requirements" and the numerical sequence preserved. 23,000.1.A. WORK INCLUDED: The Contractor shall, unless otherwise specified, furnish all materials, equipment, tools and labor necessary to do the work required under his contract and unload, have and distribute all pipe, fit- tings, valves, hydrants and accessories. The Contractor shall also excavate the trenches and pits to the required dimensions; sheet, brace and support the adjoining ground or structures where necessary; handle all drainage or ground water; provide barricades, guards, and warning lights; lay and test the pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories, backfill and consolidate the trenches and pits; maintain the surface over the trench, remove surplus excavated material; and clean the site of the work. The Contractor shall also furnish all equipment, tools, labor and materials required to rearrange sewers, conduits, ducts, pipes and other structures encountered in the installation of the work. All the work to completely construct the water facilities shall be done in strict accordance with the contract documents to which these General Requirements are a part. 23,000.1.B. SPECIFICATION REFERENCE: In these General Requirements reference is made to the Minnesota Department of Transportation Specifications which shall mean the "Standard Specifications for Construction, 1988 Edition ", and subsequent amendments. 23,000.2. MATERIALS: The materials used in this work shall be new and conform to the requirements for kind and size of material specified herein or as altered in the "Specific Requirements ", "Special Provisions" and "Proposal ". 23,000.2.A. DUCTILE IRON PIPE: All ductile iron pipe shall be in accordance with AWWA C151 of the Class as shown on the plans, "Specific Requirements ", and /or "Proposal ". All pipe shall be furnished with standard thickness cement mortar lining conforming with AWWA C104. All pipe shall have push -on joints as specified in AWWA 0111 and shall be electrically conductive. WK111Zl7i 23000G Copyright 1990 Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc. 23,000.2.B. CAST IRON FITTINGS: All fittings shall be mechanical joint unless otherwise indicated and shall be in accordance with AWWA 0110. All fittings shall be designed for not less than 250 psi working pressure and shall have a standard thickness cement mortar lining conforming with AWWA C104. Ductile iron compact fittings as specified in 0153 with standard thick- ness lining are acceptable in lieu of cast iron fittings. 23,000.2.C. RUBBER GASKETS: Rubber gaskets for mechanical joints and push-on joints shall conform to AWWA C111 and shall be designed and manufactured to exact dimensions to assure a liquid-tight joint. All joints shall be in- stalled with an electrical contact through every joint. 23,000.2.D. FIRE HYDRANTS: All hydrants shall be of a uniform make. The following information will be furnished in the "Specific Requirements": (1) Size of valve opening; (2) Depth of trench and cover; (3) No. and size of hose connections; (4) No. and size of steamer connections; (5) Size and type of pipe connections; (6) Direction of opening; (7) Type of threads, hose connec- tions; (8) Type of threads, steamer connection; (9) Shape and size of opera- ting nut; (10) open or closed drain holes; (11) Hydrant accessories such as flags, wrenches or drain pumps. 23,000.2.E. GATE VALVE AND BOX: Gate valves shall be bronze mounted, iron body valves conforming with requirements of AWWA 509. All valves shall have O-ring seals with non-rising stems and shall open to the left. Valves shall be equipped with mechanical joint ends in accordance with AWWA 0111. Valve boxes shall be cast iron, screw-type, adjustable for 7-1/2 foot depth of cover. Valves and boxes shall be considered as integral units. Gate valve boxes shall be three piece, Clow F-2450H, Mueller J-10380, or equal. 23,000.2.F. BUTTERFLY VALVE AND BOX: Butterfly valves shall be cast iron body rubber seated, tight closure valves in accordance with AWWA 0504. Butterfly valves shall be furnished with mechanical joint ends conforming to AWWA 0111. The valve operator is an integral part of the butterfly valve and shall be constructed to operate without maintenance under ground water conditions. Valve operators shall be manufactured by the valve manufacturer 0 and/or in valve sizes 20 inch diameter and larger shall be equal to 90 worm gear actuators as manufactured by Limitorque Corporation or equal for buried service. Valve boxes shall be cast iron and shall be two or three piece type with screw adjustable top section for 7-1/2 foot depth of cover. WINNHW-J 2300OG Copyright 1990 Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc. 23,000.2.G. GRANULAR MATERIALS: Materials used for improved pipe foundation of pipe bedding shall meet the requirements of Mn/DOT Specification 3149H Course Filter Aggregate, except that hard, durable crushed carbonate quarry rock may also be used. The material shall have the following crushing requirements: Not less than 50Z of the material, by weight, that is retained on the No. 4 sieve shall have one or more crushed faces. 23,000.3. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS: 23,000.3.A. INSPECTION: 23,000.3.A1. Of Materials at Delivery Point: During the process of unload- ing, all pipe and accessories shall be inspected by the Contractor for loss or damage in transit. 23,000.3.A2. Field Inspection: All pipe and accessories shall be laid, jointed, disinfected and tested for defects and leakage in the manner herein specified. 23,000.3.A3. Disposition of Defective Material: All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws or other defects will be rejected by the Engineer and the Contractor shall promptly remove from the site of the work such defective material. 23,000.3.B. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR MATERIAL: 23,000.331. Responsibility for Material Furnished by The Contractor shall be responsible for all material furnished by him and he shall replace at his own expense all such material that is found to be defective in manufacture or that has become damaged in handling after delivery by the manufacturer. This shall include the furnishing of all material and labor required for the replacement of installed material discovered defective prior to the final acceptance of the work. 23,000.3.B2. Responsibility for Safe Storage: The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe storage of material furnished by or to him and accepted by him and intended for the work, until it has been incorporated in the completed project. 23,000.3.C. HANDLING PIPE AND ACCESSORIES: 23,000.3.01. General: Pipe and other accessories shall, unless otherwise directed, be unloaded at the point of delivery, hauled to and distributed at the site of the project by the Contractor. They shall at all times be handled with care to avoid damage. 2300OG Copyright 1990 Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc. 2300OG Copyright ' • 1 ' Associates, 2300OG Copyright 1990 Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc. 230000 Copyright 1990 Bonestrooa Rosee, Anderlik & Associates, Inc. been laid, tested for defects and repaired if necessary, and the earth around it compacted to a depth of one foot or over the top of the pipe. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility and duty to be familiar with local and state laws and municipal ordinances relating to this type of work and he shall assume the responsibility for compliance therewith. 23,000.3.Ell. Manner of Piling i Excavated Material: All excavated material shall be piled in a manner that will not, endanger the work and that will avoid obstructing sidewalks and driveways. Gutters shall be kept clear or other satisfactory provisions made for street drainage. 23,000.3.E12. Barricades, Guards, and Safety Provisions: To protect persons from injury and to avoid property damage, adequate barricades, construction signs, fences, flashers and guards as required shall be placed and maintained during the progress of the construction work and until it is safe for traffic to use the trenched roadway. 23,000.3.E13. Traffic and Utility Controls: Excavations for pipe laying operations shall be conducted in a manner to cause the least interruption to traffic. Hydrants under pressure, valve boxes, curb stop boxes, fire or police call boxes or other utility controls shall be left unobstructed and accessible during the construction period. 23,000.3.E14. Private Property Protection: Trees, fences, poles and all other private property shall be protected unless their removal is authorized and any property damage shall be satisfactorily restored by the Contractor or adequate compensation therefore shall be the responsibility of the Contrac- tor. Where tree trimming is required, all cut surfaces one inch or more in diameter shall be covered with a coat of asphalt paint. 23,000.3.E15. Interruption of Water Services: No valve or other control on the existing system shall be operated for any purpose by the Contractor with- out approval of the Engineer and all consumers affected by such operation shall be notified by the Contractor at least an hour before the operation and be advised of the probable time when service will be restored. 23,000.3.E.16. Tunneling, Jacking or Excavation Other Than Open Trench: Where pipe cannot be placed by open trench excavation, the method for placing shall be stated in the "Specific Requirements". 23,000.3.E17. Manner of Handling Pipe and Accessories Into Trench: Proper implements, tools and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be pro- vided and used by the Contractor for the safe and convenient prosecution of the work. 23,000.3.E18. Inspection Before Installation: Before lowering and while suspended, the pipe shall be carefully inspected for defects and cracks. Any defective, damaged or unsound pipe shall be rejected. 2300OG Copyright 1990 Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc. 23,000.3.E19. Pipe Kept Clean: All foreign matter or dirt shall be removed from the inside of the pipe before it is lowered into its position in the trench, and it shall be kept clean by approved means during and after laying. 23,000.3.E20. Preventing Trench Water From Entering Pipe: All openings along the line of water main shall be securely closed, as directed, and at the sus- pension of work at any time, suitable stoppers shall be placed to prevent earth or other substances from entering water main. 23,000.3.E21. Railroad and Highway Crossings: When any railroad or highway is crossed, all precautionary construction measures required by the Railroad and Highway Department shall be followed. Railroad or highway crossings shall be jacking or tunneling and construction and permit requirements shall be as stated in the "Specific Requirements". 23,000.3.E22. Unsuitable Conditions for Laying Pipe . No pipe shall be laid in water or when the trench conditions are unsuitable for such work. 23,000.3.F. JOINTING: All jointing of mechanical joint pipe and push-on joint pipe shall be in accordance with the requirements of A.W.W.A. Speci- fication 0600. 23,000.3.F1. Preparation of Pipe Ends: Before laying the pipes, the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped clean and dry. Pipe ends shall be kept clean until joints are made. 23,000.3.G. SETTING VALVES, VALVE BOXES AND FITTINGS 23,000.3.G1. General: Valves and pipe fittings shall be set and jointed to new pipe in the manner heretofore specified for cleaning, laying and jointing pipe. 23,000.3.G2. Setting Valves: All valves shall be set where directed by the Engineer. Valves and boxes shall be supported on a concrete block as shown on the detail drawings. Valve boxes shall be maintained centered and plumb over the operating nut of the valve. Tops of the valve boxes shall be set flush with the existing surface and shall be set so as to provide 12 inches of up- ward adjustment. Each valve box shall be marked with a 4" x 4" timber, 6' long set with 2 feet of the post exposed above grade. 23,000.3.H. SETTING HYDRANTS: 23,000.3.H1. Location: All hydrants shall be set where directed by the engineer. A grade stake and location stake will be provided by the Engineer at each hydrant. No hydrant shall be set until such a grade stake has been placed. PRIAMM 2300OG Copyright 1990 Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc. 23,000.3.H2. Procedure: All hydrants shall be supported on an 8 inch concrete block or equal concrete base. Each hydrant shall be braced as shown on the detail drawings. After each hydrant has been set, there shall be placed around the base of the hydrant, not less than one cubic yard of gravel or crushed rock from which all fine material has been removed. A layer of polyethylene, minimum 4 mil, thickness, shall be carefully placed over the rock to prevent the backfill from entering the voids in the drain rock. All hydrants must be maintained in a plumb position during the backfilling opera- tion. 23,000.3.I. ANCHORAGE OF BENDS, TEES AND PLUGS: 23,000.3.11. General: All bends, tees, hydrants and plugs shall be securely braced against undisturbed soil using timbers, precast concrete block with wooden wedges or poured in place concrete thrust blocks. Method of anchorage must be reviewed with and approved by the Engineer prior to backfilling. 23,000.3.J. TESTING PIPE LINES: 23,000.3.J1. Pressure During Tes ts: After the pipe has been laid and back - filled as specified, all newly laid pipe, or any valved section of it shall, unless otherwise specified, be subjected to hydrostatic or air pressure of 150 lbs. per square inch. The test must be conducted under the observation of the Engineer and with his approval. 23,000.3.J2. Duration of Pressure Test: The duration of each pressure test shall be at least two (2) hours. 23,000.3.J3. Procedure: All pipe or sections thereof shall be slowly filled with water from a safe source if a hydrostatic test is used, and the specified test pressure, measured at the lowest point of elevation, shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe in a satisfactory manner. The pump, pipe connection, taps, gauges and all necessary apparatus shall be furnished by the Contractor. Gauges and measuring devices must meet with the approval of the Engineer. The test gauge shall be calibrated in one pound increments and operate smoothly and accurately. 23,000.3.J4. Expelling Air Before Test: Before applying hydrostatic test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe. To accomplish this, taps shall be made, if necessary, at points at highest elevation and afterward tightly plugged. 23,000.3.J5. Examination Under Pressure: Any cracked or defective pipes, fittings, valves or hydrants discovered in consequence of the pressure test shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor with sound material in the manner provided and the test shall be repeated until satisfactory to the Engi- neer. � 23000G Copyright 1990 Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc. 23,000.3.J6. Permissible Leakage: A drop in pressure over a 30 minute test period exceeding 3 pounds shall be cause for rejection of the project. All leaks shall be corrected and the test repeated until the pressure drop is within the 3 pound limit. 23,000.3.J7. Conductivity:_ Conductivity shall be provided throughout the water system by use of copper straps or approved conductive gaskets with copper inserts. All fittings shall be mechanical joint with copper straps. Lead tipped gaskets will not be approved for conductivity. Copper jumper straps between sections of pipe shall be not less than 1/16" x 3/4" strap bolted to shop welded pipe straps of the same size. Bolts shall be 5/16" diameter bronze. For all locations where shop welded straps are not available, field welds shall be made using the Cadweld method with size 32 cartridge. Each field weld shall be properly made after filing the surface of the pipe to a clean bare metal over the entire area of the weld. Straps bolted to mechanical joint fittings shall be not less than 1/16" x 1-1/2". All straps shall be securely fastened and backfill placed so as to not damage the conductivity. Conductivity test shall be performed on all mains after they have been pres- sure tested and are full of water at normal operating pressure. A direct current of 350 amps at 30 volts shall be passed through the line for 4 minutes. Current flow shall be measured continuously on a suitable ammeter and shall remain steady without interruption or excessive fluctuation through- out the period. At the end of the 4 minute period, the current shall be raised to 400 amps for 1 minute without fluctuation. Insufficient current or wide fluctuations of ammeter needle shall be evidence of defective conduc- tivity which shall be isolated, corrected and retested. Acceptable equipment for the test shall be arc welding machines with adequate sized cables to carry the test current without voltage drop or overheating. Conductivity test shall be carried out in the presence of the Engineer or his duly authorized agent. Caution shall be exercised at all times when working with electrical equipment and wires during the conductivity test. 23,000.3.K. DISINFECTION: 2300OG Copyright 1990 Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc. When the installation has been completed, the main shall be filled with water at a velocity of less than 1 foot per second. This water shall remain in the pipe for at least 24 hours. After the 24 hour retention period, the heavily chlorinated water shall be flushed from the main until the chlorine concentra- tion in the water leaving the main is less than 1 ppm. Tests are required to determine chlorine residual at the end of the 24 hour retention period and after flushing to ascertain that the heavily chlorinated water has been removed from the pipeline. At the end of the 24 hour retention period, the main shall contain not less than 10 ppm chlorine. The number of tablets required per 20 foot length of pipe based on 3-k grain available chlorine per tablet is as follows: Diameter 4" 6" 8" 10" 12" 16" 18" 20" 24" No. of Tablets 1 2 3 4 5 9 12 14 20 After final flushing and before the main is placed in operation, samples shall be collected and tested to show the absence of coliform organisms. If the initial disinfection fails to produce satisfactory bacteriological samples, the main shall be reflushed and resampled. If further samples show the presence of coliform organisms, then the mains shall be rechlorinated by the continuous feed or slug method of chlorination until satisfactory results are obtained. I 23,000.3.L. BACKFILLING, CLEANING UP AND MAINTAINING SURFACES: 23,000.3.L1. Backfilling Procedure at Pipe 2onee Granular material or other suitable backfill material free from rocks, boulders and other unsuitable sub- stances shall be deposited in the trench simultaneously on both sides of the pipe for the full width of the trench to a height of at least six (6) inches above the top of the pipe. The backfill shall be hand placed and thoroughly compacted to fill all spaces under and adjacent to the pipe. 23000G Copyright 1990 Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc. 23,000.3.L2. Backfill Procedure Above Pipe Zone: (Tvpe "a ") Procedure Where Settlement is Allowable: Succeeding layers of backfill may contain coarser materials and shall be free from pieces of rock, concrete or clay lump more than one cubic foot in volume, roots, stumps, tin cans, rubbish, frozen mate- rials and other similar articles whose presence in the backfill would cause excessive settlement. This type of backfilling may be accomplished above the pipe zone by any mechanical means or otherwise, at the option of the Contrac- tor. On traveled streets, completed backfill shall be rolled by wheel type or crawler type equipment weighing not less than 6 tons. Surface shall be main- tained in passable condition for traffic until date of final inspection. Backfilling under exposed existing utilities shall be compacted to prevent settlement and any future displacement. 23,000.3.L3. Backfilling Procedure Above Pipe Zone: (Type "b ") Succeeding layers of backfill may contain coarser materials and shall be free from pieces of rock, concrete or clay lump more than one cubic foot in volume, roots, stumps, tin cans, rubbish, frozen materials and other similar articles whose presence in the backfill could cause excessive settlement. This type of back- filling may be compacted by puddling with hose and long pipe nozzle, or by flooding the trench, as the backfilling is accomplished above the pipe zone by any mechanical means or otherwise: at the option of the Contractor. It is important that proper precautions be taken to prevent flooding Of the pipe when flooding the trench and the Contractor shall be wholly responsible for neglect of these precautions. 23,000.3.L4. Procedure Where No Settlement is Allowable: (Type "c ") Succeeding layers of backfill may contain coarser materials and shall be free from pieces of rocks, concrete or clay lump more than one -third cubic foot in volume, roots, stumps, tin cans, rubbish, frozen materials and other similar articles whose presence in the backfill would cause excessive settlement. This type of backfilling shall be placed in uniform layers before compaction of approximately 6 inches, tamped by mechanical means to the density specified in the Specific Requirements. 23,000.3.L6. Deficiency of Backfill, By Whom Supplied: Any deficiency in the quantity of material for backfilling the trenches or for filling depressions caused by settlement shall be supplied by the Contractor with no extra compen- � 23000G Copyright 1990 Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc. sation allowed. Any settlement which occurs shall be refilled by the Contrac- tor. Material shall be at the Contractor's expense and of a material approved by the Engineer. 23,000.3.L7. Restoration of Surface: All surfaces shall be returned to the original grade and contour. Any excess dirt caused by displacement due to structures shall be removed by the Contractor to a location as designated with no extra compensation. 23,000.3.L8. Cleaning Up: Surplus pipe line material, tools and temporary structures shall be removed by the Contractor and all dirt and rubbish caused by his operations and excess earth from excavations shall be hauled to a dump provided by the Contractor and the construction site shall be left to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Clean up operations shall be accomplished promptly after tests are completed. 23,000.4. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT: 23,000.4.A. PIPE IN PLACE: Pipe will be paid for at the contract price per linear foot, which shall include the cost of furnishing all pipe, rubber gas- ket, joints and other material and of delivering, handling, laying, trenching, bedding, backfilling, compaction, testing and all material or work necessary to install the pipe complete in place at the depth above specified. The length of pipe for which payment is made shall be the actual overall length measured along the axis of the pipe without regard to intervening valves or fittings. All jacking shall be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot which shall include both the water pipe and the casing under roadway and railroad, complete as specified previously under Section 23,000.3.E21. Payment shall be made for the jacking length specified unless unforseen conditions require a change in length of jacking. 23,000.4.8. CAST IRON FITTINGS: Cast iron specials will be paid for at the contract price per pound installed, said weights to include fittings, glands, bolts and gaskets. Payment for cast iron fittings shall be for the published weights of mechanical joint fittings as listed in A..W.A. 0110. If ductile iron fittings are used, the weight for payment shall be the equivalent cast iron weight. 23,000.4.C. HYDRANTS: Hydrants will be paid for at the contract unit price per hydrant installed complete with gravel, concrete base and bracing, but does not include the auxiliary hydrant valve which shall be paid for under another item of these specifications if required. �r 23000G Copyright 1990 Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc. 23,000.4.D. GATE VALVES AND BOXES: Gate valves and boxes, including exten- sions, will be paid for at the contract unit price per valve and box installed for each size. 23,000.4.E. BUTTERFLY VALVES AND BOXES: Butterfly valves, operators and boxes, including extensions, will be paid for at the contract unit per valve and box installed for each size. 23,000.4.F. IMPROVED PIPE FOUNDATION MATERIAL: The additional granular material required below the specified bedding shall be paid for per lineal foot of improved pipe foundation placed for each six (6) inch thickness of granular material placed. 23,000.4.G. ROCK EXCAVATION: If rock is encountered in the trench, such rock excavation shall be measured by volume in cubic yards and shall be measured from the top of the rock to a point six (6) inches below the bottom of the pipe and twelve (12) inches from each side of the inside diameter of the pipe. The minimum trench width of the rock excavation shall be 36 inches. Payment shall be at the contract unit price per cubic yard. 23,000.4.H. SAND CUSHION: Granular material used for a sand cushion in areas of rock excavation where suitable materials are not available on site shall be paid for at the contract unit price per ton of material deposited under and around the pipe. 23,000.4.1. SPECIAL STRUCTURES AND APPURTENANCES: Basis of payment for special structures and appurtenances not included above shall be stated in the "Special Provisions ", "Specific Requirements" and /or "Proposal ". Section End of 23,000-14 23000G Copyright 1990 Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc. 24,000. SEWERS General Requirements 24,000.1. DESCRIPTION: This work shall consist of the construction of severs in accordance with the requirements of the Contract. Under the numbering sys- tem used herein numbers 24,000.2 - 24,000.2.N inclusive, deal with Materials; 24,000.3 - 24,000.7.A inclusive, deal with Construction Requirements; 24,000.8 - 24,000.8.K inclusive, deal with Method of Measurement and 24,000.9 - 24,000.9.M, inclusive, deal with Basis of Payment. It is intended that when the Standard Specifications do not cover the subject matter necessary to be covered, additional numbers in the appropriate section may be utilized in the Specific Requirements and the numerical sequence preserved. 24,000.1.A. WORK INCLUDED: The Contractor shall, unless specified otherwise, furnish all materials, equipment, tools and labor necessary.to do the work re- quired under his contract and unload, haul and distribute all pipe, castings, fittings, manholes and accessories. The Contractor shall also excavate the trenches and pits to the required dimensions; sheet, brace and support the ad- joining ground or structures where necessary; handle all drainage or ground- water; provide barricades, guards and warning lights; lay and test the pipe, castings, fittings, manholes and accessories; backfill and consolidate the trenches and pits; maintain the surface over the trench; remove surplus exca- vated material; and clean the site of the work. The Contractor shall also furnish all equipment, tools, labor and materials required to rearrange severs, conduits, ducts, pipes or other structures en- countered in the installation of the work. All the work to completely con- struct the sewer facilities shall be done in strict accordance with the con- tract documents to which these General Requirements are a part. 24,000.1.B. SPECIFICATION REFERENCE: In these General Requirements reference is made to the Minnesota Department of Transportation Specifications which shall mean the "Standard Specifications for Highway Construction" of the Mn/DOT, dated January 1, 1983 and subsequent amendments. 24,000.2. MATERIALS: The materials used in this work shall be new and con- form to t�e requirements for class, kind and size of material specified below tr as altered or more specifically described in the "Specific Requirements", "Special Provisions" and "Proposal". 24,000.2.A. CLAY PIPE: Clay sewer pipe and fittings shall conform to the re- quirements of the current A.S.T.M. Specification C-700 for extra strength clay sewer pipe. Extra strength pipe shall be used for all Vitrified Clay Sewer Pipe on the project. 24,000.2.B. POLYVINYL CHLORIDE SEWER PIPE: Polyvinyl chloride sewer pipe and fittings shall be produced by a continuous extrusion process using Type 1, Grade 1 material as defined in A.S.T.M. Spec. D-1784. The design, dimensions and wall thickness shall be in accordance with ASTM Spec. D-3034, SDR 35. 24,000-1 1/88-24000G Copyright 1988 Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc. 24,000.2.C. REINFORCED CONCRETE SEWER PIPE: The sewer pipe shall conform to the requirements of the Standard Specifications for Reinforced Concrete Sewer Pipe, A.S.T.M. Designation C-76 of the class designated on the plans and in the Proposal. 24,000.2.D. CORRUGATED METAL PIPE: Corrugated metal pipe shall conform to the Standard Specifications for Corrugated Metal Pipe Culvert of the A.A.S.H.O. Specification M-36 with exceptions and additions as noted in Mn/DOT Specification 3226. The kind of base metal and gauge is stated in the "Specific Requirements". If any special coating is required, it will be stated in the "Specific Requirements". 24,000.2.E. DUCTILE IRON PIPE: Ductile iron pipe shall conform with the re- quirements of AWWA Standard 0151 of the class and type stated in the "Specific Requirements". All ductile iron pipe shall have mechanical or push-on type joints and shall have a standard thickness cement mortar lining in accordance with AWWA Standard 0104. Where ductile iron pipe is used as a pressure line receiving discharge.from a pumping station, all joints shall be electrically conductive by use of copper straps or approved conductive gaskets with copper inserts. 24,000.2.F. CAST IRON tings shall be mechanical fittings shall be desi have a standard thickness Standard C104. Ductile are considered equal. FITTINGS: Where ductile iron pipe is furnished, fit- joint in accordance with AWWA Standard 0110. All fined for 150 psi working pressure. All fittings shall of cement mortar lining in accordance with AWWA iron fittings in accordance with AWWA Standard C-153 24,000.2.G. JOINTS AND JOINT MATERIALS: 24,000.2.G1. Clay Pipe: Clay pipe joints shall be rubber or plastic type compression joints in accordance with A.S.T.M. Spec. C-425. Plain-end vitri- fied clay pipe may be used which employ Type B compression couplings in accor- dance with ASTM Specification C594. 24,000.2.G2. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe: Polyvinyl chloride pipe joints shall be bell and spigot type with solvent cement applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Gasketed push-on type joints are considered equal. 24,000.2.G3. Concrete Pike: Reinforced concrete pipe joints shall meet the requirements of ASTM Specification C-361 and shall be the Bureau of Reclama- tion Type R-4. Deformed concrete pipe shall be jointed with material similar to Ram-Nek, Hamilton Kent, Kent Seal No. 2 or equal gasket material applied in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1/88-2400OG Copyright 1988 Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc. MERM 1/88- 24000G Copyright 1988 8onestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc. 6 1/88-2400OG Copyright 1988 Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc. 24,000.2.M. MORTAR MATERIALS: Mortar used for laying up concrete block or brick manholes or used for plastering lift holes and exteriors of manholes shall consist of Standard Portland Cement Type I, Standard Serial Designation C-150. Lime shall conform to specifications for normal finishing hydrated lime, A.S.T.M. Serial Designation C-6 or specifications for hydraulic hydrated lime for structural purposes, A.S.T.M. Serial Designation C-141. Gradation shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. 24,000.2.N. GRANULAR MATERIALS. Granular materials used for improved pipe foundation, special pipe bedding, or PVC pipe bedding where improved pipe foundation is required shall meet the requirements of Mn/DOT Specification 3149H, Coarse Filter Aggregate except that hard, durable crushed carbonate quarry rock may also be used. The material shall have the following crushing requirements. Not less than 50Z of the material, by weight, that is retained on the No. 4 sieve shall have one or more crushed faces. Granular materials used for pipe bedding in rock and for PVC pipe bedding where improved pipe foundation is not required shall meet the requirements of Mn/DOT Specification 3149A, Granular Borrow, except that 100Z, by weight, shall pass the 1" sieve. 24,000.3. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS: 24,000.3.A. INSPECTION: 24,000.3.A1. Of Materials at Facto All materials, whether furnished by the Owner or by the Contractor are subject, at the discretion of the Owner, to inspection and approval at the plant of the manufacturer. 24,000.3.A2. Of Materials at Delivery Point: During the ' process of unloading, all pipe and accessories shall be inspected by the Contractor for loss or damage in transit. No shipment of material shall be accepted by the Contractor until or unless notation of any lost or damaged material shall have been made on the bill of lading by the agent of the carrier. 24,000.3.A3. Field IngptSLi2aL All pipe and accessories shall be laid, jointed, tested for defects and for infiltration in the manner herein speci- fied as directed by the Engineer and subject to his approval. 24,000.3.A4. Disposition of Defective Material: All material found during the progress • the work to have cracks, flaws or other defects will be rejected by the Engineer and the Contractor shall promptly remove from the site of the work such defective material. 24,000.3.Bl. ResponsibilitV for Material Furnished • Contractor: The Con- tractor shall be responsible for all material furnished by him and he shall replace at his own expense all such material that is found to be defective in manufacture or that has become damaged after delivery by the manufacturer. 24,000-5 1/88-2400OG Copyright 1988 Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc. 24,000-6 1/88-24000G Copyright 1988 Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc. 24, 000.3 <B e EXCAVATION & PREPARATION OF TRENCH: All surface water and ground water discharges shall be conducted to natural drainage channels, drains or storm sewers. 24,000 -7 1/88 ®240000 Copyright 1988 Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inca 24,000.3.E3.1. Class C-1 Beddin Where Class C-1 bedding is specified or allowed with existing materials, the trench shall have a bottom conforming to the grade to which the pipe is to be laid. The pipe shall be laid upon sound soil, cut true and even so that the barrel of the pipe will have bearing over at least 50 percent of the pipe width for its entire length. Bell holes shall be excavated to insure that the pipe rests for its entire length upon the bot- tom of the trench. When a uniform trench bottom cannot be formed as speci- fied, Class C-2 bedding shall be used. The contractor may, at his option, elect to use a Class C-2 bedding in lieu of Class C-1 bedding, without any additional compensation allowed therefor. 24,000.3.E3.2. Class C-2 Bedding: Where Class C-2 bedding is specified or allowed, the pipe shall be bedded on granular materials meeting 24,000.2.N specifications. The depth of bedding shall be one fourth of the outside diameter of the pipe barrel, but not less than six inches in accordance with the standard detail plates. 24,000.3.E3.3. Class B Bedding: Where Class B bedding is specified or allowed, the pipe shall be bedded on granular materials meeting 24,000.2.N. specifications. The depth of bedding shall be one fourth of the outside dia- meter of the pipe barrel, but not less than six inches, plus one half of the outside diameter of the pipe barrel all in accordance with the standard detail plate. 24,000.3.E3.4. Class A jtddinga Where Class A bedding is specified or allowed, the pipe shall be bedded in the same manner as for Class C-1 bedding except that 2000 psi concrete shall be placed around the pipe from the bottom of the trench to a point one half the outside diameter of the pipe barrel above the bottom of the trench all in accordance with the Standard Detail Plate. 24,000.3.E3.5. PVC Pipe Bedding: All polyvinyl chloride sever pipe shall be installed and bedded in accordance with ASTM specification D-2321, "Recom- mended Practice for Underground Installation of Flexible Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe" with granular materials meeting Specification 24,000.2.N. used for all PVC pipe bedding. The granular materials shall be placed from a point 6" be- low the bottom of the pipe to a point 12" above the top of the pipe. Bedding requirements shall include mechanical compaction of sand and gravel material surrounding the pipe to at least ninety-five (95Z) percent of maximum density as described in ASTM Methods D698 to prevent deflection of the pipe cross-section. Payment for such bedding and compaction operations shall be considered incidental to the installation of the sever pipe. Where existing soils are of non-granular nature, the Contractor shall furnish sand or gravel material for pipe bedding as incidental to the cost of the pipe. pzvrte� 1/88-24000G Copyright 1988 Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc. The Owner reserves the right to measure deflection of PVC sever pipe 30 days after placement of backfill material in the trench and at any time during the warranty period. Deflections greater than five (5Z) percent of the inside pipe diameter shall be considered failure of the bedding procedure and the Contrac- tor may be required to re-excavate the trench and provide additional compaction along the side of the sever pipe with no additional compensation for such work. Deflection testing of PVC pipe shall be performed by the contractor with no additional compensation allowed therefor. 24,000.3.E4. Correcting Faulty Grade: Any part of the trench excavated below grade shall be corrected with approved material thoroughly compacted without additional compensation to the Contractor. 24,000.3.E5. Improved Pipe Foundation: When the bottom of the trench is soft or where in the opinion of the Engineer unsatisfactory foundation conditions exist, the Contractor shall excavate to a depth to insure proper foundation. The excavation shall then be brought up to pipe grade with thoroughly compacted granular materials meeting Specification 24,000.2.N. No payment will be made for rock installed without the knowledge or consent of the Engineer nor will payment be made for rock installed only for devatering purposes. Payment will be made for only the authorized granular foundation material placed under the pipe. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to notify the Engineer of changing soil conditions which may be of poor bearing capacity and when organic soils are encountered. Where utilities are placed on unstable soils without notifi- cation of the Engineer, the Contractor shall be responsible for all repairs and correction of the installation without further compensation. 24,000.3.E6. Pipe Clearance in Rock: Ledge rock, boulders and large stones shall be removed to provide a clearance of at least 6 inches below the outside barrel of the pipe and to a clear width of 6 inches on each side of all pipe and appurtenances for pipe 15 inches or less in diameter; for pipes larger than 15 inches, a clearance of 6 inches below and a clear width of 9 inches on each side of outside diameter of pipe shall be provided. Adequate clearance for properly jointing pipe laid in rock trenches shall be provided at bell holes. 24,000.3.E7. Pipe Bedding in Rock: Where rock is encountered, the space be- tween the rock and the pipe surfaces shall be backfilled with granular materi- als meeting specification 24,000.2.N. and thoroughly tamped. The material from the trench excavation, other than rock, boulders, peat, silt or other un- acceptable material, shall be considered as suitable material. No additional compensation for placing or tamping this material shall be allowed. However, in the event that additional material must be hauled in, the hauling of the suitable granular material for the pipe bed shall be paid for on a weight basis only when ordered placed by the Engineer. 24,000-9 1/88-24000G Copyright 1988 Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc. 24,000.3.E8. Solid Rock Excavation Defined: Solid rock excavation shall in- clude such rocks as are not decomposed, weathered or shattered and which will require blasting, barring, wedging or use of air tools for removal. Under this classification shall be included the removal of any concrete or masonry structures (except concrete pavement, curb, gutter and sidewalk) or boulders exceeding one-half (1/2) cubic yard in volume that may be encountered in the work. 24,000.3.E9. Blasting Procedure: Blasting for excavation will not proceed until the Contractor has notified the Engineer of the necessity to do so, such notification shall in no manner relieve the Contractor of the hazards and lia- bility contingent in blasting operations. The hours of blasting will be fixed by the Owner. Any damage caused by blasting shall be repaired by the Contrac- tor at his expense. The Contractor's methods of procedure relative to blast- ing shall conform to local and state laws and municipal ordinances. 24,000.3.E10. Bell Holes Requir Bell holes of ample dimensions shall be dug in trenches at each joint to permit the jointing to be made properly. 24,000.3.Ell. Braced & Sheeted Trenches: The Contractor shall adequately brace and sheet excavations wherever necessary to prevent caving or damage to nearby property. The cost of this temporary sheeting and bracing, unless pro- vided for otherwise, shall be considered as part of the excavation costs with- out additional compensation to the Contractor. Trench sheeting or bracing shall remain in place until the pipe has been laid, tested for defects and re- paired if necessary, and the earth around it compacted to a depth of one foot over the top of the pipe. Sheeting, bracing, etc. placed in the "pipe zone" (that part of the trench be- low a distance of one foot above the top of the pipe) shall not be removed without the written permission or written order of the Engineer. Sheeting ordered left in place by the Engineer shall be paid for at the unit price bid. The Contractor may also leave in place, at his own expense, any sheeting or bracing in addition to that ordered left in place by the Engineer necessary to prevent injury or damage to persons, corporations, or property, whether public or private, for which the Contractor under the terms of this contract is liable. 24,000.3.E12. Manner of Piling Excavated Material: All excavated material shall be piled in a manner that will not endanger the work and that will avoid obstructing sidewalks and driveways. Gutters shall be kept clear or other satisfactory provisions made for street drainage. 24,000.3.E13. Maintenance of Traffic: When traffic cannot be diverted, it will be permitted to use the highway at all times. the Contractor shall at his own expense erect and maintain warning signs and warning barricades. The Contractor shall at his own expense, place and maintain acceptable warning lights and barricades to protect persons from injury and to avoid property damage. 1/88-24000G Copyright 1988 Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc. At all dangerous intersections, bypasses, and intercepting roads, the Contrac- tor shall at his own expense furnish, erect and maintain such warning barri- cades as are necessary and required by the Engineer, and he shall place and maintain acceptable warning lights at each. It shall be the Contractor's re- sponsibility to check and inspect all lights and barricades at all times in- cluding Sundays and Holidays. He shall maintain the streets in a passable condition, shall conduct his work so as to create a minimum amount of incon- venience to traffic and shall furnish not less than two flagmen at each loca- tion where loading or depositing of material requires the turning of the trucks on any state highway or "main street" and where the operation of construction equipment endangers traffic. Temporary suspension of work does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility outlined in the above requirements. 24,000-3.E14. Property Protection: Trees, fences, poles and all other prop- erty shall be protected unless their removal is authorized; and any property damaged shall be satisfactorily restored by the Contractor, or adequate compensation therefor shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Where tree trimming is required, all cut surfaces one inch or more in diameter shall be covered with a coat of asphalt paint. 24,000.3.E15. Interruption of Water Service: No valve or other control on the existing system shall be operated for any purpose by the Contractor without approval of the Engineer and all consumers affected by such operation shall be notified by the Contractor at least an hour before the operation and advised of the probable time when service will be restored. 24,000.3.E16. Tunneling, Jacking or Excavation Other Than Open Trench: Where pipe cannot be placed by open trench excavation, the method for placing and payment thereof shall be stated in the "Specific Requirements". 24,000.3.E17. Manner of Handling Pipe & Accessories Into Trench: Proper im- plements, tools and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and convenient prosecution of the work. 24,000.3.E18. Pipe Kept Clean: All foreign matter or dirt shall be removed from the inside of the pipe before it is lowered into its position in the trench, and it shall be kept clean by approved means during and after laying. All matter entering the pipe shall be removed by the Contractor prior to ac- ceptance with no additional compensation allowed. 24,000.3.E19. Laying the Pipe: The spigot shall be lubricated, centered in the bell, the pipe shoved into, position and brought into true alignment; it shall be secured there with earth carefully tamped under and on each side of it, excepting at the bell holes. Care shall be taken to prevent dirt from en- tering the joint space. 24,000.3.E20. Preventing Trench Water From Entering Pipe: All openings along the line of sewer shall be securely closed, and at the suspension of work at any time, suitable stoppers shall be placed to prevent water, earth or other substances from entering the sewer. 24,000-11 1/88-2400OG Copyright 1988 Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc. 24,000.3.E21. M s End to Face Direction of T_qvinq: Pipe laying shall pro- Be -as ceed upgrade with spigot ends pointing in the direction of flow. 24,000.3.E22. Railroad & Highway C rossing: When any railroad or highway is crossed, all precautionary construction measures required by the railroad or highway shall be followed. Railroad or highway crossings shall be jacking or tunneling and construction and permit requirements shall be as stated in the "Specific Requirements". 24,000-3.E23. Unsuitable conditions LE I _Laing Pine: No pipe shall be laid in water or when the trench conditions are unsuitable for such work. 24,000.3.E24. j2j Joints for vitrified clay and concrete pipe shall be made by wiping the joints clean, applying the manufacturer's recommended lubricant compound over the entire joint surface and then inserting the spigot end into the bell with sifficient force to properly seat the pipes. Joints for polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be made by the use of a solvent cement or pushon rubber gaskets. All jointing procedure shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the pipe manufacturer. After joints are made, any superfluous material inside the pipe shall be re- moved by means of an approved follow - 1. scraper. All joints must be water- tight, and any leaks or defects discovered must be immediately repaired. Any pipe which has been disturbed after being laid must be taken up, the joint cleaned and properly relaid as directed by the Engineer. Joints connecting cast iron pipe with concrete or clay pipes shall be made with a concrete collar completely surrounding the joint or approved adapter. Where a sewer line outlets to grade or where the line is terminated with a flared end section, the Contractor shall fasten at least the last three (3) joints together by the use of "U" bolt fasteners approved and as recommended by the pipe manufacturers. 24,000.4. SERVICE CONNECTIONS' 24,000.4.A. WYE BRANCHES: Extra strength wye branches shall be placed at the locations directed by the Engineer. The wye branch shall be placed so that the wye is located at approximately a 45 angle from horizontal. Vitrified•or other suitable plugs shall be provided for the openings. plugs shall be in- stalled with Atlastic 77, Sonolastic Sealant or equal joint material or shall be specifically designed for the opening to be plugged. 24,000.4.B. RISERS: Standard weight cast iron soil pipe shall be used as risers to extend service connections to a point within 10 feet of the street grade or as directed. Risers shall be installed in accordance with the stan- dard service riser detail plate. Care shall be taken in backfilling so as not to damage the.riser installation. Suitable plugs shall be provided for the openings, properly sealed. EMOMMM 1/88-24000G Copyright 1988 Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc. 24,000.4-C. RECORDS & LOCATION OF SERVICE CONNECTIONS: It shall be the duty of the Contractor to keep an accurate record of service connections, as to lo- cation, depth to top of riser, type of connection provided, etc. Location shall be made in respect to nearest manhole center, downgrade from the ser- vice. This record shall be turned over to the Engineer at the end of each week. 24,000.5. MANHOLES: 24,000.5.A. GENERAL: All reference to manholes shall apply equally to catch basin structures in this section of the specifications. 24,000.5.B. EXCAVATION: Excavation shall be to a depth and size to provide for construction of the manholes and catch basins as shown in detail on the plans. 24,000.5.C. CONCRETE BASE: Concrete base for manhole construction shall be of size and depth as shown on the plans. Concrete used for this purpose shall consist of one part Portland cement, two parts of clean sharp sand and four parts of graded coarse aggregate. Material used for this purpose shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Base shall be poured on undisturbed earth prior to setting the precast manhole sections. Precast concrete manhole bases shall be considered equal. 24,000.5.D. WALLS: Material to be used in the walls of manholes shall be as specified in Section 24,000.2. All external surfaces of concrete block man- holes if permitted shall be plastered with a 1/2 inch coat of Portland cement mortar. Mortar shall contain one part of cement to three parts of suitable plaster sand. Lime or mortar mix shall be used in amount necessary to make a suitable mixture for plastering purposes, but not to exceed 15Z by volume of cement. Mortar used for laying concrete block shall consist of one part Port- land cement to two parts of sand to which lime or mortar mix may be added not to exceed fifteen percent (15Z) by volume of cement. 24,000.5.E. MANHOLE STEPS: Manhole steps shall be of the type as specified in Section 24,000.2.J. Spacing shall be as shown on the detailed manhole plans, but not greater than 16 inches in vertical alignment. 24,000.5.F. PLACING MANHOLE RINGS & COVERS: The frame or ring casting shall be set to the designation elevation in a full mortar bed. 24,000.5.G. PLACING CATCH BASIN FRAMES & COVERS: Where catch basins are to be placed to final grade and castings are to be installed in curbing, then the casting and all adjusting rings shall be encased in concrete at least 4 inches in thickness. Where curb and street work is to be done under separate contract the casting frame shall be set in mortar only. 24,000.5.H. DROP MANHOLE INLETS: Encased drop inlets shall be constructed as required on the plans and in accordance with the standard Drop Inlet Detail Plate. 24,000-13 1/88-24000G Copyright 1988 Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc. 24,000.6. BACKFILLING, CLEANING UP & MAINTAINING SURFACES: 24,000.6.A. BACKFILLING PROCEDURE AT PIPE ZONE: All trenches and excavations shall be backfilled immediately after pipe is laid therein. For backfill up tc a level of one foot over the top of the pipe, only selected materials free froff rock, boulders, debris or other high void content substances, shall be used. The backfilling shall be placed completely under the pipe haunches in uniforn layers not exceeding 4 inches in depth. Each layer shall be placed, then carefully and uniformly tamped to eliminate the possibility of lateral displacement and to provide uniform support completely under the pipe haunches. The backfill material shall be moistened if necessary, tamped in 4 inch layers and thoroughly compacted under and on each side of the pipe to provide solid backing against the external surface of the pipe. The installation and backfilling of polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be in accor- dance with A.S.T.M. D-2321 with special attention given to compacting the. backfill material around the pipe to at least 95 percent of maximum density to a distance of one foot above the top of the pipe. 24,000.6.B. BACKFILL PROCEDURE AB " 0 ' V9 - PIPE ZONE: (Type "a") Procedure where settlement is allowable. Succeeding layers of backfill may contain coarser materials and shall be free from pieces of rock, concrete or clay lump more than one cubic foot in volume, roots, stumps, tin cans, rubbish, frozen mate- rials and other similar articles whose presence in the backfill would cause excessive settlement. This type of backfilling may be accomplished above the pipe zone by any mechanical means or otherwise, at the option of the Contrac- tor. Surface shall be maintained in passable condition for traffic until date of final inspection. Backfilling under exposed existing utilities shall be compacted to prevent settlement and any future displacement. 24,000.6.C. BACKFILL PROCEDURE ABOVE PIPE ZONE: (Type "b") Succeeding layers of backfill may contain coarser materials and shall be free from pieces of rock, concrete or clay lump more than one cubic foot in volume, roots, stumps, tin cans, rubbish, frozen materials and other similar articles whose presence in the backfill would cause excessive settlement. This type of backfilling may be compacted by- puddling with hose and long pipe nozzle or by flooding the trench, as the backfilling is accomplished above the pipe zone by any mechani- cal means or otherwise at the option of the Contractor. It is important that proper precautions be taken to prevent flooding of the pipe when flooding the trench, and the Contractor shall be wholly responsible for neglect of these precautions. 24,000.6.D. PROCEDURE WHERE NO SETTLEMENT IS ALLOWABLE: (Type "c") Succeed- ing layers backfill may contain coarser materials and shall be free from pieces of rock, concrete or clay lump more than one cubic foot in volume, roots, stumps, tin cans, rubbish, frozen materials and other similar articles whose presence in the backfill would cause excessive settlement. This type of backfilling shall be placed in uniform layers, before compaction, of approxi- mately 6 inches, tamped by mechanical means to the density specified in the Specific Requirements. 1/88-2400OG Copyright 1988 Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc. 24,000.6.E. PROCEDURE WHERE NO SETTLEMENT IS ALLOWABLE: (Type "d") Succeed- ing layers of backfill shall be made of selected materials meeting require- ments as set forth in the "Specific Requirements." This type of backfilling shall be placed in uniform layers, before compaction, of approximately 6 inches, tamped by mechanical means to the density specified in the Specific Requirements. 24,000.6.F. DENSITY TESTS: Density tests will be performed by an approved soils testing firm at various locations and depths throughout the project as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall cooperate fully and provide assistance as necessary to complete these tests with no additional compensa- tion being made to the Contractor. All testing costs pertaining to passing tests shall be paid for by the Owner. All testing costs pertaining to failing tests will be charged to and paid for by the contractor. Where areas have not been compacted sufficiently to meet specific density re- quirements, these areas shall be excavated and recompacted until the density requirements are met. All cost for the work associated with recompaction shall be the Contractor's sole responsibility, 24,000.6.G. DEFICIENCY OF BACKFILL, BY WHOM SUPPLIED: Any deficiency in the quantity of material for backfilling the trenches, or for filling depressions caused by settlement, shall be supplied by the Contractor with no extra com- pensation allowed. Any settlement which occurs shall be refilled by the Con- tractor. Material shall be provided at the Contractor's expense and the mate- rial shall be approved by the Engineer. 24,000.6.H. DISPOSAL OF EXCESS MATERIALS AND DEBRIS: Unless otherwise speci- fied, excavated material either not suitable or not required for fill material shall be disposed of by the Contractor outside of the right-of-way at his ex- pense in any manner he may elect subject to the provisions of the following paragraph. Before dumping such materials or debris on a private or public land, the Con- tractor must obtain from the Owner of such land written permission for such dumping and a waiver of all claims against the Owner for any damage to such land which may result therefrom together with all permits required by law for such dumping. A copy of such permission, waiver of claims and permit shall be filed with the Engineer before said disposal is made. 24,000.6.1. RESTORATION OF SURFACE: All surfaces disturbed during the con- struction period, whether caused by actual excavation, deposition of excavated material, or by the construction equipment, shall be returned to its original conditions or better. Exceptions to the above, if any, or special instruc- tions pertaining to any particular section of the project will be outlined in the "Special Provisions." 1/88-2400OG Copyright 1988 Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc. N3r�� 24,000.6.J. CLEANING UP: Surplus pipe line material, tools and temporary structures shall be removed by the Contractor, and all dirt, rubbish, caused by his operations and excess earth from excavations shall be hauled to a dump provided by the Contractor and the construction site shall be left to the sat- isfaction of the Engineer. Clean up and restoration shall include the replacement and restoration of all street signs, mailboxes, posts, fences and similar items disturbed by the con- struction described herein. Unless otherwise noted in the Special Provisions or Proposal all items of clean -up and restorations shall be considered inci- dental to the contract with no additional compensation allowed. 24,000.7. TESTING PIPE LINES 24,000.7.A. INFILTRATION IN SEWERS: Upon completion of the sewer construc- tion, leakage tests shall be made to determine the amount of ground water in- filtration into the sewers. Measurements will be made by means of 90 V -notch weirs placed in the lines. Measurements shall be taken at all points where, in the opinion of the Engineer, the flow of water in the sewers is greater than the maximum allowable leakage. Teqta may be taken between individual manholes and the infiltration in any given line shall not exceed the specified maximum allowable rate. The maximum allowable rate of leakage shall not exceed 100 gallons per mile per inch diameter of pipe per day. The Contractor shall furnish the weirs and other material and the labor for placing the weirs in the sewers and shall assist the Engineer in making the measurements. The Contractor shall receive no additional compensation for making the leakage tests or corrective work necessary to reduce leakage below the maximum allowed by the specifications. 24,000.8. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT: 24,000.8.A. TRENCH EXCAVATION: Trench excavation will be measured in linear feet of trench according to the zone classifications specified as follows: From 0' to 8 from 8' to 10 and in two foot increments thereafter, which are based on the total depth of the trench to the designated grade of the pipe invert. No deduction in depth will be made for rock encountered in the trench above the designated grade. Measurement will be made along the centerline of the sewer and from center to center of all manholes, catch basins or junction fittings. FORRM 1/88- 24000G Copyright 1988 Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc. 24,000.8.B. SOLID ROCK EXCAVATION: trench, such rock excavation shall be me shall be measured from the top of outside barrel of pipe and twelve inches pipe. The minimum trench width of inches. For measurement purposes volume walls for the width specified above. If solid rock is encountered in the asured by volume in cubic yards and the rock to a point six inches below the from each side of inside diameter of the solid rock excavation shall be 36 will be computed based on vertical 24,000.8.C. SEWER PIPE WITH BEDDING: Sever pipe of each diameter and classi- fication furnished and installed with associated pipe bedding will be measured separately by length in linear feet. Measurement will be made along the cen- terline of the sewer and from center to center of all manholes, catch basins or junction fittings. Where bends, tee manholes, flared end sections or other special shapes are in- stalled, the length of pipe replaced by these structures shall be deducted from the distance from center of manhole to center of manhole for pay purposes. The special structures will be paid for as separate bid items. 24,000.8.D. SERVICE CONNECTION: Wyes and tee branches of each diameter and classification furnished and install� vill be measured as a unit. 24,000.8.E. SERVICE RISER PIPE: Sever pipe used for service risers of each diameter and classification furnished and installed will be measured separate- ly by vertical length in linear feet from the centerline of the sewer to the top of the last riser section. 24,000.8.F. CONSTRUCTING MANHOLES: Manholes will be measured by depth of the structure from the invert of based on the dimensions as staked the pipe to the top of the cover in linear feet, by the Engineer. 24,000.8.G. CONSTRUCTING CATCH BASINS: Catch basins will be measured by the number of catch basins completed as to shape, size, and depth according to the plans. 24,000.8.H. ' IMPROVED PIPE FOUNDATION: Granular materials placed for improving pipe foundation below the specified pipe bedding shall be measured by the lineal foot of pipe placed with improved foundation in six inch depth increments of granular material placed. As an example, if two feet of granular material is required for improved pipe foundation under a 12" pipe installed with C-2 bedding; six inches of material is required for Class C-2 bedding and improved pipe foundation shall be measured as three lineal feet, six inches deep. 24,000.8.J. DROP INLETS: Drop inlets will be measured by depth from the low- est invert of the manhole to the invert of the pipe being served by the drop inlet. 24,000-17 1/88-2400OG Copyright 1988 Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc. 24,000.8-K. SPECIAL STRUCTURES & APPURTENANCES: Methods of measurement for special structures and appurtenances not included above shall be as stated in the "Special Provisions," "Specific Requirements," and "Proposal." 24,000.9. BASIS OF PAYMENT: 24,000.9.A. TRENCH EXCAVATION & BACKFILL: Regardless of the width excavated, sever pipe furnished and installed with bedding will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price per linear foot of pipe falling within each of the following depth zones as measured from the profile grade: From 0 to V, from 8' to 10 and two foot increments thereafter. Excavation and backfilling of trench and associated pipe bedding shall be included in the price of sever pipe furnished and installed. 24,000.9.B. SOLID ROCK EXCAVATION: Solid rock excavation will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price per cubic yard. 24,000.9-C. SEWER PIPE WITH BEDDING IN PLACE: Sever pipe in each diameter and classification furnished and installed will be paid for at the Contract Price per linear foot which shall include payment for trench excavation and backfilling and associated pipe bedding. 24,000.9.D. DUCTILE IRON PIPE: Ductile iron pipe will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price per linear foot for each type and diameter of, pipe fur- nished which shall include payment for trench excavation and backfill. 24,000.9.E. WYE BRANCHES: Wye branches will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price for each unit furnished and installed of the size specified on the Pro- posal. 24,000.9.F. SERVICE RISER PIPE: Service riser pipe will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price per linear foot for the vertical distance from the center- line of the sever to the top of riser. Concrete reinforcement of the main sever and riser pipe as described in Section 24,000.4.B. shall be considered as incidental and will not constitute a pay item. 24,000.9.G. CONSTRUCTING MANHOLES TO DEPTH OF EIGHT FEET: Constructing of manholes to a depth of eight (8) feet will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price per manhole which shall include furnishing and placing the manhole frame and cover. This section also applies to all catch basin manholes and catch basins. 24,000.9.H. CONSTRUCTING MANHOLES TO A DEPTH GREATER THAN EIGHT FEET: Con- structing of manholes to a depth greater than eight (8) feet will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price per manhole plus the unit price per linear foot for each foot of depth that is greater than eight feet. This section also applies to all catch basin manholes and catch basins. 1/88-24000G Copyright 1988 Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc. 24,000.9.1. CONSTRUCTING CATCH BASINS: Constructing catch basins as shown on the plans will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price per catch basin which shall include furnishing and placing the catch basin frame and grating. 24,000.9.J. IMPROVED PIPE FOUNDATION: Authorized granular materials for improving pipe foundation in place shall be paid for at the Contract Unit Price per lineal foot for each six inch layer placed below pipe bedding. 24,000.9.x. SAND CUSHION: Granular material for a sand cushion in place in rock excavation shall be paid for at the Contract Unit Price per ton. 24,000.9.L. DROP INLET PIPE: Drop inlets in place shall be paid for at the Contract Unit Price per linear foot which shall be payment in full for the ex- tended manhole base, encasement, drop pipe, cast iron tee, cast iron pipe and concrete collar. Payment shall be made for sewer pipe from center to center of all manholes as per Section 24,000.8.0. when cast iron pipe is extended for drop inlets. 24,000.9.M. SPECIAL STRUCTURES & APPURTENANCES: Basis of payment for special structures and appurtenances not incl- -1 above shall be stated in the "Special Provisions," "Specific Requirement," and "Proposal ". 1/88- 24000G Copyright 1988 Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc. 24,000 -19 SUBSURFACE ' •s ! • ATHLETIC ► LIGHT STANDARDS INDUSTRY SCIENCE NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA PROJECT GME NO. 2547 INC. GME CONSULTANTS, CONSULTING ENGINEERS 14000 21 st Ave. No./ Minneapolis, MN 55447 Rhone (612) 559 -1859 / Fax (612) 559 -0720 Dear Mr. Hanson Following the acceptance of our proposal of May 25, 1990, we have completed • •. c... exploration • f project. • • please find of our • exploration and the soil report have [yrepared. Three copies of this report have been sent to the above address. We appreciate the opportunity to have been of service to you for thl project. If you have any questions regarding this report or if we c be of further assistance to you, please • SlnceXely, • WCK•smc • . ENVIRONMENTAL WILLIAM RE. H Jt ` ♦. * VENEMA, RE. KENNETH J, LaFOND. RE. WILLIAM O Vii. RE, An Equal Opportunity Employer ABOUTYOUR More construction problems are caused by site subsurface conditions than any other factor. As troublesome as sub- surface problems can be, their frequency and extent have been lessened considerably in recent years, thanks to the Association of Soil and Foundation Engineers (ASFE). When ASFE was founded in 1969, subsurface problems were frequently being resolved through lawsuits. In fact, the situation had grown to such alarming proportions that consulting geotechnical engineers had the worst profes- sional liability record of all design professionals. By 1980, ASFE - member consulting soil and foundation engineers had the best professional liability record. This dramatic turn -about can be attributed directly to client acceptance of problem- solving programs and materials developed by ASFE for its mem- bers' application. This acceptance was gained because clients perceived the ASFE approach to be in their own best interests. Disputes benefit only those who earn their living from others' disagreements. The following suggestions and observations are offered to help you reduce the geotechnical- related delays, cost -over- runs and other costly headaches that can occur during a construction project. A GEOTECNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT IS BASED ON A UNIQUE SET OF PROJECT- SPECIFIC FACTORS A geotechnical engineering report is based on a subsurface exploration plan designed to incorporate a unique set of project- specific factors. These typically include: the general nature of the structure involved, its size and configuration; the location of the structure on the site and its orientation; physical concomitants such as access roads, parking lots, and underground utilities, and the level of additional risk which the client assumed by virtue of limitations imposed upon the exploratory program. To help avoid costly prob- lems, consult the geotechnical engineer to determine how any factors which change subsequent to the date of his report may affect his recommendations. Unless your consulting geotechnical engineer indicates otherwise, your geotechnical engineering report should not be used: • When the nature of the proposed structure is changed, for example, if an office building will be erected instead of a parking garage, or if a refriger- ated warehouse will be built instead of an unrefrig- erated one; • when the size or configuration of the proposed structure is altered; • when the location or orientation of the proposed structure is modified; • when there is a change of ownership, or • for application to an adjacent site. Ageotechnical engineer cannot accept responsibility for problems which may develop if he is not consulted after factors considered in his report's development have changed. Site exploration identifies actual subsurface conditions only at those points where samples are taken, when they are taken. Data derived through sampling and subsequent laboratory testing are extrapolated by the geotechnical engineer who then renders an opinion about overall sub- surface conditions, their likely reaction to proposed con- struction activity, and appropriate foundation design. Even under optimal circumstances actual conditions may differ from those opined to exist, because no geotechnical en- gineer, no matter how qualified, and no subsurface explo- ration program, no matter how comprehensive, can reveal what is hidden by earth, rock and time. For example, the actual interface between materials may be far more gradual or abrupt than the report indicates, and actual conditions in areas not sampled may differ from predic- tions. Nothing can be done to prevent the unanticipated, but steps can be taken to help minimize their impact. For this reason, most experienced owners retain their geotechnical consultant through the construction stage, to identify variances, conduct additional tests which may be needed, and to recommend solutions to problems encountered on site. • • !rr • CHANGE Subsurface conditions may be modified by constantly - changing natural forces. Because a geotechnical engineer- ing report is based on conditions which existed at the time of subsurface exploration, construction decisions should not be based on a geotechnical engineering report whose adequacy may have been affected by time. Speak with the geotechnical consultant to learn if additional tests are advisable before construc- tion starts. Construction operations at or adjacent to the site and natural events such as floods, earthquakes or groundwater fluctuations may also affect subsurface conditions and, thus, the continuing adequacy of a geotechnical report. The geotechnical engineer should be kept apprised of any such events, and should be consulted to determine if additional tests are necessary. .> r . , • Costly problems can occur when other design profession- als develop their plans based on misinterpretations of a geotechnical engineering report. To help avoid these prob- lems, the geotechnical engineer should be retained to work with other appropriate design professionals to explain relevant geotechnical findings and to review the adequacy of their plans and specifications relative to geotechnical issues. REPORT Final boring logs are developed by the geotechnical en- gineer based upon his interpretation of field logs (assem- bled by site personnel) and laboratory evaluation of field samples. only final boring logs customarily are included in geotechnical engineering reports. These logs should not under any circumstances be redrawn for inclusion in architectural or other design drawings, because drafters may commit errors or omissions in the transfer process. Although photo- graphic reproduction eliminates this problem, it does nothing to minimize the possibility of contractors misin- terpretating the logs during bid preparation. When this occurs, delays, disputes and unanticipated costs are the all -too- frequent result. To minimize the likelihood of boring log misinterpretation, give contractors ready access to:the complete geotechnical engineering report. Those who do not provide such access may proceed under the mistaken impression that simply disclaiming responsibility for the accuracy of subsurface information always insulates them from attendant liability. Providing the best available information to contractors helps prevent costly construction problems and the adversarial attitudes which aggravate them to disproportionate scale. . � t Because geotechnical engineering is based extensively on judgement and opinion, it is far less exact than other design disciplines. This situation has resulted in wholly unwarranted claims being lodged against geotechnical consultants. To help prevent this problem, geotechnical engineers have developed model clauses for use in written transmittals. These are not exculpatory clauses designed to foist the geotechnical engineer's liabilities onto someone else. Rather, they are definitive clauses which identify where the geotechnical engineer's responsibilities begin and end. Their use helps all parties involved recognize their individual responsibilities and take appropriate action. Some of these definitive clauses are likely to appear in your geotechnical engineering report, and you are encouraged to read them closely Your geotechnical engineer will be pleased to give full and frank answers to your questions. Your consulting geotechnical engineer will be pleased to discuss other techniques which can be employed to miti- gate risk. In addition, the Association of Soil and Founda- tion Engineers has developed a variety of materials which may be beneficial. Contact ASFE for a complimentary copy of its publications directory. Published by RPMRA SM GM t , UL M , Mr. Mark. Hanson 2 June 1, 1990 I were chosen by the Engineer. The boring locations were staked in the f ield by the BRA survey crew; the crew also shot the boring surface Borings 1 and 3 were drilled at the staked locations. We could no! drive the rig directly to boring 2 we offset this boring to the top of the slope® The borings were drilledwith h augers were used to advance the borings full depth. Soil samples were in jars R reduce moisture loss, and ` i i . ` f^a to our b o for r examination and classification by a Geotechnical Engineer. GME CONSULTANTS, IMF. Mr. Mark Hanson 3 June 1. 1.990 approximate; insitu, the transition between soil types may be gradual or abrupt in the horizontal or vertical direction. We will retain the soil samples for this program for 30 days after the fate of this report. If you wish to have the samples retained beyorra this time, we ask that you please advise us; otherwise, the samples will be discarded. f t l Mr. Mark Ranson M . . IgF Ell The Soil Conservation service Map for Hennepin County, prepared in 1967, identified the site at that time as consisting mostly of marsh, with "cut lands" to the west and the south. In our site reconnaissance on the date of drilling, we observed that much of the marsh has been filled in the western side and the southern parts of the site. The G G CONSULTANTS, IN& Mr. Mark Hanson 6 June 1, 1990 RE D RECOMMENDATIO We understand that ten new light standards are to be constructed as applied to the light standard foundations. Because of the height of the standards, minor amounts could result in visible tipping or leaning of pole. E CONSULTANTS, INC. Mr. Mark Hanson P appeared to have been seeded on the north side. consisted of weeds and heavy grass on the south side. June 1, 1990 In boring 1, we found 9 feet of soft great, overlying very loose silty sand, changing to stiff silty sandy clay. • i • 1 . • drilling than the normal high water level, due to the drought conditions which have persisted in the past few years® The water level E CONSULT T% INC. Mr. Mark Hanson 7 June 1, 1990 bottom of the cap at least -- below protection from frost penetration. Details on our recommendations are. presented below. tips should be driven would vary. We anticipate that pile lengths below existing f r .. • - i i f be • • i ,.. If a pile does not have adequate blow counts after penetrating at least 25 feet into the non-organic stiff clay, we recommend leaving it ONIS CONSULTANTS, INC. Mr. Mark Hanson 8 June 1, 1.990 a and retapping the pile the next day. Due to the "pile freeze," the capacity of the pile should increase with time. Because of the relatively stiffer upper layer of fill overlying the organics, it is our opinion that piles driven through the soil profile found in the borings would have adequate lateral capacity, We recommend that the bottom of the pile caps be at least 6 feet below Lf caissons are chosen, we recommend that straight shaft piers be used. Where water bearing soils or soft clay are encountered, t woul e necessary to first drill in a pilot shaft with bentonite mud and then insert a steel casing sealed into an underlying low permeability cohesive layer. Beyond this depth the shaft could be extended with augers. ONIN CONSULTANTS, INC. Mr. Mark Hanson 10 June 1, 1990 Since groundwater was encountered in the borings, it should be anticipated that groundwater would be encountered if caisson foundations are used. Groundwater should not be a serious problem if driven treated timber pile foundations •' Although we did not encounter obstacles in our boreholes, we did observe slabs of concrete and asphalt block and other materials safety as well as noise, is solely that of the contractors. This responsibility is not horn in any manner by GME Consultants, Inc. OE CONSULTANTS, IC. Mr. Mark Hanson 9 June 1, 1990 The lateral capacity • caissons drilled through the soil prof ile should be adequate for the anticipated structural loadings. O CONSULTANT% 1 NC. Mr. Mark Hanson 11 June GME CONSULTANTS, INC. Mr. Mark Hanson W-1 M L�Wlv *L '43 at I am a dury GME CONSULTANTS, INC, i E CONSULTA Ti. INC. FFSE\ EXISTING MARSH B-2 896.2 PROPOSED NEW SHORELINE -W EXISTING CREST OF SLOPE "`EXISTING SOCCER/FOOTBALL FIELD SHORELINL\ * B-1 887.9 B-3 896.7 LIGHT STANDARD LOCATION (TYPICAL) I BASEBALL DIAMOND SCALE 0 40' 80 NOTE: BORING LOCATIONS STAKED BY BONESTROO SOIL BORING LOCATION DIAGRAM G CONSULTANTS, INC. PROPOSED LIGHT STANDARDS 2083 EAST CENTER CIRCLE SCIENCE INDUSTRY PARK MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA $5441 NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA __U::K:Mll WCK 254 DRILLING & SAMPLING SYMBOLS: SL SS with Liner otherwise noted ". ="*ux Tube --2 O.u, unless otherwise noted PA Power Auger DB DiomondBit - -NX:BXA% AS Auger Sample JS Jar Sample VS Vane Shear OS Osterberg Sampler — 3^ Shelby Tube HS Hollow Stem Auger VV8 Wash Sample FT Fish Trail RB Rock Bit BS Bulk Sample PM Preueunameherh*a- -insitu Standard ^N^Penetration: Blows per foot ode14O pound hammer falling 3O inches ona2 inch O[] split spoon, except where noted. VVL Water Level VVC| Wet Cave In DC| Dry Cave In WS While WD While Drilling BCR: Before Casing Remvoo *CR: After Casing Removal AB : After Boring Water leve indicated on the boring the boring sd the times indicated. |n previous moi|s, the ."indicated elevations are considered reliable ground water levels. u//m determination cfground water elevations is not possible in even several days observation, and additional evidence of ground water elevations must be Coarse Grained o, Granular Soils have more than 50% of their dry weight retained on a #200 sieve; boulders, cobbles, gravel or sand. Fine Grained Soils have less than 50% of their dry weight retained on a #200 sieve; they are described as: clays or clayey silts if they are cohesive, and silts if they are non-cohesive. In addition to gradation, granular soils are defined on the basis of their relative in-place density and fine grained soils on the basis of their strength or consistency, and their plasticity. Major Component Kwn Components Also Percent of Of Sample_ Size Range Present in Sample) D ry Weight ----Isf---- Boulders Over in. (yOUmm) Trace 1 --S Cobbles 8 in. ho3in. Little 10--19 Soft (200mm1o75mm) Loose 0.50— 0.99 Gravel 3in. to#4sieve Some 28--34 Stiff (75mm1o2mm) Dense 2.00--3.99 Sand #4bz#208sieve And 35--50 Hard (2mm80.874mm) Extremely Dense >8.OU Silt Passing #200 sieve (0.04mm0u0.005mm) Clay Smaller than 0.005mm IL UncmwYIned Strength, Ou, ----Isf---- Consistency 0 — 18lowsyft. Relative Density <0.25 Very Soft 0--3 Very Loose 0.25--049 Soft 4--9 Loose 0.50— 0.99 Medium (Firm) 10--29 Medium Dense 1.00--1.89 Stiff 30--48 Dense 2.00--3.99 Very Stiff 50--80 Very Dense 4.00--8.00 Hard 80+ Extremely Dense >8.OU Very Hard GME CONSULTANTS, INC. 9' 5SS Black fine SILTY SAND, trace gravel few thin peat seams - very loose - wet - (SM) 13' 6SS Gray fine SILTY SAND, trace gravel very loose - wet - (SM) 18' 7SS Brown fine SANDY CLAY WITH SILT, trace gravel - firm to stiff - (CL) Boring continued on next page *NOTE: Sampler advanced by weight of rod and hammer k1 0 e� 8 66 12 CONSULTANTS — ��l I I GME 3 Geotechnical * Materials e Environmental 14000 21st lbw" No. Minneapolis, MN 55447 LOG OF BORING 1 PROJECT Science Industry Park SITE Research Center Road Light Standards New Hope, Minnesota CLIENT ARCHITECT - ENGINEER City of New Hope Bonestroo Rosene Anderlik & Associates W UNCONFINED COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH TONS/FT 2 W L F LL —®- Ir W DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL ' 2 4 5 w a ® WATER w 0 m CONTENT% w° a w 4 U J w � - - STANDARD PENETRATION (BLOWS /FOOT) n o 20 a f- 3 N SURFACE ELEVATION 887,9 -®- 1 20 30 40 50 1SS Black PEAT - very soft - moist, wet at 6 feet - (Pt) 2SS 3 3SS QCC '3c 9' 5SS Black fine SILTY SAND, trace gravel few thin peat seams - very loose - wet - (SM) 13' 6SS Gray fine SILTY SAND, trace gravel very loose - wet - (SM) 18' 7SS Brown fine SANDY CLAY WITH SILT, trace gravel - firm to stiff - (CL) Boring continued on next page *NOTE: Sampler advanced by weight of rod and hammer k1 0 e� 8 66 12 CONSULTANTS — ��l I I GME 3 Geotechnical * Materials e Environmental 14000 21st lbw" No. Minneapolis, MN 55447 End of boring at 40 feet Hollow stem auger used full depth Borehole backfilled with cuttings *NOTE: Sampler advanced by weight of rod and hammer LOG OF BORING 1 (continued) PROJECT Science Industry Park 517E Research Center Road Light Standards New Hope, Minnesota CLIENT ARCHITECT- ENGINEER city New Hope Bonestroo Rosene Anderlik & Associates W INED COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH TONS/FT 2 Cr W LL Uj Z DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL 2 3 4 5 T s WATER W > 'z W co CONTENT % Z III � U < JU) F a F w U Q STANDARD PENETRATION (BLOWS /FOOT) a z c1 C t- 3 g cc > Z - - 10 20 30 40 50 Brown fine SANDY CLAY WITH SILT, trace gravel - firm to stiff - (CL) A /]. 11 SS 14 End of boring at 40 feet Hollow stem auger used full depth Borehole backfilled with cuttings *NOTE: Sampler advanced by weight of rod and hammer -r LOG OF BORING 2 (Offset to top of slope) PROJECT Science Industry Park SITE Research Center Road Light Standards New Ho pe, Minnesota CLIENT ARCHITECT - ENGINEER City of New Hope Bonestroo Rosene And erlik & Associates L UNCONFINED COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH TONS/FT 2 Lu LL - 0 - W DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL O t 2 3 4 5 W g Z w w ¢ U t- � m WATER CONTENT % W tL W Q -' N -J W Q - - STANDARD PENETRATION (BLOWS /FOOT) W N¢ Cr SURFACE ELEVATION -896.2 N W Z -®- 10 20 30 40 50 1SS 6 Brown fine CLAYEY SAND, trace silt, 1 2SS gravel - loose - damp - (SC) 8 3SS 4 4SS 8" (Fill) 7 5SS Brown fine SILTY SANDY CLAY, trace 5 l gravel - firm to very soft - (CL) 5 6SS 7SS 1 23, (Fill) 8SS Black fibrous PEAT - firm - waist - (Pt) 7 NA 28 9SS Gray fine SILTY SAND, trace clay - very loose - wet - (sM) 33 Gray fine SILTY SANDY CLAY, trace lOS gravel - firm to very stiff - (CL) 5 Boring continued on next page *NOTE: Sampler advanced by weight Geotechnical a Materials e Environmental — of rod and hammer 14000 21st Avenue No. Minneapolis, MN 55447 LOG OF BORING 3 PROJECT Science Industry Park SITE Research Center Road Light Standards New Ho , Minnesota CLIENT ARCHITECT- ENGINEER Cit of New Ho Bonestroo Rosene Anderlik & Associates r UNCONFINED COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH TONS /FT? LL m 0 DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL 3 ' 2 3 4 5 tT W M w d W t a m WATER CONTENT LL W z W 0. 1-- -j W I- C W U 5 4 STANDARD PENETRATION (BLOWS /FOOT) ® N < SURFACE ELEVATION 896.7 a. W z 10 20 30 40 50 iSS 13 JIM Brown and dark brown fine SANDY CLAY, trace silt - very stiff to 2SS firm - (CL) 17 3SS 8 4SS $ 9, ( Fill) 0 5SS 6 Brown fine SILTY CLAYEY SAND, trace gravel - loose - damp - (SC -SM) 7 6SS 19 (Fill) 7SS Black fibrous PEAT - firm - moist - 7 (Pt) 24 8SS Gray CLAYEY SILT, trace fine sand - 1 very loose - moist - (ML) 29 Gray fine SILTY SANDY CLAY - very 9 soft to stiff - (CL) 1 Boring continued on next page GME CONSULTANTS Geotechnical a Materials 9 Env'Ironmental 14000 21st Avenue No. Minneapolis, MN 55447 LOG OF BORING 3 (continued) PROJECT Science Industry Park SITE Research Center Road Light Standards New Hope, Minnesota CLIENT ARCHITECT- ENGINEER City of New Hope Bonestroo Rosene Anderlik & Associates W UNCONFINED COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH TONSI W -® w M tw9 DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL O 1 2 3 4 5 w Q WATER U. z w W U L m CONTENT % I I a. a ►' w I `t Q STANDARD PENETRATION (BLOWSIFOOT) a g o ¢ I- °� 3 w ( ¢ > - ®- to to ¢ Z 10 20 30 40 50 Gray fine SILTY SANDY CLAY - very soft to stiff - (CL) I1SS 9 End of boring at 40 feet Hollow stem auger used full depth Borehole backfilled with cuttings WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS BORING STARTED — — W.L. 23 feet while drillin C SULT'A e IN C. BORING_ C 5 - -90 W.L. j 21 feet after drillin Gemec . Materials . Envenmriental 14000 21st Avenue No. RIG CME -750 DRILLER KJS W.L. Borin caved at 26.5 feet ` Mmneepo6e. MN 55447 (612) 559 -1659 DRAWN APPROVED after auger removal J B# 2547 SHEET The stratification lines represent approximate boundaries between soil types; insitu the transition may be gradual. XASSIFICATION OF SOILS FOR ENGINEERING PURPOSES (ASTM D 2487 and 2488) Major divisions Group Typical names Laboratory classification criteria symbols � I Pt = m Well- graded gravels, gravel -sand mixtures, little or no fines Poorly graded gravels, gravel - sand mixtures, little or no fines Silty gravels, gravel- sand -silt mixtures Clayey gravels, gravel- sand -clay mixtures Well- graded sands, gravelly sands, little or no fines Poorly graded sands, gravelly sands, little or no fines Silty sands, sand -silt mixtures Clayey sands, sand -clay mix- tures Inorganic silts and very fine sands, rock flour, silty or clay- ey fine sands or clayey silts with slight plasticity Inorganic clays of low to me- dium plasticity, gravelly clays, sandy clays, silty clays, lean clays Organic silts and organic silty x clays of low plasticity a 0 e u Inorganic silts, micaceous or io diatomaceous fine sandy or °• silty soils, elastic silts Inorganic clays of high plas- ticity, fat clays Organic clays of medium to high plasticity, organic silts Peat and other highly organic soil D 60 (D30) N a GW 0 Dro DroXD60 yw m c o R o m e Not meeting all gradation requirements for GW 0 o V a N r y •` N O O U N and d GP e: CL N ' N p O w Z line or P.I. less than 4 Above "A" line with P.I. s c O O c a 0 > O ` 0 CA c N ° N d 'u w w o GM or P.I. greater than 7 u o N « m M E =e td O H d i m O— 0) 3a :: c D60 (D30)2 A '6 Z 2 0 2 `° at O C E N i MH m c Ln CL GC c ^c a A a� C. r N w 0. a . E io 2 y ° t a c () a li or P.I. less than 4 Limits plotting in hatched c 'v a E `m d o$ CH c a C L J. is N a SW E O c o a c N C bols. line or P.I. greater than 7 N N C o N t ` w a W a a S y U SP M C y N N O U C coZ a m 'o E SM r m ®E .5 LaaNi u N ° g N e M .� 3 N a v 'u °o a SC Q Pt = m Well- graded gravels, gravel -sand mixtures, little or no fines Poorly graded gravels, gravel - sand mixtures, little or no fines Silty gravels, gravel- sand -silt mixtures Clayey gravels, gravel- sand -clay mixtures Well- graded sands, gravelly sands, little or no fines Poorly graded sands, gravelly sands, little or no fines Silty sands, sand -silt mixtures Clayey sands, sand -clay mix- tures Inorganic silts and very fine sands, rock flour, silty or clay- ey fine sands or clayey silts with slight plasticity Inorganic clays of low to me- dium plasticity, gravelly clays, sandy clays, silty clays, lean clays Organic silts and organic silty x clays of low plasticity a 0 e u Inorganic silts, micaceous or io diatomaceous fine sandy or °• silty soils, elastic silts Inorganic clays of high plas- ticity, fat clays Organic clays of medium to high plasticity, organic silts Peat and other highly organic soil D 60 (D30) ML C,=—greater than 4; C between 1 and 3 0 Dro DroXD60 °1 m G O1 e e Not meeting all gradation requirements for GW 0 o V a N r y m N N U N a e: CL -�- m •— N E line or P.I. less than 4 Above "A" line with P.I. s c O O c a 0 between 4 and 7 are border- ° N line cases requiring use h m Atterberg limits below "A" �o Q or P.I. greater than 7 o v td O H OL c :: c D60 (D30)2 A '6 C greater than 4; C between 1 and 3 v m = D10 DroXDso C y E N MH m c Ln o . � c ^c a A a� C. r N w 0. a . E io ° t a c () a li or P.I. less than 4 Limits plotting in hatched c 'v a E `m d o$ CH c a C L J. a m Dow ' requiring use of dual sym- to Nv bols. line or P.I. greater than 7 2 :% OH Pt = m Well- graded gravels, gravel -sand mixtures, little or no fines Poorly graded gravels, gravel - sand mixtures, little or no fines Silty gravels, gravel- sand -silt mixtures Clayey gravels, gravel- sand -clay mixtures Well- graded sands, gravelly sands, little or no fines Poorly graded sands, gravelly sands, little or no fines Silty sands, sand -silt mixtures Clayey sands, sand -clay mix- tures Inorganic silts and very fine sands, rock flour, silty or clay- ey fine sands or clayey silts with slight plasticity Inorganic clays of low to me- dium plasticity, gravelly clays, sandy clays, silty clays, lean clays Organic silts and organic silty x clays of low plasticity a 0 e u Inorganic silts, micaceous or io diatomaceous fine sandy or °• silty soils, elastic silts Inorganic clays of high plas- ticity, fat clays Organic clays of medium to high plasticity, organic silts Peat and other highly organic soil 10 7 4 0 10 20 30 40 50 80 70 80 90 101 Liquid Limit Plasticity Chart D 60 (D30) C,=—greater than 4; C between 1 and 3 Dro DroXD60 °1 G O1 e a � 12 F Not meeting all gradation requirements for GW 0 o V a N r y N N y c ( e m OOa0 Atterber limits below "A" g -�- c 3 s o E line or P.I. less than 4 Above "A" line with P.I. s c O O c a 0 between 4 and 7 are border- ° N line cases requiring use h m Atterberg limits below "A" of dual symbols w line or P.I. greater than 7 o v td O H :: c D60 (D30)2 A '6 C greater than 4; C between 1 and 3 v m = D10 DroXDso C y g C N w ' o . Not meeting all gradation requirements for SW a C •"• y U m ° A a� C. 0. e 'm c ° o Atterberg limits below "A" ° t a c () a li or P.I. less than 4 Limits plotting in hatched c 'v a E `m d o$ zone with P.I. between 4 c a C L J. and 7 are borderline cases Dow ' requiring use of dual sym- Atterberg limits below "A" bols. line or P.I. greater than 7 10 7 4 0 10 20 30 40 50 80 70 80 90 101 Liquid Limit Plasticity Chart For classification of fine-grained grained soils. —Atterberg Limits rr b L. symbols requiring use of dual Equation of A-line: - - -�- ��r�� ___�_ fications 10 7 4 0 10 20 30 40 50 80 70 80 90 101 Liquid Limit Plasticity Chart The placement of compacted fill for support of foundations, floor slabs, pavements, or earth structures should be carried out by an experienced excavator with the proper equipment. The excavator must be prepared to adapt his procedures, equipment, and materials to the type of project, to weather conditions, and the structural requirements of the architect and engineer. Methods and materials used in summer may not be applicable in winter;,fill used in dry excavations may not be suitable in wet excavations or during periods of precipitation; proposed fill soil may require wetting or drying for proper placement and compaction. Conditions may also vary during the course of a project or in different areas of the site. These needs should be addressed in the project drawings and specifications. irry It is common to have to excavate and replace unsuitable soils below the water table for site correction. As a general rule of prudent construction technique, we recommend that excavation /backfill below the water table not be permitted, unless the excavation is dewatered. Numerous problems can develop when this procedure is attempted without dewatering. — Inability of the equipment operators and soil technicians to observe that all unsuitable soil /materials have been removed from the base of the excavation. — Inability to observe and measure that proper lateral oversizing is provided. — Inability to prevent or correct sloughing of excavation sidewalls, which can result in unsuitable soils trapped within the select backfill. — Inability of the contractor to adequately and uniformly compact the backfill. — Possibility of disturbance of the suitable soils at the base of the excavation. The dewatering methods, normally chosen at the contractor's option, should follow prudent construction practice. Excavations in clay can often be dewatered with sump pits and pumps; this technique would not be applicable for excavation extending into permeable granular soil, especially for depths significantly below the water table. Dewater- ing granular soils should normally be done with well points or wells. When dewatering is needed, we strongly recommend that the procedures be discussed at pre -bid or pre - construction meetings. The dewatering technique chosen by the contractor should be reviewed by the architect and engineer before construction starts; it should not be left until excavation is under way. The selection of proper backfill materials is important when working in dewatered excavations. Even with dewatering, the base is usually wet and the contractor must be careful not to disturb the base. We recommend that the first lifts of backfill be a clean medium to course grain sand with less than 5% passing the #200 sieve. The use of silty sand, clayey sand, or cohesive /semi - cohesive soils is not recommended for such situations. The excavator should be required to submit samples of the proposed material(s) he plans to use as backfill before the fill is hauled to the site, so that it can be tested for suitability. INTER EARTHWORK CONSTRUCTION Winter earthwork presents its own range of problems which must be overcome; the situation may be complicated by the need for dewatering discussed above. During freezing conditions, the fill used must not be frozen when delivered to the site. It also must not be allowed to freeze during or after compaction. Since the ability to work the soil while keeping it from freezing depends in part on the soil type, the specifications should require the contractor to submit a sample of his proposed fill before construc- tion starts, for laboratory testing. If the soil engineer and structural engineer determine that it is not suitable, it should be rejected. In general, silty sand, clayey sand, and cohesive /semi - cohesive soils should not be used as fill under freezing conditions. All frozen soil of any type should be rejected for use as compacted fill. It is important that compacted fill be protected from freezing after it is placed. The excavator should be required to submit a plan for protecting the soil. The plan should include details on the type and amount of material (straw, blankets, extra loose fill, topsoil, etc.) proposed for use as frost protection. The need to protect the soil from freezing is ongoing throughout construction and applies both before and after concrete is placed, until backfilling for final frost protection is completed. Foundations placed on frozen soil can experience heaving and significant settlement, rota- tion, or other movement as the soil thaws. Such movement can also occur if the soil is allowed to freeze after the concrete is placed and then allowed to thaw. The higher the percentage of fines (clay and silt, P -200 material) in the fill, the more critical is the need for protection from freezing. GIVIE CONSULTANTS, INC. MOISTURE CONTROL OF FILL - The contractor should be required to adjust the moisture content of the soil to within a narrow range near the optimum moisture content (as defined by the applicable Proctor or AASHTO Test). In general, fill should be placed within about 2% of optimum. The need for moisture control is more critical as the percentage of fines increases. Naturally- occurring clayey sand or cohesive /semi- cohesive soil are often much wetter than the optimum. Placing and attempting to compact such soils to the specified density may be difficult, or not possible. Even if compacted to the specified density, excessively wet soils may not be suitable as floor slab or pavement subgrades due to pumping Lander applied load. This is especially true when wet cohesive /semi- cohesive soil is used as backfill in utility trenches under streets. Excessively wet soil in thick fill sections may cause post - construction settlement beyond that estimated for fill placed at or near (±2 %) the optimum moisture content. An exception to this would be low permeability soil placed as a pond liner or for a dam. Such soil should usually be placed at 2% to 4% above the optimum moisture content, to provide for a lower insitu permeability. Also, shrinking/ swelling soils (expansive clay) should be placed at about 2% to 4% above optimum moisture to reduce the possibility of soil expansion. Clayey silt, silt, or very silty fine sand should be placed excessively dry. Such soils can undergo post- construction consolidation upon being wetted, even if the specified density had been achieved. This is caused by the collapse of flocculant soil particle arrangement, and can result in settlement of buildings or slabs constructed over the soil. Proper control of fill soil moisture is the responsibility of the excavator. The excavator should evaluate the need for wetting or drying the soils, based either on the data in the soil report, or his own site testing. If the excavator is bringing in off -site fill, it is also his responsibility to evaluate the moisture content of the soil, and the need for wetting or drying. We recommend that this matter be addressed in the project specifications. CONSTRUCTION ON COMPACTED SOIL After the select fill has been placed, compacted, and tested, it must be maintained and protected in order to properly support structures. The suitability of compacted fill soil can be greatly diminished if it is allowed to freeze, become saturated while unconfined (such as in footing excavations or at the surface of slab /placement subgrade), or disturbed by construction equipment. The responsibility for protecting the soil, or for correcting any disturbance, should be clearly defined in the specifica- tions. Soils which become wet and soft after compaction testing do not necessarily reflect inaccurate field density tests. Especially with non - expansive cohesive /semi- cohesive soils, saturation when unconfined can severely reduce the shear strength while the density remains adequate. The reduced shear strength can cause footings, floor slabs, or pavements to settle or fail under load. We strongly recommend that all pavement subgrade be test rolled (MN /DOT Specification 2111) immediately before paving to determine if the subgrade has not been protected and soft spots have developed. FLOOR SLAB SU GRADE AND UTILITY TRENCHES This facet of construction presents special problems, especially if the slab subgrade is allowed to freeze. When the soil thaws, it undergoes a period of temporarily lower shear strength. Floor slabs should not be cast over soil in such a weakened or frozen condition (reference pertinent PCA and ACI publications). To do so can result in cracked and failing slabs. The time period to heat and thaw a building may place the construction schedule and /or costs in jeopardy. We strongly recommend that this matter be reviewed in pre -bid and pre - construction meetings. Backfilling of utility trenches in the floor slab subgrade can be difficult. if the soil is wet, compaction to the specified density may be difficult, or not possible. The narrowly cut trenches may preclude the use of proper compaction equipment. With the use of small equipment in confined areas, the contractor must place the soil in thin lifts (4 to 6 inches), with the soil at the proper moisture content This work is typically carried out by contractors other than the mass grading or earthwork contractor. We strongly recommend that the responsibility to carry out the compaction be clearly detailed in the applicable section of the specifications, and reviewed with the appropriate contractor and subcontractor. GIVIE CONSULTANTS. INC. 2 slab opening for Neenah R3067 or equal Dimension from back of curb to center of pipe. V Dia. MH — 9* in from Back of Curb 5" Dia. MH — 3' in from Back of Curb 6' Dia. MH — T behind Back of Curb 7' Dia. MH — 9" behind Back of Curb 8' Dia. MH — 15' behind Back of Curb I I'VVII 41 4 0- w errWl Minimum of 2 maximum of 5 concrete adjustment rings with full bed of mortar between each and a e collar on the outside. 7 precast reinforced concrete slatF E Manhole steps, Neenah R1981J or equal, W o.c., Aluminum steps tpproved. -E6NQARQ-D-E�T TYPE 11 CATCHBASIN MANHOLE R= 1�M N 1-16.DWG CLASS C-1 HAND SHAPED FROM FIRM UNDISTURBED "Bc" Denotes outside diameter of Pipe Barrel w Bot(2 " KXin|mum Anderlik a Assoc. Inc. Consulting Engineers St. Paul, Minnesota Concrete Plate No. Compacted BockfU| LOAD FACTOR ig LOAD FACTOR 2.3 Compacted Backfill / � Foundation Variable K8|n|murn = 2d + Bc f|2" "Bc" Denotes outside diameter of Pipe Barrel Anderlik S Assoc. Inc. STANDARD DETAILS Consulting Engineers IMPROVED FOUNDATION ' Bc Variable ea p ng " r G Pay Dept |norements 6" (Typical) -Coarse Filter Aggregate (&4nD{)T Spec. 3149H Modified) wz=M CHWO SIZE of PIPE Cu. Yd. 54 8i Over 16 36" to 48" 12 27" to 33" 8 24!' & Less 4 IE— Tie lost 3 joints. Use 2 tie bolt fasteners per' joint Installed at 60* from top or bottom of pipe Hand placed Rip-Rap I deep Individual stones shall weigh not less than 50lbs. each Set with Grout Size of Pipe Bars " H" Bolts Provide 3 clips to fasten Trash Guard 12" t I B" 3/, o to 4 5/11 78 to Flared End. Hot dip galvanize 21" to 42' 1 1 6 , 1 3,4' after fabrication. 48"to 72" 1 1 /46 IZ I" F UN21='i 6 Max. _T Bonestroo, Rosene, STANDARD DETAILS Revisions Plate No. An,derilk a Assoc-Inc. Consulting Engineers FLARED END SECTION 1-28 St. Paul , Minn. AND TRASH GUARD SIDE VIEW Backfill to be I Cubic Yard gravel or crushed rock. Cover with polyethylene. rock. -1 /--- 8" Concrete block HYDRANT INSTALLATION Bonestroo , Rosene Anderlik a Asso. Inc. Consulting Engineers St. Paul, Minn, r4 %4" thrust — block 6"x 6" vertical - block STANDARD DETAILS GATE VALVE Ek BOX AND HYDRANT INSTALLATM block Revisions Plate No. Apr. '73 Anr. 81 2 - I A U) C 0 A� lb lop am 0 V CONCRETE BEDDING MATERIAL: BUTTRESS DIMENSIONS PIPE 22 1 12 0 BENDS 45 BENDS 90 BENDS SIZE 8 D, 8 D 8 D 6 5 1' -5 1' -5 2' - 1 1'-6" 8 -5" 1' -5" 2 1 1 ' - 6 .. 2' -8 ., 2-0 12" 1 3 ' - 4 2' 0 4-9 2 -6 " 16 '- 0 3 - 0 2' -0" 3 3- 0" 6'- 2 3- 6" 0' 2 E E24 3- 6 L44 2*- 8 1. 5- 6 .1 S-4" 8'-4" 4- 0" " 3 =0" 6'-10" 3' -10" 9 1 -8 1, 5 1 -0 .1 , Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik a Assoc., Inc. Consulting Engineers St. Paul, Minnesota W CONCRETE 0as W(r Ir 0(n M 0 w en:) + 02 1- (r 0) cr wtl-w 0: to Z co< I t4 o'TE I I. DIMENSIONS IN TABLE ARE BASED ON A WATER PRESSURE OF 150 P S 1, AND AN EARTH RESISTANCE OF I TON PER SO. FT. 2 WOOD BLOCKING MAY BE USED IN LIEU OF O y �N gpETE FOR 6" 8 8"10 45 BENDS AND FOR 6 8 a 12 " 0 22 1/2 0 BENDS PROVIDED AREA IN CMN CT WITH EARTH IS SAME AS AREA SHOWI 3. DIMENSION C C C SHOULD BE LARGE ENOUGH TO MAKE ANGLE 9- EQUAL TO OR LARGER THAN 45 4. DIMENSION A, A A SHOULD BE AS LARGE AS POSSIBLE WITHOUT INTERFERRING WITH M. J. BOLTS. 5. SHAPE OF BACK OF BUTTRESS MAY VARY AS LONG AS POUR IS AGAINST FIRM UNDISTURBED EARTH. Revisions I Plate No. PLAN-45* BEND APPROX. 1:1 SLOPE WHERE DEPTH BLOW PIPE EXCEEDS 6 SECTION A-A If 6 11 Distance to variable 1/ 2 r r = (01 37 1/211r slo e 3/4" er ft.. 18 Distance to variable r = (0 1/2"r s l o , e '3/4 er ft. 3/ 1 /2/1r I " s i o - 3/4! r f t.,, 11 //2 r 12 I 12' T Y P STANDARD SECTION B618 CONCRETE CURB 8 GUTTER TYPE "B" STANDARD SECTION M.H.D. B624 CONCRETE CURB a GUTTER TYPE STANDARD SECTION SURMOUNTABLE CONCRETE CURB • GUTTER 1/Z rA r Distance to �- variable Bituminous surface TYPE oa D" STANDARD SECTION Co M. H. D. B6 VII Gravel base CONCRETE CURB Type"A'or Type Curb r 3/4, er 1/2" TYPE — A B, C slope C\J: STANDARD SECTION DRIVEWAY 10" 1, 16 A 22 Type B 12 ' IZ'—TVDe C Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik Ek Assoc, Inc. Consulting Engineers St. Paul, Minnesota STANDARD DETAILS CONCRETE CURB B GUTTER Revisions I Plate No. kiff e Type A, B,C or D concrete curb 8 gutter 4'- 0 _ = 4" Conc. waIR See plots 4 -I -_ _-___--- ------------- ---- i ' E I�� er. f4. �• �• f �'' .�' o oa Bonestr Ro sene, Revisions Plate N 0. Anderlik a Assoc., Inc. ST ANDARD • Consulting Engineers -3 PED EST R IAN • P,. RAMP e St, Paul, Minnesota conc. curb A B618 conc. curb a gutter, 1 10 Min. Transition F B616 curb Ek gutter 77; RTr'MF= 'R�- MIIIIII Catchbasin frame Eh cover. F41 I - 10'Min. Transition F j—Top of curb 2-No.4 rebors Expansion—I Joint Neenah frame S cover or equal R-3067 with Type DL grate oo Revisions Bonestr Rosene I SPECIAL DETAILS 2-19-82 JKI Anderlik and Assoc, Inc. i Consulting Engineers B618 CURB 8 GUTTER St. Paul, Minn. CONSTRUCTION AT CATCH BASIN [Oyzii I= Catchbosin costing Neenah R-3067 or equal. 3" radius curb box Min. 2, Max. 3 Conc. adjustment rings. ®onestroo, Rose , Anderlik a Assoc., Inc. Consulting Engineers St, Paul, Minnesota a No. 3 re bar ( to extend 12" beyond each side of costing ) Embedded in conc. collar and curb. CONCRETE SPECIAL DETAILS i CASTING ON TYPE 11: CATCHBASIN Conc. collar to encase costing and rings. Conc. curb mix shall be used for conc. collar. 0 Grout shall be placed inside.between and outside of conc. adjustment rings. Conc. or metal shims shall be used to level costing. wood stakes 8' Maximum spacing W 3: M D :2 z :2 Support post anchorage in—situ soil Engineering fabric. Mirafi "Envirofenc or equal. Fabric anchorage trench Backfill trench with tamped natural soil In .N2t_%- Attach fabric to support posts with lath and staples 63vag 1 11 T. - n - I big 0 W r "Ic - s - t — R — evision.- may, 19190 SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 3.1. AWARD OF CONTRACT The award of the project shall be made to the lowest responsible bidder based on the lowest base bid amount. The Owner reserves the right to retain all bids for 45 days prior to awarding the Contract. 8.14. ONE -YEAR CORRECTION PERIOD The correction period is herewith revised to two years. OUT -OF -STATE CONTRACTOR SURETY DEPOSIT When an out -of -state Contractor enters into a contract that exceeds $100,000.00, the Contractor must file Form SD -E, Exemption from Surety Deposits for Out -of- State Contractors, with the Minnesota Department of Revenue. If the Contractor is exempt from the surety deposit requirements, he shall provide the Owner with a copy of the form showing the Revenue Department certification. If the Contractor is not exempt, the Owner will withhold an additional eight (8) percent of each payment made to the Contractor and forward those funds to the Minnesota Department of Revenue. Forms and information can be obtained by calling (612) 296 -6181 or (toll free) 1 -800- 657 -3777. CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE WITH MINNESOTA STATUES 290.92 & 290.97 Upon completion of the project and prior to final payment, the Contractor and all subcontractors shall complete Minnesota Department of Revenue Form _IC -134, revised September, 1989. This form, Withholding Affidavit for Contractors, must be stamped and dated by the Department of Revenue and forwarded to the Owner. Contractors can obtain copies of this form from the Owner or from the Minnesota Department of Revenue, Mail Station 4450, St. Paul, MN 55416 or by calling (612) 296 -6181. 3471S Copyright 1990 Bonestroo, Rosene, Anderlik & Associates, Inc. STATE OF MINNESOTA County of- jjgmPI j ss. On this---------- - - - - -- 2 nd , _ day of JX John P. Martinsen A. D. 19-9.Q, before me appeared -------------- ---- "--- •------------ - -. -__ __ _ -_ - - - -. -, to me personally known, who, being by me duly sworn, did say that he is the Agent and Attorney -in -Fact of the UNIVERSAL SURETY COMPANY, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Nebraska; that the seal affixed to the foregoing instrument is the corporate seal of said corporation; that said instrument was signed and sealed in be- half of said corporation by authority of its Board of Directors; and said ------ Mar acknowledged sai nstrument to be the free act and deed of aid car o RACNt! THoh,lg* - - - - -- ---- - - - - -- My Commission ptr Y��w. -, -ice Notary P lic__ ,,� - - - - -- County, Minn. LINCOLN, NEBRASKA POWER OF ATTORNEY 1 J�,I1 4JA I� Thew Vrrsrnts: That the UNIVERSAL SURETY CONIPAM , a corporation of the State of Nebraska, having its principal office in the City of Lincoln, Nebraska, pursuant to the following By -Law, which was adopted by the Board of Directors of the said Company on July 23, 1981, to -wit: "Article V- Section 6. RESIDENT OFFICERS AND ATTORNEYS -IN -FACT. The President or any Vice- President, acting with any Secretary or Assistant Secretary. shall have the authority to appoint Resident Vice- Presidents and Attorneys -In -Fact, with the power and authority to sign, execute, acknowledge and deliver on its behalf, as Surety: Any and all undertakings of suretyship and to affix thereto the corporate seal of the corporation. The President or any Vice- President, acting with any Secretary or Assistant Secretary, shall also have the authority to remove and revoke the authority of any such appointee at any time." does hereby make, constitute and appoint Richard W. Dunphy or Bruce N. Telander or John P. Martinsen or R. W. Frank or R. Scott Egginton or Donald R. Olson or Dennis J. Linder or Linda K. French or Gary S. Soderberg, Minneapolis, Minnesota its true and lawful Attorney(s) -In -Fact, to make, execute, seal and deliver for and on its behalf, as Surety: Any and all undertakings of suretyship And the execution of such bonds or undertakings in pursuance of these presents, shall be as binding upon said Company, as fully and amply, to all intents and purposes, as if they had been duly executed and acknowledged by the regularly elected officers of the Company at its offices in Lincoln, Nebraska, in their own persons. The following Resolution was adopted at the Regular Meeting of the Board of Directors of the Universal Surety Company, held on July 23, 1981: "RESOLVED. That the signatures of officers of the Company and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney executed in accordance with Article V- Section 6 of the Company By -Laws; and that any such Power of Attorney bearing such facsimile signatures, including the facsimile signature of a certifying Assistant Secretary and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond, undertaking or contract of suretyship to which it is attached." All authority hereby conferred shall remain in full force and effect until terminated by the Company. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, UNIVERSAL SURETY COMPANY has caused these presents to be signed by its Vice- President and its corporate seal to be hereunto affixed this 24th day of June , 1g 88 UNIVERSAL SURETY COMPANY yV AETy � 0RP3VTE Secretary B y Vice-President State of Nebraska ss. County of Lancaster) On this 24th day of June 19 88 before me personally came Robert L. Privett to me known, who being by me duly sworn, did depose and say that (s)he resides in the County of Lancaster, State of Nebraska; that (s)he is the Vice- President of the UNIVERSAL SURETY COMPANY, the corporation described in and which executed the above instrument; that (s)he knows the seal of the said corporation; that the seal affixed to the said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said corporation; that (s)he signed (his) (her) name by like order; and that By -Law, Article V- Section 6, adopted by the Board of Directors of said Company, referred to in the preceding instrument, is now in force. Gerald 0. liens GENERAL NOTARIAL i\`� BEAL ;( STATE OF NEBRASKA My Commission Expires 8 -22 -89 Notary Public r l Thomas A. Tallman Assistant Secretary of UNIVERSAL SURETY COMPANY, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney executed by said UNIVERSAL SURETY COMPANY, which is still in full force and effect. Signed and sealed at the City of Lincoln, Nebraska this 2nd, day of July 19 9 0 , cVPET 4 O 9 / 41�� >� COBP E As SE 1 , stant Secretary „�e ^`� ME AND ADDRESS OF AGENCY: FOSTER 200 W. 8DWY. P.O. BOX 188 MONTICELLO. Mt Immmo ME AND ADDRESS OF lNSUREDv SHINGOBEE BUILDERS INC, P. 0. BOX 6 LORETTO, NN 55357 COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE: COMPANY K CIGNA QS 00 COMPANY Bf AUTO OWNERS INS CC) COMPANY Q STATE FUND MUTUAL COMPANY D: COMPANY E: LIMITS OF LIABILITY MP TYPE POLICY NUMBER IN THOUSANDS (000) TTER OF INSURANCE EFFECTIVE/EXPIRATION DATE A GENERAL LIABILITY MFCD!6131167 X COMMERCIAL GENERAL 03/20/90 TO 03/20/91 LIABILITY GENERAL AGGREGATE: $ 1,000 CLAIMS MADE X OCCURRENCE PRODUCTS CONP/OPS AGG: $ 1000 X OWNERS & CONTRACTORS PROTECTIVE PERSONAL & ADVERTISING INJURY! $ 500 EACH OCCURRENCE: $ 50 1 01 FIRE DAMAGE (ANY I FIFW $ 51f) MEDICAL EXPENSE (ANY I PERSON): $ 5 AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY MFCD!6131167 X ANY AUTO 03/20/90 TO 03/20/91 CSL: $ 500 ALL OWNED AUTOS Bl- SCHEDULED AUTOS EACH PERSON) HIRED AUTOS NON-OWNED AUTOS BI: GARAGE LIABILITY EACH ACCIDENT) PROPERTY DAMAGE: ,ORD CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE PAGE 2 LIMITS OF LIABILITY �Mp TYPE POLICY NUMBER IN TT- (000) I 'i T E/Ey. F 7TER OF INSURANCE EFFECT-V AT ION DATE E 11.4 EA. OCCU-IR'. /AGGREG4AT�- B EXCESS LIABILITY OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY 862 6 8 ,-,f7, 8 000 $ 3 0 0 04/01/910 TO 04 EACH ACCIDENT: DISEASE POLICY LIMIT: DISEASE EACH EMPLOYEE- $ IN SCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LTIOCATIONS/VEHICLES/SPECIAL ITEMS: P I T C I Y - M I T F"' I ES T 1. 0 A C"! D E N'T" D I S F" AS E Li 1�, j, 11 MBRELLA TWO 'IFOLICTE'S C)NE FIC)R SHT B fl� T D E 13, S5 @ 3 C) 0 -, 0 0 I I N C� 13 E - - 11 ' T - -7 8-322f AND Ot, FOR ' BERT FIENC�E, T 1, NC 00 - T 1,1 Ir Q 'U "' 0 e) -ID -8 3 611 7 5 I I I V - -L -- CANCELLATION V.04 ___ .® 0 CERTIFICATE HOLDER Bonestroo Rosene Anderlik & Associated Engineers 2335 W, Hwy 36 St. Paul, Mn 55113 (File # 3471) City Of New Hope, Owners 4401 Xylon Ave. Norht New Hope, Mn 55428 DATE ISDSUED- 071/iD'5/90 , ALA X jRii'ZED REP.i.!ES , -7ef7i- amrsup. INSURANCE BINDER ISSUE DATE (MM/DD/YY) THIS BINDER |SA TEMPORARY INSURANCE CONTRACT, SUBJECT TD THE CONDITIONS SHOWN ON THE REVERSE 0FTHIS FORK4_ _SIDE iUCER COMPANY BINDER NO. � Cigna Ins. Foster-Franzen-Carlson EXPIRATION DATE E'^~^'E TIME DATE TIME 200 W. Broadway P0 BOX 188 mw x 12:01 AM Monticello, MN 55362 ' ` '- l_._' 1pM-L��- L-_LNOON THIS BINDER IS ISSUED TO EXTEND COVERAGE IN THE ABOVE NAMED $ COMPANY PER EXPIRING POLICY NO: ' 000«onE DESC OF ~'~---'-'---P--Y (In Loc --- --- — - ---- - eBuilders o �hi0g0bS9 Builders Inc. I ~ Risk - Completed l. Contractors, City of New H0D8 owner Value Form le8trU0 R03eDe ADderllk & Assoc., Architects OWNER'S & CONTRACTOR'S PROT. ) Shi0g0he8 Builders EACH OCCURRENCE � North Medina Street ' ~~ `retO, Mn 55357 `--~~�-- - TYPE OF INSURANCE COVERAGEIFORMS AMOUNT DEDUCTIBLE COINSUR. IERTY CAUSES OF LOSS BASIC BROAD X SPEC, "All Risk" Completed Value Form Perils $8,300 $250 100% :RAL LIABILITY GENERAL AGGREGATE $ COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY PROD, — COMPIOPS AGGREGATE $ CLAIMS MADE OCCUR PERSONAL & ADVTSNG. INJURY $ OWNER'S & CONTRACTOR'S PROT. EACH OCCURRENCE $ FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) $ RETRO DATE FOR CLAIMS MADE: MED. EXPENSE (Any one person) $ ALL VEHICLES SCHEDULED VEHICLES CSL $ LIABILI NONIOwNED mnso GARAGE PHYSICAL DAMAGE COLLISION DED. ALL VEHICLES SCHEDULED VEHICLE� SS LIABILITY UMBRELLA �° � OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM nErno DATE FOR CLAIMS MADE STATED AMOUN OTHER EACH AGGREGATE SELF-INSURED OCCURRENCE RETENTION WORKER'S COMPENSATIO AND EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY STATUTORY $ (EACH ACCIDENT) $ (DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT) )VeriDg: 1 story frame storage shed in the C0UrSe Of construction situated at 8900 Research Center Road, New Hope, Minn ACV MORTGAGEE ADDITIONAL INSURED LOSS PAYEE " m�LOAN en CONDITIONS ORD 75 (2185) 2�3E w S`1 $$��@@yv� @@ ,rvsp� g RECE IVEo fS N �� ENV IVALTH SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE ••� 11 v �,.• . • I •• V . ... BERNARD HERMAN ARCHITECTS, INC. 4825 OLSON MEMORIAL HIGHWAY,SUITE 234 MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55422 612/545 -1253 I Co IZO U 6"1 V k I hereby certify that this plan, specification, or report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Regist red Professional Archi un a S of the State of Mi ota . NeT'ffar'd Herman, AL - Date: October 31, 1989 Reg. No.: 7893 TABLE OF CONTENTS TITLE SHEET & CERTIFICATE TABLE [FCONTENTS SCHEDULE 0RDRAWINGS DIVISION A - BIDDING INFORMATION NO. OF PAGES A-01 - Advertisement for Bids 2 A-02 - Instructions to Bidders G A-03 - Bid Form - General Construction 3 B-01 - Agreement 1 B-02 - Bond Form 1 DIVISION C - CONTRACT CONDITIONS C-01 - General Conditions 1 C-02 - Supplementary Conditions 8 0101 - Summary of the Work l 0IO2 - Work Schedule 1 8110 - Description of Bide & Alternates 1 0113 - Construction Permits 1 8120 - Project Meetings . 1 0130 - Submittals Required 1 0140 - Quality Control 1 0150 - Temporary Facilities 3 0160 - Materials and Equipment 1 0170 - Project Close-out 1 0180 - Technical Specification Format 2 0180 - Miscellaneous Requirements 3 DIVISION 02 - 8ITBW]RK 0201 - Subsurface Exploration 1 0211 - Demolition 2 0220 - Excavation and Backfill 4 0280 - Iauudnosplog 2 DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 0320 - Concrete Reinforcement 2 0330 - Cast in Place Concrete 4 DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 0401 - Masonry Construction 5 DIVISION 05 - METALS 0518 - Structural Steel 2 0550 - Miscellaneous Metals 1 DIVISION 06 - CARPENTRY 0810 - Rough Carpentry 3 0819 - gom3 Trusses 4 Table of Contents-01 im: ywgreoe �aypikvg W 16MARIJ I k k It 0753 - Elastic Sheet Roofing & Membrane Flashings 3 0760 - Flashing and Sheet Metal 2 0761 - Preformed Metal Roofing, Fascia and Soffit System 3 0 - Unit Skylights 1 0790 - Sealants 2 1111VA1612 • 1 1: i i • • 1 i; ; ��, 1 11 0811 - Hollow Metal Doors & Frames (Welded Type.) 3 0840 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 0852 - Aluminum Windows 0870 - Finish Hardware 3 0880 - Glass and Glazing 2 DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 0925 - Gypsum Drywall 0930 - Ceramic Tile 0970 - Special Flooring 0990 - Painting and Decorating In &TA 155 BE 1016 - Metal Toilet Partitions 2 1020 - Louvers and Vents 1 1050 - Lookers and Basket Racks 1 1052 - Fire Protection Specialties 1 1080 - Toilet and Bath Accessories I DIVISION 11 - (Does not apply) DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS (Does not apply) DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (Does not apply) DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS (Does not apply) DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15010 - General Provisions b 10505 - Basic Materials and Methods 5 15060 - Pipe and Pipe Fitting 3 15200 - Water Supply System 2 15450 - Plumbing Fixtures 1 15800 - Ventilation 3 Table of Contents-02 V i 0 D • 16010 - Electrical General Provisions 4 16100 - Electrical Basic Materials and Methods 6 16400 - Electrical Services and Distribution System 3 16500 - Lighting 2 16700 - Telephone Raceway System 2 16750 - Paging Backgroun 3 16800 - Electrical Power /Heating Equipment 3 1 • • i •_ •i•►YY�I►Mi.� • • I1: S � i S• Table of Contents -03 SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS F.-It y lwY Al SITE PLAN A2 BATHHOUSE FLOOR PLAN A3 EQUIPMENT BUILDING FLOOR PLAN A4 BATHHOUSE ELEVATIONSS A5 EQUIPMENT BUILDING ELEVATIONS & SECTIONS A6 BUILDING SECTIONS & INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A7 BUILDING DETAILS i:_ S1 FOOTING & FOUNDATION PLAN S2 SECTIONS & DETAILS S3 EQUIPMENT BUILDING FOOTING & FOUNDATION PLAN MECHANICAL M1 BATHHOUSE - MECHANICAL WORK M2 BATHHOUSE - RISERS & DETAILS M3 EQUIPMENT BUILDING - MECHANICAL WORK W/I�iIY.•f E1 BATHHOUSE - ELECTRICAL E2 EQUIPMENT BUILDING - ELECTRICAL A-01 E- E - BIDS 1.0 PROJECT: Swimming Pool Bathhouse & Equipment Building, New Hope, Minnesota. 2.0 OWNER: City of New Hope 4401 Xylon Avenue North New Hope, Minnesota 55428 3.0 BIDS DUE: Sealed Proposals will be recieved at the indicated address until 2:00 PM on Thursday, November 16, 1989. Shortly thereafter the proposals will be opened and publicly read aloud. 4.0 PLACE DUE: New Hope City Hall Office of City Manager 4401 Xylon Avenue North New Hope, Minnesota 55428 Attention: Mr. Dan Donahue 5.0 TYPE OF BIDDING, AND CLASSES OF WORK: The Owner will accept proposals from contractors for a single prime contract to include: General, Mechanical and Electrical Construction. 6.0 AVAILABILITY OF DOCUMENTS: Drawings and specifications are on file at the office of Bernard Herman Architects, Inc., New Hope City Hall, the St. Paul Builders Exchange, the Minneapolis Builders Exchange and F.W. Dodge Corp. 7.0 DOCUMENTS DEPOSIT: Two sets of documents will be available to bidders. Documents may be obtained from the architect upon a deposit of $35.00 per set. The deposit is refundable upon return of documents, in good condition, to the architect's office within fifteen days after bidding. Failure to submit a bid or to return documents, as indicated, will result in forfeiture of deposit. 8.0 DOCUMENTS PURCHASE: Persons requiring documents other than as described above, may purchase them. There will be no refunds on purchased items. Each bidder is solely responsible for selection of appropriate drawing sheets and completeness of his bid. Each request must be in writing or by phone and made to the Architect. A -01 -01 A- 01 1 11' 11 111 •• B IDS 8.0 DOCUMENTS PURCHASE: (continued) Bidders from outside the Metropolitian area can request plans and they will be sent US Mail upon receipt of plan deposit plus shipping and handling charges. 9.0 BID SECURITY: Each bid shall be accompanied by a certified check or cashiers check made payable to the City of New Hope, or a corporate surety bond by a surety company duly authorized to do business in the State of Minnesota, in the sum of not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid, which is submitted as a bid security conditioned upon the bidder's entering into a contract with the City of New Hope in accordance with the terms of the bid. It is agreed that said bid security will constitute liquidated damages, and not a penalty, for the failure or refusal of the successful bidder to enter into a contract, in accordance with this proposal. 10.0 QUALIFICAITON STATEMENT: Each bidder will be required to submit with the bid, a Contractor's Qualification Statement, AIA Document A305. 11.0 PRIOR APPROVAL: This contract has a 3 day prior approval clause for product substitutions. END OF SECTION A -01 A- 019108 BHA10 -89 A -01 -02 A -02 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1.0 DEFINITIONS: 1.1 All definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, are applicable to these Instructions to Bidders. 1.2 Bidding documents include Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, and the proposed Contract Documents including any Addenda issued prior to receipt of bids. 1.3 Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued prior to the execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the bidding documents, including Drawings and Specifications, by additions, deletions, clarifications, or corrections. Addenda will become a part of the Contract Documents when the Construction Contract is executed. 2.0 BIDDERS REPRESENTATION: 2.1 Each bidder, by submitting his bid, represents that he has read and understands the bidding documents and also any and all subcontractors he intends to use has carefully and thoroughly reviewed the drawings, specifications, and other construction contract documents and have found them complete and free from ambiguities and sufficient for the purpose intended. If this was not the case, they have followed the procedure as outlined in 4.0 hereinafter. 2.2 Each bidder, by submitting his bid, represents that he has carefully examined the site of the work and that from his own investigations he has satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the work and the character, quality, quantities of materials and difficulties to be encountered, the kind and extend of equipment and other facilities needed for the performance of the work, the general and local conditions, and other items which may, in any way, affect the work or its performance. 2.3 Each bidder, by submitting his bid, represents that he intends to perform this Contract within the prescribed time period allocated for this work. 3.0 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS: 3.1 The bidder and all workmen, employees and subcontractors - he intends to use are skilled and experienced in the type of construction represented by the construction contract documents bid upon. 3.2 Each bidder shall submit to the Owner a properly executed Contractor's Qualification Statement, AIA Document A305, with the Proposal Form. A -02 -01 A -02 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 4.0 EXAMINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS: 4.1 Each bidder shall examine the bidding documents carefully and, not later than three days prior to the date for receipt of bids, shall make written request to the Architect for interpretation or correction of any ambiguity, inconsistency, or error therein which he may discover. Any interpretation or correction will be issued as an Addendum by the Architect. Only a written interpretation or correction by Addendum shall be binding. Neither the bidder nor any of his employees, agents, intended suppliers, or subcontractors shall rely upon any verbal representations, allegedly authorized or unauthorized from the owner, his employees, or agents including architect, engineers, or consultants, in assembling the bid figure. 5.0 SLMSTITTMONS . 5.1 Each bidder represents that his bid is based upon the material and equipment described in the bidding documents. 5.2 No substitution will be considered unless written request has been submitted to the Architect for approval at least three days prior to the date for receipt of bids unless otherwise indicated. Each such request shall include a complete description of the proposed substitution, the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted, drawings, cuts, performance and test data, and any other data or information necessary for a complete evaluation. All requests must have a stamped, self addressed return envelope, and be made in duplicate. If the Architect approves any proposed substitution, such approval may be set forth in the Addendum. Final approval of substitute material will not occur until shop drawings and/or samples have been submitted and approved by the Architect after contract award. 6.0 BIDDING PROCEDtk . 6.1 All bids must be prepared on copies of the forms provided in the specification and submitted in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders. 6.2 A11 bids must be submitted in duplicate, and it shall be the responsibility of each bidder to reproduce such forms for actual use. The form bound with the specifications are reproduction masters and any copy of the specifications from which said forms have been removed shall be considered a mutilated copy. All proposals must be legibly written in ink with all amounts given both in words and figures where so indicated. Proposals shall be strictly in accordance with the prescribed form. Any modifications thereof, deviations or omissions therefrom may be considered sufficient cause for rejection. Proposals carrying riders or qualifications to the bid as submitted may be rejected as irregular. Where there is a difference between the amounts shown in words and figures, the amount in words shall prevail. A -02 -02 A -02 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 6.0 BIDDING PROCEDURES: (continued) 6.3 A bid is invalid if it has not been deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of bids indicated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, or prior to any extension thereof issued to the bidders. 6.4 Unless otherwise provided in any supplement to these Instructions to the Bidders, no bidder shall modify, withdraw, or cancel his bid or any part thereof for 30 days after the time designated for the receipt of bids in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid. 6.5 Prior to the receipt of bids, Addenda may be mailed or delivered to each person or firm recorded by the Architect as having received the bidding documents, and will be available for inspection wherever the bidding documents are kept available for that purpose. Addenda issued after receipt of bids will be mailed or delivered only to the selected bidder. All addenda issued prior to the time of bidding shall be covered in the proposal and will become a part of the Contract. State the numbers of addenda included on the proposal form. 6.6 Erasures or other changes in the bids must be explained or noted over the signature of the bidder. 6.7 The bidder shall state in his proposal the number of calendar days from the date of signing Contract that will be required to complete the project. 6.8 The bidder shall refer to the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid (Section A -01) for Bid Security requirements. 6.9 Each copy of the proposal must be signed in ink by the bidder. 6.10 Bids which are not signed by individuals making them should have attached thereto a Power of Attorney evidencing authority to sign the bid in the name of the person for whom it is signed. 6.11 Bids which are signed for a co- partnership should be signed by all of the co- partners or by an Attorney -in -Fact. If signed by an Attorney -in -Fact, there should be attached to the bid, a Power of Attorney evidencing authority to sign the bid. 6.12 Bids which are signed for a corporation should have the correct corporate name thereof signed in handwriting or in typewriting and the signature of the President or other authorized officer of the corporation should be manually printed or typewritten below the corporate name following the word "By If such a bid is manually signed by an official other than the President of the Corporation, a certified copy of a resolution of the Board of Directors evidencing authority of such official to sign the bid should be attached to it. A -02 -03 A -02 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 6.0 BIDDING pRocEDURES : ( continued ) 6.13 If bids are signed by any other legal entity, authority of the person signing for such legal entity should be attached to the bid. 6.14 Submit proposal and other required envelope, plainly identified as: Proposal for (Contract Work) (Name of Project) (Name of Owner) (Address of Owner) (Bidder's Name and Address) data in an opaque, sealed If submitted by mail, the proposal envelope shall be enclosed in another envelope addressed for mailing. Submit proposals at the time and place shown on the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid (Section A -01). 7.0 F&JECTION OF BIDS: 7.1 The bidder acknowledges the right of the Owner to reject any or all bids and to waive any informality or irregularity in any bid received. In addition, the bidder recognizes the right of the Owner to reject a bid if the bidder has failed to furnish any required bid security, or to submit the data required by the bidding documents, or if the bid is in any way incomplete or irregular. 8.0 SUBMISSION OF POST BID INFTION: 8.1 Upon request by the Architect, the selected bidder shall, within seven days thereof, submit the following: 8.1.1 A statement of costs for each major item of work included in the bid. 8.1.2 A designation of the work to be performed by the bidder with his own forces. 8.1.3 A list of the subcontractors or other person or organizations (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for such portions of the work as may be designated, the names of the subcontractors proposed for the principal portions of the work. The bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the architect and the owner, the reliability and responsibility of the proposed subcontractors to furnish and perform the work described in the sections of the specifications pertaining to such proposed subcontractors' respective trades. Prior to the award of the contract, the architect will notify the bidder in writing if either the owner or the architect, after due investigation, has a reasonable and substantial objection to any person or organization on such list. If the owner or architect has a reasonable and substantial objection to any person or organization, the bidder may, at his option withdraw his bid without forfeiture of bid security. If the bidder submits an acceptable substitute with an increase in his bid price to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution, the Owner may, at his discretion, accept the increased bid price or he may disqualify the bidder. Subcontractors and other persons and organizations proposed by the bidder and accepted by the owner and A -02 -04 A-02 - INSTRUCTIONS T BIDDER 8.0 SLMMISSION OF POST- -BID DOOMATION: (continued) 8.1.3 (continued) architect must be used on the work for which they were proposed and accepted. The Subcontractors shall not be changed except with the written approval of the owner and the architect. 9.0 CONTRACT AWARD: 9.1 For the purpose of preliminary consideration, the apparent "Low Bidder" will be determined by the amount of the base bid. Award of Contract may include full consideration of unit prices, alternates, and completion time. The architect will issue notification of award and draw up and approve the Owner /Contractor Agreement. The owner reserves the right to make contract award to the firm that he finds to his (the owner's) best advantage, including consideration of any or all alternates. 10.0 PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND: 10.1 The owner shall have the right, prior to the execution of the contract, to require the bidder to furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the contract and the payment of all obligations arising thereunder in such form and amount as the owner may prescribe and with such sureties secured through the bidder's usual sources as may be agreeable to the parties. If such bonds are stipulated in the bidding documents, the premiums shall be paid by the bidder; if required subsequent to submission of bids, the cost shall be reimbursed by the owner. The bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the owner not later than the date of execution of the contract, or if the work is commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the bidder shall, prior to commencement of the work, submit evidence satisfactory to the owner that such bonds will be issued. 10.2 The bidder shall require the Attorney -in -Fact who executed the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of his Power of Attorney indicating the monetary limit of such power. EM OF SECTION A -02 A- 029108 BHA10 -89 A -02 -05 A -03 - BID FORM - PROPOSAL FOR CONTRACT WORK 1.0 The attached Bid Form, available from the Owner or Architect, shall be used for submittal of all proposals for contract work. Each bidder shall complete the form in its entirety and shall submit all information required. In submitting the bid, it is understood that the City of New Hope reserves the right to reject any and all bids. It is further agreed that the bid may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty days after date of filing same. 1.1 As a requirement of the.bid, a bid bond or corporate surety bond shall be submitted with the proposal. END OF SECTION A-03 A- 039018 BHA10 -89 A -03 -01 New Hope City Hall 4401 Xylon Avenue North New Hope, Minnesota Gentlemen: 10 -31 -89 (1) The undersigned, being familiar with the existing and local conditions affecting the cost of the work and with the Contract Documents, including Instructions to Bidders, Proposal Form, General and Supplemental Conditions, .Drawings and Specifications and Addenda numbers as prepared by Bernard Herman Architects, Inc., and in accordance with the provisions thereof, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, equipment, insurance, taxes, transporation and means necessary for and incidental to: Complete construction including General, Mechanical and Electrical Construction. Base bid is for the sum of: Dollars ($ ) Consisting of Name of Subcontractor ($ ) for General Construction ($ ) for Mechanical Construction ($ ) for Electrical Construction (2) In submitting this bid, it is understood that the right is reserved by City of New Hope to reject any and all bids and that it is agreed that this bid may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) days after date of bid opening. (3) Each bid shall be accompanied by a certified check or cashiers check, made payable to City of New Hope or a corporate surety bond of a surety company duly authorized to do business in the State of Minnesota, in the sum of not less than five (5) percent of the total amount of the bid, which is submitted as a bid security conditioned upon the bidder's entering into a contract with City of New Hope in accordance with terms of the bid. It is agreed that said bid security of the successful bidder will constitute liquidated damages, and not a penalty, for the failure of the bidder to enter into contract in accordance with this proposal. (4) Each bid shall be accompaned by a properly executed Contractor's Qualification Statement, AIA Document A305. (5) All addenda shall become part of the bid and the work, and shall be submitted with the bid. The Contractor shall insert the addenda numbers in the space provided where indicated on the first page of the Proposal. (6) A bid shall be rejected if it contains any alteration or erasure, unless alteration or erasure is corrected as herein provided. An alteration or erasure may be crossed out and the correction thereof printed in ink or typewritten adjacent thereto and initialed in ink by the person signing the bid. (7) We propose to complete the work in accordance with the Contract Documents within calendar days from execution of the Contract. (8) If a corporation, what is the state of incorporation: (9) If a partnership, state full name of all co- partners: Official Address Date Firm Name By Title By; Title 1 i �I' i• ' � i' � !!' 91�i Iii 1.0 The AIA Standard Form Documents will be used as the agreement form between Owner and Contractor. The following form is the one to be used. AIA A101 - StiDul.ated Sum Copies of the above forms are on file at the office of the architect and may be reviewed during normal working hours, Monday through Friday, or as included following this Section. END OF SECTION B-01 B- 019108 BHA10 -89 B -01 -01 1.0 PE F OINANCE BOND 1.1 Performance Bond and a Labor and Material payment Bond will be required in the amount of 100 percent of the Contract Sum, executed on AIA Document A311 Performance Bond and Labor and Material payment Bond. These bonds are not required as a condition of bidding but will be required as a condition of the contract award. � d1 � • : 1 : ms � .• B -02 -01 1.0 A.I.A. Form: The "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction," American Institute of Architects Document A201, 1976 Edition, hereinafter referred to as the "A.I.A. General Conditions," are hereby made a part of this specification whether or not it is bound herein. The AIA General Conditions may be examined at the office of the Architect. The AIA General Conditions including Supplementary Conditions (Section C-02) shall become a part of this contract and shall apply to all contractors and subcontractors. 2.0 TABLE OF ARTICLES: For the convenience of the contractors, the "Table of Articles" of the AIA General Conditions is listed below: 1. Contract Documents 2. Architect 3. Owner 4. Contractor 5. Subcontractors 6. Work by Owner or Separate Contractors 7. Miscellaneous Provisions 8. Time 9. Payments and Completion 10. Protection of Persons and Property 11. Insurance 12. Change in the Work 13. Uncovering and Correction of Work 14. Termination of the Contract C-019108 BHAIO-89 C-01-01 C -02 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS GENERAL . The Articles contained in the Supplementary Conditions of the Contract may amend, modify, supersede, void or supplement the Articles of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, 1976 Edition, and when applicable, and if used, AIA Document A201 /SC (latest edition). The Supplementary conditions shall take precedence over the provisions of the General Conditions. Where any part of an article of General Conditions is not so amended, modified, superseded or voided by a provision of the Supplementary Conditions, such part shall remain in effect. ARTICLE 1. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: 1.1.1 Amend as follows: The Contract Documents include bidding documents; including the advertisement for bid, instructions to bidders, samples of forms, the Contractor's bids, and any addenda thereto. 1.2.5 Add the following: The general character and scope of the Work is shown by the drawings. Where a portion of the Work is fully drawn and the remainder is merely indicated, the portion fully drawn shall apply to all similar parts of the Work. 1.2.6 Add the following: Where specifications are abbreviated type, they indicate complete sentences in the same manner as when a note occurs in the drawings. Omissions of words such as "the Contract shall" and "as shown on the drawings" are intentional. The words "shall" or "shall be" are to be supplied by inference. The term "provide" shall mean "furnish and install in place ". 1.2.7 Add the following: Where a number is listed in the specifications (as for gauges, weights, temperatures, amount of time, etc.) the number shall be interpreted as that or better. ARTICLE 2. ARCHITECT` 2.1.2 Add the following: "The architect shall assist the owner in preparation of bidding information, bid forms, conditions of the contract, the agreement between owner and the contractor, and the procedure of determining insurance requirements. The owner, after review, shall have final approval for these items." 2.2.4 Add the following: The architect will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the owner. C -02 -01 • • i� �• • ARTICLE 2. ARCHITECT: (continued) 2.2.14 Change to read: "The architect will review or take other appropriate action upon contractor's submittals such as shop drawings, product data and samples, but only for conformance with the design concept of the work and with the information given in the contract documents. Such action shall be taken with reasonable promptness so as to cause no delay. The architect's review of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. 2.2.16 Change to read: "The architect, through field observations, will determine the dates of substantial completion and final completion, will receive and forward to the owner for the owner's review written warranties and related documents required by the contract and assembled by the contractor and will issue a final certificate for payment upon compliance with the requirements of paragraph 9.9. 2.2.20 Add the following: Whenever an article or material is defined by describing a proprietary product, or by using the name of a manufacturer, the term, "or equal ", if not inserted, shall be understood as establishing minimum standards as to the type, function, standard of design, durability, efficiency and quality desired and shall not be construed so as to exclude other manufacturers' products or comparable quality, design and efficiency. Makes and models of items which the Contractor alleges to be equal to the makes and models of items named in the specification, shall be subject to written approval by the Architect and /or Engineer. The use of substitute items will not be permitted without the approval of the State and the Architect and /or Engineer. All requests for substitution shall be in writing and approved by the Architect and /or Engineer. The Contractor shall not be relieved from the responsibility of furnishing articles or materials equal in quality, design, and efficiency to those specified because of the approval of such substitute items by the Architect and /or Engineer. The Architects and /or Engineers approval or rejection of a proposed substitute may be based on any of the previous considerations, and his decision, which may or may not express reasons for rejection, shall be final. Requests for substitutions shall originate with and be submitted by the Contractor, not a subcontractor. The material or equipment shall be sufficiently described to enable the Architect and /or Engineer to easily identify the salient features. ARTICLE 3. OWNER: 3.2.2 Amend this paragraph to delete the requirement that the City of New Hope (Owner) provide a legal description of the site. C -02 -02 C-02 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS rft M 4.2.2 Add the following: On all drawings, figures take precedence over measurements by scale, and any scaling is done at the Contractor's own risk. The Architect shall decide on any questions that may arise regarding the meaning and intent of the Drawings and Specifications. Should any drawings or figures have been omitted which are necessary to a clear understanding of the Work or should any error appear in either, or discrepancies be found between the Drawings and Specifications, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify the Architect of such omissions, errors, or discrepancies, and in no case proceed in uncertainity. Should any mistakes arise in consequence of such neglect on the part of the Contractor to notify the Architect, he must correct them at his own expense. Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all measurements of the Project for his particular class of Work and shall be responsible for the correctness of same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed to the Contractor on account of differences between actual dimensions and the measurements shown by the Drawings. Any noticeable discrepancy in the respect shall be reported to the Architect immediately for his consideration and decision. All the component part of the Work shall be carefully checked and laid out in order that the structure as a whole shall conform to the intent of the Drawings. Failure to examine the project building and the site and the contract drawings and to become familiar with the existing conditions shall not constitute cause for complaint or claim for extra payment. Accept project site as it exists. Site will be available to Contractor upon receipt of Architect/Engineer's written notice to proceed, unless otherwise indicated in these documents. Care, custody, and control of the site or premises is vested in Contractor during the term of operations under the Contract, subject to the rights of the Owner, unless noted otherwise. Each Contractor shall give full protection to the buildings and occupants. He shall replace or repair, at his own expense all damage to existing buildings, sidewalks, curbs, drives, lawns, plants, trees and shrubbery arising from his construction work, from whatever cause. 4.4.3 Add the following: Workmanship and Materials. A. No trade shall commence Work until conditions are right or conditions are right for carrying out the work properly and surfaces to be covered are suitable. B. Manufacturer's printed instructions covering details of installation shall be followed where not in conflict with these specifications. If there is a conflict, notify the architect and obtain his approval before proceeding. C. Completed work shall be left plumb, level, true to line or I plane, anchored securely in place free from damage. C-02-03 i 2 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITI.C ARTICLE 4. CONTRACICR: (continued) 4.4.3 Workmanship & Materials (continued) D. Unless otherwise called for, all pieces of material shall be a stock size as is in conformity with standard good practice of the trade. E. Except where in conflict with these specifications, current manufacturer's printed specifications of herein specified proprietary products are made part of these specifications. 4.7.1 Add the following: Except in those municipalities which provide State- approved electrical inspection, all installation of electrical wiring shall be inspected by the State Board of Electricity. Allowance shall be made in the bid and contract for the cost of such inspection. Fees for such inspection will be charged in accordance with the rules and regulations of the State Board of Electricity. Evidence of payment of fees shall be provided by the Contractor with his Request for Payment. 4.12.6 Change to read: "The contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of the contract documents by the architect's review of shop drawings, product data or samples under subparagraph 2.2.14 unless the contractor has specifically informed the architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submission and the architect has given approval to the specific deviation. The contractor shall not be relieved from responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings, product data or samples by the architect's review thereof." 4.12.9 Add the following: Submit to the architect shop drawings; including fabrication, erection, layout and setting drawings and other such drawings as may be required under various sections of the specifications, until final approval is obtained. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining and distributing required prints of shop drawings to his subcontractors. Material drawings shall be made from transparencies which carry the architect's appropriate stamp. Mechanical and Electrical fixture brochures and catalog cuts shall be submitted to the engineers in six copies and shall show dimensions, performance characteristics and capacities, wiring diagrams and controls, schedules, and other pertinent information as required. Where printed materials describe more than one product or model, clearly identify which is to be furnished. 4.12.10 Add the following: Manufacturer's Instructions: Where any item of Work is required by specifications to be furnished, installed, or performed in accordance with a specified product manufacturer's instructions, contractor shall procure and distribute the necessary copies of such instructions to all concerned parties. C -02 -04 C-02 S - 1 11PLRENTARY CONDITTO ARTICLE 4. CONTRACTOR: (continued) 4.14.1 Delete this paragraph in its entirety and substitute the following: Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting or patching of his work that may be required to make its several parts come together properly and fit it to receive or be received by work of Subcontractors, shown upon, or reasonably implied by drawings and specifications for the completed structure, and he shall make good after them as Architect /Engineer may direct. Any cost caused by defective or ill -timed work shall be borne by party responsible therefore. Contractor shall not endanger any work by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering the work and shall not. cut or alter the work of any other Contractor. Contractor will leave all necessary holes in walls, chases, etc., required for any of the mechanical work or electrical work, provided these are accurately located before the execution of the work by the Mechanical or Electrical Subcontractors. Cutting-required by Subcontractors and not shown on the general plans shall be done by General Contractor. General Contractor shall pay all costs for such work. Any patching and repal_ring of the finished work made necessary for cutting in this Contract will be done by the General Contractor. Any injury to the structural members of the building caused by the Contractor or by those in his employ shall be made good at the Contractor's expense. No supplement. ARTICLE 6. W ORK BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS No supplement. ARTICLE 7. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS: No supplement. ARTICLE 8. TIME 8.1.3 Change to read' The date of substantial completion of the work of designated portion thereof is the date when construction is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the contract documents, so that the owner can occupy or utilize the work or designated portion thereof for the use for which it is intended. Minor corrective work and the replacement of defective work or materials, and the adjustment of control apparatus will not delay the determination that the contract is substantially complete. 8.3.5 Add the following: The following will not be considered justification for extension of time unless due to one of the causes stated within this Article. A. Delay caused by subcontractors or suppliers, except if the supplier goes out of business and another supplier cannot be found in time to meet schedule. B. Shortage of workmen. C -02 -05 SUPPLEMENTARY-CONDITIONS ARTICLE 9. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION: (continued) 9.3.4 Add: Progress payments shall be made on or about the 10th day of each month upon application, in the amount of 90% of the work completed and materials described under 9.3.2 on the first $200 thousand of a contract and 95% of the remaining amount of the contract. M- No supplement. ARTICLE 11. INSURANCE: 11.1.2 Replace the text with: This insurance shall be written for not less than the following limits of liability: 1. Contractor's Comprehensive General & Liability Insurance: a. Bodily injury: $250 thousand - each occurrence $500 thousand - aggregate b. Property Damage (broad form): $100 thousand - each occurrence $200 thousand - aggregate 2. Contractor's Contingent Liability: a. Bodily injury: $250 thousand - each occurrence $500 thousand - aggregate b. Property Damage: $100 thousand - each occurrence $200 thousand - aggregate 3. Automobile Insurance, covering all owned, non-owned, and hired vehicles: a. Bodily injury: $250 thousand $500 thousand - each occurrence - aggregate b. Property Damage: $100 thousand - each occurrence 4. Workmen's Compensation: Statutory 5. Contractor's Public Liability (broad form) to cover provisions of 4.18: a. Bodily injury: $250 thousand - each occurrence $500 thousand - aggregate b. Property Damage: $100 thousand - each occurrence $200 thousand - aggregate C-02-06 C-02 - CONDITIONS ARTICLE 11. INSURANCE: (continued) 11. 1. 2 (continued) 6. Completed operations insurance: a. Bodily injury: $250 thousand - each occurrence $500 thousand - each occurrence b. Property Damage $100 thousand - each occurrence $200 thousand - aggregate 7. Umbrella Policy to cover excess liability: a. Bodily injury and property damage combined: $1 million Approval of the Insurance by the Owner shall not relieve or decrease the liability of the Contractor hereunder. It is to be understood that the Owner and the Architect do not in any way represent that the insurance or the limits of insurance specified in these articles are sufficient or adequate to protect the Contractor's interests or liabilities, but are merely minimums. Comprehensive general and automobile liability policy form or policies shall be written by the same insurer who shall be a company licensed in the state where the same work is located at the time the policy is issued. XCU property damage exclusions shall be eliminated in all oases where made applicable by the liability insurance classifications. Completed operation insurance shall remain in effect for not less than one (1) year after substantial completion of the project. 11.1.4 Change or read: Prior to award, the Contractor shall file a complete "package" of two Certificates of Insurance signed by the Insurer or two Certified Copies of all insurance policies with Architect, who will then file one of the copy packages with owner. Each Certificate of Insurance shall be accompanied by a notarized Power of Attorney evidencing the authority of the agent to act on behalf of the company. None of the insurance required hereunder shall be cancelled, changed or allowed to lapse until the contract has been completed and the work accepted. In the event of cancellation, change or expiration, thirty (30) days' notice shall be given the Owner and all other insured parties by the insurance company or companies validated by an authorized representative of the insurer. Each policy of insurance shall contain the clause, "In the event of cancellation or expiration of the policy or of any change in the policy of any nature, thirty (30) days' advance written notice will be sent to the Owner and the Architect". No work under the contract will be started until all insurance certificates or policies have been filed and approved, nor shall any progress payment become due and payable until such certificate or policies have been filed. WMAIM C -02 - supPLIIMENTARY CONDITIONS ARTICLE 11. INSURANCE: (continued) 11.3 Property Insurance Clauses 11.3.1, 11.3.4 and 11.3.5 are deleted, and the following clauses substituted and added to Article 11, Part 3: 11.3.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the entire work at the site to the full insurance value thereof. This insurance shall include the interests of the Owner, the Contractor, subcontractors and sub - subcontractors in the work and shall insure against the perils of Fire, Extended Coverage, Vandalism and Malicious Mischief. This insurance shall be written on a Builders' Risk Completed Value form. 11.3.4 The Contractor shall file two Certificates of Insurance signed by the insurer or two Certified Copies of all policies with the Architect before an exposure to loss may occur. 11.3.5 The Contractor may, at his option, include other special insurance in the property insurance policy. The cost of such other special insurance shall be borne by the Contractor. 11.3.9 Add the following: In the event of loss, deductibles, if any, shall be paid by the Contractor. ARTICLE 12. CHANGES IN THE WORK: 12.1.6 Add the following: The owner or architects are not responsible to give Notice of Change Orders to the Surety (if any). ARTICLE 13. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK: 13.2.1 Add the following: "The corrective work shall conform in all aspects with the original intent of the contract documents." 13.2.2 Add the following: Guarantess, special guarantees and any other guarantees required by the Contract Documents shall not exclude or otherwise limit the Owner's possible remedies at law and shall not be construed as a waiver by the Owner of any other remedy. ARTICLE 14. TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT: No supplement. END OF SECTION C-02 i • 1 C 1 . 1 is 0101 - SUMMARY OF WORK 1.0 LOCATION OF SITE: 1.1 The site is located at Civic Center Park, 44th and Xylon Avenue North, New Hope, Minnesota. 2.0 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF TTIE WORK: 2.1 The following is a general description of the work required for the building construction and site work for the project named on the Title Page, hereinafter specified and shown on the drawings: Construct two buildings consisting of a Swimming Pool Bathhouse and a Pool Equipment/Storage Building. Both buildings shall be slab on grade with brick and block backup walls, wood trusses and metal roof. Existing W Heaters (2), soap dispensers (8), and drinking fountains (2) from the existing bathhouse shall be removed and re-installed in the new building. 2.2 Unless otherwise specified, the contractor shall supply, labor transportation, materials, apparatus, fuel, energy, light, scaffolding, and tools necessary for the entire proper and final completion of his work; and shall install, maintain, and remove all equipment of the construction and other utensils or items, and be responsible for the safe, proper, and lawful construction, maintenance, and use of same; and shall construct in the best and most workmanlike manner, a complete project including everything properly incidental thereto as shown on the plans, stated in specifications or reasonably implied therefrom, all in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2.3 The total work of this Bid Package is to include the following divisons of work: A. General Construction B. Electrical Construction C. Mechanical Construction 3.0 CONTRACT LTNITS: 3.1 The contract limits for this project are shown on the Site Plan and will be verified by the Owner prior to start of construction. IND OF SECTION 0101 0101-01 0102 - WORK SCHEDULE 1.0 TIME OF CCMPLMON: 1.1 The contractor shall commence work within the shortest time possible after receipt of executed copy of contract and notification to proceed. A letter of intent will be issued within 5 days of receipt of bids to accelerate the process to begin construction. The Bathhouse must be completed and operational by May 1, 1990. 2.0 PROJECT SCHEDULE FOR TIM OF COMPLMON: 2.1 After award of contract, the Owner and Contractor may establish a formal schedule for completion of the work based upon the bidders, proposed number of days to complete the work. 3.0 SEQUENCING OF WORK: 3.1 The contractors shall sequence their work as required to accommodate reasonable convenience of the owner. 3.2 Temporary dust barriers, approved by the architect, shall be provided when required to carry out the work of the contract documents or by the architect. 3.3 In all cases, security of the building and site must be maiitained during all of construction. 0=1 : IM6 0102-01 0110 - DESCRIFrION OF BIDS AND ALTERNATES 1 • • i Iiti 1.1 The cost of the project shall be for all work as indicated in the specifications and /or shown and detailed on the drawings for a single Prime Contract including: A. General Construction B. Mechanical Construction C. Electrical Construction 2.0 ALTERNATE PRICES: 2.1 The bid proposal form contains the alternates listed below. The contractor, in submitting a proposal for an alternate, shall include all costs for labor, materials, equipment, services, overhead and profit for each item as described in this section. 2.2 Alternates may be accepted at the discretion of the Owner. i • IS R.M.1 :• 0110 -01 0113 - CONSTRUCTION M MLTS 1.0 BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PERMIT 1.1 The General Contractor shall arrange and pay for the general construction permit for the project, if required. 1.2 The cost of the permit shall be included in the contractor's bid amount. 2.0 ADDITIONAL PO MM: 2.1 All other prime contractors and individual subcontractors shall pay for any and all additional permits, licenses, inspections and fees required for the proper execution and completion of his particular portion of the work, including any sewer access charges and /or water access charges. END OF SECTION 0113 01138019 BHA10 -89 0113 -01 0120 - PROJECT MEETINGS 1.0 REVIEW MEETDIGS: 1.1 The architect may elect to hold progress meetings, at his discretion, with this contractor and/or other contractors to review the progress and status of the project. Each contractor shall designate personnel completely familiar and responsible for the project to attend these meetings. FIN NIARTWITPIC 0120-01 r �Dll � I 1.0 GENERAL: 1.1 The following list of submittals has been prepared for the convenience of the Contractor and may not be a complete listing. The Owner and/or Architect will provide or indicate the appropriate forms that shall be used for specific submittals. 2. PRIOR 110 AWARD: 2.1 List of subcontractors and/or suppliers and manufacturers 4 copies 2.2 Contractor's Qualification Statement 1 copy 4XIM WN Co IL00KO-41 WN Vol 14 V 3.1 Performance/Labor and Material Bond 4 copies 3.2 Certificate of Insurance 4 copies 3.3 Additional submittals as may be required by the contract documents or requested by the Owner or Architect 4 copies 4.0 WITHIN SEVEN DAYS AFTER CONTRACT EXECUTION: 4.1 Detailed cost breakdown on application for payment form, breakdown to be in accordance with divisions of specifications and shall separate labor and material 4 copies 4.2 Name of project superintendent 4 copies 4.3 Additional submittals as may be required by the contract documents or requested by the Owner or Architect 4 copies 1 . V"(91AMECAIN011116 5.1 Application and Certificate for Payment 4 copies 5.2 Partial lien waivers if requested 4 copies 6.0 AS WCRK PROGRESSES: Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts & Claims 6.1 Shop drawings and samples: One reproducible transparency Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens and 2 prints for drawings and 7.5 Lien Waivers from all subcontractors and materials 6 copies of other submittals 6.2 Instructions 2 copies 6.3 Manuals 2 copies 6.4 Guarantees 2 copies 6.5 Test Results 2 copies 6.6 Additional submittals as may be required by the contract documents. 7.1 Application and Certificate for Payment 4 copies 7.2 Consent of Surety Company to Final Payment 4 copies 7.3 Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts & Claims 4 copies 7.4 Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens 4 copies 7.5 Lien Waivers from all subcontractors and materials suppliers, "Standard Form" 4 copies 7.6 Additional submittals as may be required by the Owner or Architect. V It NAM 0130-01 0140 - QUALITY CONTROL 1.0 MANUFACTURER'S DIREMONS . 1.1 Apply, install, connect, and erect manufactured items or materials according to the recommendations of the manufacturer when such recommendations are not in conflict with the contract documents. Where they are in conflict, the contractor shall notify the architect. If the contractor proceeds without notifying the architect, then the contractor shall assume total responsibility for the installation. 1.2 Furnish to the architect, on request, copies of manufacturer's recommendations. Secure approval of recommendations before proceeding with work. 1.3 Keep at the site not less than one copy, in good condition, of manufacturer's recommendations, or directions, pertaining to work at the site. Inform involved personnel of requirements and availability of manufacturer's recommendations. 2.0 TESTING: 2.1 The contractor shall retain and pay the expense of a testing laboratory, with prior approval by the architect, to perform specified testing. 2.2 The contractor shall, at his expense, furnish samples for such tests and when required to, cost of transportation to the testing laboratory. 2.3 Materials shall be tested as specified and in the quantity specified. 2.4 When a number of tests are specified, the architect shall select the locations. 2.5 When test results are inconclusive or indicate non - compliance with standards, additional testing will be provided, at no cost to the owner, until compliance is obtained. 2.6 Copies of all tests shall be sent to the contractor, applicable subcontractor, and architect by the testing agency. 2.7 The architect may, at times, request additional testing. 2.8 Inspection and testing shall in no way relieve the contractor or supplier from responsibility in furnishing materials and workmanship in accordance with the plans and specifications. 3.0 REJECTED MATERIALS' 3..1 Rejected materials tested to non - compliance or of obvious non - compliance with the specifications as judged by the architect shall be immediately removed and the proper or correct materials installed. END OF SECTION 0140 01409108 BHA10 -89 0140 -01 0150 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES 1.0 TEMPORARY OFFICES: 1.1 The general contractor shall provide a temporary office on the site. The office shall contain a desk or table of sufficient size to hold the construction drawings and shall be properly heated and lighted. 1.2 When the building is substantially enclosed, these offices may be moved indoors, upon approval of architect to designated rooms. 2.0 TEMPORARY TELEPHONES: 2.1 The general contractor shall install a temporary phone in his office. This phone shall b * e for the use of the architect, engineers, and owner for calls relative to this project. Other contractors may use this telephone but shall reimburse the general contractor for the cost of their calls. 3.0 CONSTMJCTION WATER: 3.1 Water for construction purposes is available at the existing fire station building or City Hall which shall be furnished by the Owner at no cost to the Contractor. Another option is to connect to the fire hydrant west of the Concessions Building which shall include a cold weather box as part of the connection. Connections, piping or hoses, as may be required, shall be the responsiblity of the Contractor. Location of connection shall be as directed by the City of New Hope. 4.0 DRINKING WATER: 4.1 Drinking water shall be provided by the General Contractor, in containers for the use of his employees and subcontractors. 5.0 TEMPORARY LIGIT AND POWER: 5.1 Electrical power is available at the site within the Concession Building and shall be furnished by the Owner at no cost to the Contractor. Temporary lighting systems if required shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. 6.0 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES: 6.1 Temporary toilet facilities at the site shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 7.0 TEMPORARY HEAT AND ENCLOSURES: 7.1 The General Contractor shall provide temporary heat as necessary to complete the work of the contract. Costs for energy use shall be paid by the General Contractor. 8.0 TRASH REMOVAL AND CLEANING• 8.1 The general contractor shall be responsible for providing trash receptacles. Each contractor is responsible for collecting and depositing his debris in the collection facilities. 8.2 The general contractor shall be responsible for the removal of debris from the jobsite at regular intervals. Trash and debris should not be allowed to accumulate. 0150-01 0150 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES 8.0 TRASH IaMVAL AND CLEANING: (continued) 8.3 All contractors and subcontractors shall collect and remove from the jobsite their own liquid waste requiring special handling for disposal. 8.4 All contractors and subcontractors shall keep all work areas, passageways, and stairs in and around the project free from debris resulting from his work at all times. 8.5 All contractors and subcontractors shall protect equipment and finishes at the jobsite from damages resulting from work under their control. All cleaning required as a result of failure to protect equipment and finishes, and for removal of protective covers, shall be the responsibility of the contractors and subcontractors at fault. 9.0 FIRE PROTEMON: 9.1 The general contractor shall provide general temporary fire protection. Permanently installed fire protection equipment may be used for temporary fire protection during construction. 10.0 ACCESS: 10.1 One specific vehicle access or delivery location from the street onto site will be designated by the City of New Hope, for sole construction use by the Contractor. 11.0 SHEDS AND STORAGE: 11.1 Each contractor shall provide suitable and sufficient enclosed and covered spaces, with raised floors, to protect his own materials and equipment subject to damage by weather or construction work, and provide sheds to suitably store materials and equipment needing only limited protection. 11.2 The general contractor shall allocate and designate storage areas and working spaces for various trades. 12.0 FENCING AND SECURITY 12.1 The general contractor shall be responsible for overall security including buildings and pool area. Construction area shall be secured by the Contractor with an orange wire mesh fence, minimum of 36" high, at the end of each day. 12.2 The responsible contractor shall cover trenches and holes when not in use and erect barriers at changes in plane steeper than 45 degrees and more than three feet in height, and provide and maintain flashing warning lights and signs as necessary to prevent damage or injury. Keep warning lights operational from dusk to dawn. 12.3 Protect window and door openings with boarding by method approved by architect until the addition is enclosed and weather tight and do not remove until new windows or adequate temporary enclosures at window openings and outside doors can be secured. 0150 -02 0150 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES 12.0 FENCING AND SECURITY: (continued) 12.4 Debris and dust shall not be permitted to accumulate and must be removed from site at frequent intervals. 12.5 Provide dust barriers to avoid spread of debris and dust into existing spaces occupied by owner when remodeling of existing building or other work of this project is being done. 13.0 SHORING, SHOUING, BRACING, ETC.: 13.1 All temporary shoring, sheeting, and /or bracing required for the removal of existing work or for the installation of new work shall be included in this contract and must be done in accordance with the direction and to the entire satisfaction of the architect, but each contractor must assume all responsibility for this work and make good any damage caused by improper supports or failure of shoring in any respect. When the permanent supports are completed, all shoring shall be removed by the contractor who installed same. 13.2 This contract shall also include all necessary cutting and patching of masonry concrete, plaster, wood, steel, etc. as may be required for the installation of shoring and supports. END OF SECTION 0150 1 �• It _. S• 0150 -03 1 .1 � �i• 1 9� ICI 1.0 DELIVERY AND STORAGE 1.1 Schedule deliveries and unloading to prevent traffic congestion, blocking of access, and interference with work. Arrange deliveries to avoid larger accumulations than can be suitably stored at site. 1.2 Pack, handle, and protect materials to prevent damage during loading, delivering, and storing. 1.3 Materials and equipment may be stored on the premises, in a manner that will prevent damage to materials or structure, and that will prevent injury to persons. Locations of storage shall be subject to approval by the City of New Hope. 1.4 Store cementitious materials in dry, weathertight, ventilated spaces. Store ferrous materials to prevent contact with ground and to avoid rusting and damage from weather. 1.5 Damaged or defective materials, no matter in what stage of completion, may be rejected by the architect and shall be removed from the premises at once, at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION 0160 01609108 BHA10 -89 0160 -01 0170 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT 1.0 OPERATING INS°IRUMONS AND MANUALS: 1.1 The contractor shall deliver to the owner two copies of neatly edited looseleaf manuals for all operating equipment incorporated into the work. The manuals shall contain the following information when applicable. 1.1.1 - Complete operating instructions and recommendations as to the fuel of product to be used. 1.1.2 - Cleaning instructions including recommended cleaning materials. 1.1.3 - Complete lubrication data and schedules. 1.1.4 - Maintenance data, repair and schedules. 1.1.5 - Parts list with numbers, recommended parts of stock and nearest parts depot and service organization. 1.1.6 - Assembly drawings, wiring diagrams, and mechanical diagrams. 1.2 Arrange with owner an appointment to give physical demonostration and oral instructions for proper operation and maintenance of machines and equipment. 2.0 CLEAN UP: 2.1 The general contractor shall, upon completion of work and prior to owner move -in at substantial completion, thoroughly clean the building. Foreign matter is to be removed from all surfaces with appropriate solvents or cleaners. All ceiling tile and grid shall be free of smudges, fingerprints, or other damage or soil. All new windows and existing windows where work was done shall be washed on both interior and exterior surfaces. All carpeting shall be thoroughly vacuumed and other floors treated as specified and swept and mopped. All woodwork and cabinets shall be dusted. 2.2 Refer to Section 0180. 3.0 AS BUILT DRAWINGS: 3.1 Contractor shall maintain one complete set of drawings on the site at all times and mark all field changes and deviations in red pencil. 3.2 The owner will supply one set of transparencies of the drawings at the time of substantial completion and the contractor shall transfer all information and submit to the architect /engineer for approval prior to final acceptance. END OF SECTION 0170 01709108 BHA10 -89 0170 -01 0180 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FORMAT 1.0 CONDENSED SPECIFICATIONS: In an attempt to be brief and concise, much of the repetitive wording of the specification has been eliminated and is contained in this section by reference. The individual specification sections; have a format that is the same as below, augment those below, indicate if they apply, are required, or to what extent are modified. 1.1 CONDITIONS: Each and every specification section is bound by the Conditions of Division A, B, C, and 01. PART 1 GENERAL: . 1.01 Scope - The extent of work of this section shall be to provide and /or install as noted; all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to providing and /or installing, as noted the items mentioned in the section title together with other related items as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. 1.02 Alternate Bids - The owner requests an alternate bid or bids related to the work of this section. Refer to Section 0110. 1.03 Unit Prices - The owner requests a unit price for the possible addition or deletion of work related to the work of this section. 1.04 Shop Drawings - Refer to General and Supplementary Conditions for submission method and quantities. 1.05 Samples - For sample requirements, refer to Article 4.13.2 of the General Conditions and as modified by the Supplementary Conditions. If a mock -up sample is required, it shall be an area of 4' -0" x 4' -0" of each material finish, or color. The architect will allow mock -up's to become part of the permanent construction if they affect the aesthetics of future use of the building or item. Unapproved mock -ups will be torn down or otherwise removed immediately. 1.06 Guarantee - The time shall be as described and designated in Division "C" but in no case shall be less than 1 year. However, 'if certain items have not been installed as of the time of substantial completion, then the guarantee period for these items shall begin at the time of installation. In the case of owner use and occupancy of a portion of the work prior to completion of the entire project, the guarantee period of said portion of work shall commence upon the date of the certificate of substantial completion for the portion involved. The contractor shall notify the architect in writing of any error, inconsistency, omission or discrepancy in the contract documents or of any actions of the owner or the owner's agents that could invalidate this warranty. 0180 -01 0180 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FORMAT PART 1 GENERAL: (continued) 1.07 Standards - Reference in the specifications to known standards, such as codes, specifications, etc., promulgated by professional or technical associations, institutes, and societies, are intended to mean the latest edition of each such applicable standard adopted and published as of the date of the advertisement to bid on this project except where otherwise specifically indicated. Each such standard referred to shall be considered a part of the specifications to the same extent as if reproduced therein in full. Contact Architect for identification, if required. 1.08 Testing - Provide number and type indicated. Sample preparation or size as recommended by testing laboratory. Refer to Section 0140 - Quality Control for testing specifications. 1.09 Include List - It is the responsibility of the contractor to establish the extent of work required of each section in order to complete the product. However, on occasion a list is provided for the convenience of the contractor to expedite bidding. The list is not intended to be complete. 1.10 Do Not Include List - On occasion, and for the convenience of the contractor, a list of items included in other sections of the specifications, by others or the owner, is included. 1.11 standards of Quali - When manufacturers are mentioned in this paragraph, it shall mean that they have been judged to be able to equal the standard of quality of the manufacturers' products mentioned in the materials list of Part 2 - Products. If no manufacturer is listed in the materials list of Part 2, each of the manufacturers listed in 1.11 are acceptable to produce the product to its specified performance. The architect shall be the judge of which manufacturers' products are equal to those specified in Part 2. 1.12 Clean Up - During construction, clean up shall be "broom finish". For final clean up., see 0170-2.0. i . FIMM11415.•-• 0180-02 0190 - MISCELLANFOVS REQUIRE ENM 1.0 LAYOUT OF BUR DING: 1.1 The general contractor shall employ an experienced and competent civil engineer to establish a permanent benchmark to which easy access may be had during the progress of the work and to determine all lines and grades. Keep on the job at all times, a complete level and transit and keep same in good working condition to allow the architect unrestricted use of same at all times if desired. 2.0 BSI GLASS: 2.1 The general contractor is responsible for all damaged, broken, or scratched glass until final acceptance of the project, and at completion, he shall replace, at his own expense, all such glass. Glass broken or damaged by others will be replaced by the contractor and cost paid for by the responsible party. 3.0 WORK NOT IN CONTRACT: 3.1 Items indicated on the drawings as "NIC ", or noted "Not in Contract" are shown for convenience only and are not part of the contract. Work denoted as above may be done prior to, during, or later than the term of work for this contract. 3.2 Refer to Contract Documents to determine extent of work under this contract incidental to work denoted as above including, but not limited to, cutting, patching, fitting, and connecting. 3.3 The owner may undertake or award other contracts for additional work, and the contractor shall fully cooperate with such other contractors and owner's employees and carefully fit his own work to such additional work as may be directed by the architect. The contractor shall not commit or permit any act which will interfere with the performance of work by any other contractor or owner's employee. 3.4 Under no circumstances shall any work related to removal of asbestos be included in this contract. It shall be the responsibility of the owner to arrange for asbestos removal. It shall be expected that completion of the work, by the owner, will occur prior to the Contractor having access to any areas affected by asbestos removal. The Contractor shall coordinate with the owner when access shall be possible so as not to delay the work of this Contract. 4.0 CUTTING AND PATCHING: 4.1 Where new work abuts existing work to remain, and damage is incurred to the existing surfaces or objects, the contractor responsible shall restore the damaged surfaces to their original condition without expense to owner. 4.2 Any cutting that may be required shall be done by the individual trades requiring same, but cutting shall be done under the supervision of the Prime Contractor. All patching shall be the responsibility of the contractor performing the cutting. 4.3 Any new paths worn in the lawn areas outside the contract limits or defined construction area, by changed pedestrian traffic due to the construction barricades and fences, will be repaired by the owner after completion of the work. 0190 -01 • r r a• - a �r. rMi 5.0 SALVAGE OR REMCYVAL: 5.1 Materials from site not required for re -use or storage, shall become the property of the contractor and shall be removed promptly from site. The owner, however, shall have the right of first refusal of removed items. 5.2 Materials noted on the drawings to be reused, if applicable, shall be approved before incorporating in the work. Contract amount shall include cleaning, conditioning, and installing items or materials to be reused. 5.3 Materials indicated to be retained or stored for the owner shall be removed without damage and placed in the designated area noted on the drawings. Such area shall be properly protected to prevent dirt, damage, or markings of the area. 6.0 INTERRUPTION OF SERVICES 6.1 Utility services shall be interrupted only with the approval of the Architect and Owner and shall be coordinated with the owner's activities. 7.0 VISITATION OF SITE: 7.1 It shall be the responsibility of all contractors to visit the site and familiarize himself with existing conditions before attempting to formulate a bid. 8.0 DAMAGE TO EXISTING: 8.1 Each contractor shall be responsible for protection of existing surfaces, fixtures, hardware, ductwork, conduit, or any other items indicated in the Contract Documents to remain as existing or to be refinished or otherwise reused. Any damage which may occur to the above must be repaired and /or replaced to correct said damage, to the satisfaction of the architect. 9.0 CLARIFICATION OF DEFINITIONS: 9.1 The following definitions are provided for specification clarification: The Contractor - A Prime Contractor for the project. This Contractor, or this Subcontractor - The Subcontractor for a particular trade or type of work, as contracted to the Contractor. 10.0 10.1 Dimensions indicated on the drawings are based upon the original drawings for the existing buildings and /or typical dimensions taken in the field. Before ordering any material or doing any work, each contractor shall verify all measurements at the building and shall be responsible for the correctness of same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed due to differences between actual dimensions and the measurements indicated on the drawings; differences which are found, shall be submitted to the architect for consideration before proceeding with the work. 0190 -02 0190 - MISCELLANEOUS 11.0 SHOP DRAWD4GS: 11.1 The Contractor shall submit (1) reproducible transparency and (2.) print of drawings, and (6) copies of other data to the Architect for review. Shop drawings shall be submitted sufficiently in advance of construction of the product being reviewed to allow ample time for checking, correcting, resubmittal and rechecking. 11.2 All shop drawings must be reviewed by the Prime Contractor prior to sending to the Architect and shall bear the Contractor's stamp as evidence that they have been reviewed by, and consequently approved by, the Contractor. They must, be signed and stamped, with all corrections noted. Review by the architect is only for conformance with the design concept of the project and does not relieve the contractor of the responsibility of conforming with the Contract Documents. Any changes made in the dimensions or quantities are done only as an aid to the Contractor to indicate possible conflicts. The Contractor has final responsibility for dimensions and quantities, fabrications, techniques of construction and coordination of the work with all other trades. 0190-03 WIM V W-116i Do DON 1.0 GENERAL: 1.1 Soil investigation work for the building area involved in the work of this contract have been performed and are available for review and inspection at the office of the architect. The Bidders shall be responsible to familiarize themselves with the content of the Soil Investigation Report. END OF SECTION 0201 02019108 BHA10-89 0201-01 0211 - DEMOLITION REFERENCE: Refer to Section 0180 for explanation of abbreviated specification format. WN-lumm"Ralim 1.01 Scope - Provide and execute. 1.02 Alternate Bids - See 0110. 1.03 Unit Prices - Not applicable. 1.04 Shop Drawings - Not applicable. 1.05 Samples - Not applicable. 1.06 Guarantee - Per contract conditions. 1.07 Standards - Not applicable. 1.08 Testing - Not applicable. 1.09 Include List - As shown on drawings or as required to complete the Work: A. Concrete pool deck, as required. B. Concrete curbs and sidewalks, as required. C. Bituminous paving, as required. D. Cyclone fence. E. Storm drain system within construction limits, including catch basins and piping. Refer to Mechanical. 1.10 Do Not Include List Mechanical or electrical demolition. 1.11 Standards of Quality Not applicable. 1.12 Clean Up - Per contract conditions. TART 2 PRODUCTS: 2.01 Materials - All materials noted for demolition shall be removed in a neat and workmanlike manner so as to facilitate the new construction through simple and neat connection detail. PART 3 EXECUTION: 3.01 Demolition A. Items noted for retention shall be stored on the site in a manner which will protect them until reuse or turning over to owner is performed. B. The contractor shall examine the drawings and existing site condition to determine extent of demolition work required. C. Accomplish all demolition of existing construction as requij:ed for the accomplishment of work under the contract. Care shall be Laken to assure that the existing construction to remain in place is not damaged. D. Materials not required for reuse shall become the property of the contractor that removed them and shall be removed promptly from the site. The owner, however, shall have the right of first refusal. E. Materials noted on the drawings and/or specified or chosen for retention shall be removed by this contractor from the work area and delivered to a designated storage location at the building site. F. All structures to be removed shall be removed completely from the site, only after the owner has been consulted and has given his approval to the demolition schedule. 0211-01 0211 - DEMOLITION PART 3 EXMMON: (continued) 3.01 Demolition (continued) G. All existing concrete foundations, footings, curbs and paving shown to be removed, shall be removed completely from the site. All subsequent excavations of existing material shall be backfilled with suitable fill as required. END OF SECTION 0211 02119108 BHA10-89 0211-02 0220 - EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL REFERENCE: Refer_ to Section 0180 for explanation of abbreviated specification format. 1.01 Scope - Provide and install. 1.02 Alternate Bids - See 0110. 1.03 Unit Prices - See 1.17 Bidding, this section. 1.04 Shop Drawings - Not required. 1.05 Samples - Not required. 1.06 Guarantee - Per contract conditions. 1.07 Standards - See testing. 1.08 Testing A. The contractor shall employ and pay for an independent testing laboratory, approved by the architect, to make all tests required herein. 1. Maximum dry density at optimum moisture content in accordance with ASTM D 1557 for each type of soil to be used for- compacted fill. a. Provide 1 compaction test every 75' at all interior and exterior bearing walls. b. Provide 1 compaction test per 2500 sq. ft. under floor slabs. c. Provide 1 compaction test per 5000 sq. ft. under bituminous paving. B. If compaction is found to be unsatisfactory, this contractor shall have the laboratory make the necessary number number of extra in -place field dry density tests to determine the extent of re- compaction work required and shall perform whatever re- compaction is then necessary. 1.09 Include List - All excavation, backfill and engineered fill for buildings, slab base, bituminous paving removal, protection of excavation from freezing. 1.10 Do Not Include - Bituminous base. 1.11 Standard of Quality - See testing. 1.12 Clean Up - Per contract conditions. 1.13 Site Visitation - This contractor shall visit the site to determine the existing conditions under which he will be obliged to operate and the extent of the site preparation work in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. 1.14 Existing Service Lines and Utility Structures A. Existing service lines and utilities, which are to remain in service, shall be protected from damage, and supported if necessary. When such service lines or utilities are not shown on the drawings are encountered within excavated areas, notify the architect. Contract amount shall be adjusted for additional work. (However, verify location of existing utility lines as noted on drawings.) 1.15 Soil Investigation - Section 0201. 1.16 Bidding Base Bid - Bid as per drawings assuming a soil bearing capacity of 2000 # /SF. 0220 -01 0220 - EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 2.01 Materials - Fill material shall be obtained from excavations on the site, provided this material meets the following requirements and is approved. Additional fill material, if required, shall be obtained from borrow pits off the site approved by the architect. All fill material shall be free of organic or frozen material, debris or stones having a diameter larger than 6 ". A. Compacted Fill Supporting Footings shall be well graded material, such as sand or gravel, tested and approved by the testing laboratory. B. Compacted Fill Supporting Exterior and Interior Building Sla shall be granular material, friable earth or clays of low plasticity tested by the testing laboratory and approved by the architect. The native sandy soils, type SP can be used for this fill. C. Compacted Fill Against Exterior Face of Foundation and areas of general grading shall be suitable fill as found on site. 3.01 Clearing A. Clear all areas as required for new work. B. Before removing topsoil, scrape or rake area to remove roots, loose materials, rocks, and weeds. Debris, stones larger than four inches, or excessive amounts of subsoil not permitted in stripped topsoil. Follow recommended excavation criteria as called out in Soils Engineering Report. See Soils Report, Section 0201. C. Remove topsoil to its entire depth in spaces indicating grading changes, storage areas, and spaces to have structures, drives, walks and paving. D. Store topsoil on site in neat piles. 3.02 Excavating A. Excavate within building area, and beyond for working space, to depths required. Prepare surface level to within one inch elevations indicated. B. Excavation shall be sufficiently made so that all footings bear on virgin soil. If the contractor is in doubt of bearing capacity of the soil at the bottom of the footings or other work, he shall ask the architect for further instruction. Failing to do so he shall be responsible for any damage due to settlement. C. Excavate to a minimum of six inches below bottoms of slabs, minimum of six inches below finish grade for planting and lawn, and to bottom of sub -grade for paved area. D. Provide lights and barricades around all excavations as may be required by all laws or ordinances or consideration of general safety. E. Control the grading in vicinity of excavated areas so as to prevent water from running into or standing in excavated areas or damaging other structures. 0220 -02 0220 - EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL PART 3 EXECMION: (continued) 3.02 Excavating (continued) F. Provide all labor and equipment to maintain dry conditions in excavation at all times until backfilling is completed or permanent drainage is in operation. G. All footing, building slab, and paved area subgrades shall be approved by the architect. H. Unauthorized Excavation - If approved subgrade is encountered at the elevations shown on the drawings and the contractor excavates to a greater depth, the architect may direct the contractor to extend the footings and foundation walls or piers to the lower elevation, or place properly placed and tested compacted granular fill to the specified elevations without additional payment. I. Authorized Additional Excavation - If approved subgrade is not encountered at the elevations shown on the drawings, the architect may direct the contractor to excavate to a greater depth and ba.ckfill with properly placed and tested compacted fill. Payment for such additional work shall be in accordance with the established unit prices of the contract. J. All excess excavated material not needed or suitable for fill, is to be removed from site. - K. All rocks of more than 6" in diameter are to be removed from site in same manner as of above. Larger boulders of 4' in diameter and larger will be retained and used by owner for landscaping. 3.03 Filling and Compacting A. Remove debris from excavations before backfilling, and backfill both sides of foundation wall at the same time. B. Grades shall be uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are given or between such points and existing grades. Abrupt changes in slopes shall be rounded. C. Place compacted fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 8" in thickness. Placement shall start in the deepest area and progress approximately parallel to the finished grade. D. No compacted fill material shall be placed in free water, or frozen ground, or on surfaces which have not been tested and approved by the architect. E. Soils shall be undisturbed below bottom of footing grade. A large vibratory roller shall be used to surface compact the upper 2 feet of soil below bottom of footing grade to 98% Standard Proctor density (ASTM D- 698 -78). Compact fill under building slabs to 95% of Standard Proctor density. Against exterior walls to 90% Standard Proctor density. Under bituminous paving to 95% of Standard Proctor density. F. Perform the tests specified as directed by the architect and obtain the architect's approval before proceeding with the next layer is started. 0220 -03 0220 - EXCAVATION AND BACEFILL PART 3 EXECUTION: (continued) 3.03 Filling and Compacting (continued) G. Do not compact material when the moisture varies more than 2% from the optimum moisture content. A uniform moisture content will be required throughout the layers of fill material. Wetting or drying manipulation shall be required if necessary to accomplish this. Suspend compaction operations when, in the architect's opinion, satisfactory results cannot be obtained because of rain or other unsatisfactory conditions. 3.04 Site Grading A. Do all cutting, filling, compaction of fills and rough grading required to bring the entire project area, outside of buildings to subgrade before any other work begins. 1. For surfaced areas such as lawn, roadways, parking areas, service courts, steps and walks to underside of the respective surfacing or base course, as fixed by the finished grades therefore. B. Finish rough grading to that ordinarily obtainable by use of bladegrader or scraper. C. Slope rough graded surfaces to drain surface water away from excavations and structures, minimum slope one inch in four feet. D. Any settlement or washing that occurs prior to acceptance of the work, shall be repaired, and grades re- established to the required elevations and slopes. E. Fill to required subgrade levels any areas where settlement occurs. Where subgrade for paving abuts existing paved areas, provide and maintain tapered fill of gravel or other suitable material. 3.05 Base Fill A. Immediately below slabs on grade, furnish and place a 6" clean granular fill. B. Roll and compact base fill. 3.06 In all cases, follow recommendations of Soils Engineering Foundation investigation. Any discrepancy between Soils Engineering Report and architect excavation and backfill specification shall be brought to the attention of the architect prior to the work in question being done. END OF SECTION 0220 1 1. 1: • . 0220 -04 0280 - LANDSCAPING REFERENCE: Refer to Section 0180 for explanation of abbreviated specification form. WMA 1.01 Scope - Provide and install. 1.02 Alternate Bids - See 0110. 1.03 Unit Prices - Not required. 1.04 Shop Drawings - Not required. 1.05 Samples - Not required. 1.06 Guarantee - Required until end of maintenance period. 1.07 Standards - AAM. 1.08 Testing - Not required. 1.09 Include List - Sodding and final smoothing of topsoil, planting of shrubs, trees, and rock border around buildings. 1.10 Do Not Include List - Preparation of subgrade, spreading of topsoil. 1.11 Standards of Quality - Not applicable. 1.12 Clean Up - Per contract conditions. ... ••,iI 2.01 Materials A. Topsoil is furnished and installed under 0220. B. Fertilizer, certified commercial containing 10 -6 -4 (Nitrogen- Phosphate - Potash). 2.02 Sod. A. Sod shall be nursery quality, free of noxious grasses and weeds, such as, but not limited to quack grass, crab grass, etc., and shall have dense growth, be well rooted, with at least 70% Kentucky Bluegrass. Submit source of sod and sod description to architect for approval. Sod shall be a minimum of 18" wide by 24" long, with not less than 1 1/2" to 3/4" soil on the roots. 3.01 Sod A. Lawn areas constructed in spring after April 25 shall be covered with a 1" loose layer of clean wheat or oat straw. Straw shall be kept wet until a catch of grass is established. After which this contractor shall remove loose straw from site. 3.02 Watering A. Water grass as necessary to maintain healthy plants. All areas not maintained properly must be replaced by contractor. All watering should be done in the afternoon or at night. The surface layer of soil must be kept damp by frequent light watering with a fine _spray during the germination period after seeding or vegetative planting and until the young plants are rooted firmly. 0280 -01 0280 IANDSCAP PART 3 EXECUTION: (continued) 3.03 Maintenance Period A. Maintain seeded lawn for a minimum period of 60 days after substantial completion or date of lawn completion, whichever is longer, by watering, weeding, and mowing. After this period, lawn will be maintained by owner. 3.04 Clean Up A. Upon completion of all construction, this subcontractor shall clean up any debris, stones, etc., from planted and paved areas, in a neat and acceptable condition meeting the approval of the architect. END OF SECTION 0280 1 :1• it C# 1 1 0320 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT REFERENCE: Refer to Section 0180 for explanation of abbreviated specification format. 1.01 Soo - Provide and install. 1.02 Alternate Bids - See 0110. 1.03 Unit Prices - Not applicable. 1.04 Shop Drawings - Required. 1.05 Samples - Not required. 1.06 Guarantee - Per contract condition. 1.07 Standards - ACI 318-71, ACI 315-65, CRSI, ACI 301-66. 1.08 Testing - Not required. 1.09 Include List A. Welded wire fabric in all exterior slabs and walks. B. Reinforcing bars in concrete. C. Reinforcing bars in masonry. 1.10 Do Not Include List - Not applicable. 1.11 Clean Up - Per contra conditions. 1.12 Clarification - All relative notes on structural drawings shall have precedence over this section. a , 4 & I • 2.01 Materials A. Reinforcing bars: New billet - steel bars, ASTM A615, Grade 60 (except grade 40 for ties), domestic manufacturer. B. Welded wire fabric: ASTM A185 of wire gauge and mesh size a shown on the drawings or required. Domestic manufacturer. C. Accessories: Properly sized chairs, spacers, boltsters, etc. Provide plasti-coated accessories at slabs and beam that are exposed below. 2.02 Miscellaneous Fabrication A. All bars over #2 size shall be deformed bars. B. Where reinforcing bars are continuous, lap bars 24 diameters at splices unless otherwise shown. Non-continuous ends of top bars in beams and slabs shall terminate in a standard hook unless otherwise shown. C. Furnish temperature steel for all concrete slabs in accordance with ACI code, unless otherwise shown. D. All bars with hooks and/or 90 degree bends shall be bent to a radius as prescribed by ACI 318-71. Provide comer bars at all comers and intersections. 0320-01 KEENER 3.01 Placing A. Place, support, and tie reinforcing to prevent displacement. Reinforcing shall be cleaned of oil, grease, scale, rust or other coatings which will impair the bond. B. Reinforcing shall not be welded nor shall accessories of any kind be welded to reinforcing bars, unless approved by the architect. C. Bar supports or legs only which came in contact with forms for concrete exposed to view in the finished structure shall have plastic coated legs or shall be made of plastic. All bars shall be tied to prevent displacement during concreting. D. Welded wire fabric shall be lapped not less than the spacing of the cross wires plus two inches. 3.02 Bond Beam & Masonry Lintel Reinforcing A. Provide two No. 5 bars, unless otherwise noted, set on chairs complete with corner bars as required. B. In general, lintels in non-bearing walls at openings up to 5'-4" wide shall be reinforced masonry lintels with a minimum of 8" bearing at each end and reinforced with two #5 bars. END OF SECTION 0320 a=- � 1 0320-02 0330 - CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE REFERENCE: Refer to Section 0180 for explanation of abbreviated specification format. 1.01 Scope - Provide and install. 1.02 Alternate Bids - See 0110. 1.03 Unit Price - None. 1.04 Shop Drawings - None. 1.05 Samples - Not required. 1.06 Guarantee - ACI 301-66 and ACI 302-69. The following portion of this Section 0330 contains requirements and information related to the above standards. In case of conflict between the above standards and this section, the requirements stated herein shall govern. 1.08 Testing - Required. 1 compression test for each days pour. 1.09 Do Not Include List - Granular basefill and epoxy flooring.. 1.10 Include List A. Setting anchor bolts, setting plates, or other steel members embedded in concrete as indicated on architectural drawings. B. Grouting, including base plates, etc. C. Concrete footing, flooring, aprons, benches and counters, and 6" curbs for lockers. D. Floor vapor barrier. E. Installation of reinforcing. F. Formwork. G. Floor safe. 1.11 Weather Protection - Provide adequate protection from weather, �o facilitate continued construction project. 1.12 Coordination - Coordinate activity with other trades to provide containment of all items required by the project documents such as handicap showers and floor tile. 1.13 Clean Up - Required. 1.14 Structural Clarification - All relative notes on structural drawings shall have precedence over this section. PART 2 PRODUCTS: 2.01 Materials - Materials must conform to the following specifications: A. Portland Cement - ASTM C150-71. B. Air Entraining Admixtures - ASTM C-260. C. Aggregate - ASTM D-98. 1. Coarse aggregate shall be size 467 (1 1/2" max. size) for footings and slabs on grade of 6" or greater thickness. 2. Coarse aggregate shall be size 1 (3/4" max. size) for all other concrete except as otherwise noted. 3. Coarse aggregate at topping - 1/2" max. size. 4. Exposed aggregate - 3/8" to 3/4" smooth round stone. No crushed stone allowed. Do not use aggregate containing any iron. D. Water - Clean, fresh, and potable. 0330-01 0330 - CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PART 2 PRODUCTS: (continued) 2.01 Materials (continued E. Premolded expansion joint filler - 1/2" x slab depth, Homex 300. F. Curing Compound - ASTM C309-58, Type 11, 100% resin-based, with fugitive dye. Use compound with white dye in hot, dry weather. (Exterior walks and curbs only.) G. Shrinkage Compensating Portland Cement - (Chem-Comp.) Penn-Dixie or approved equal. H. Non-shrink grout - "5-Star", "Por-Rok". T. Vapor Barrier - 4 mil polyethelene. J. Forms 1. Not exposed to view - wool 3/4" No. 2 common lumber or panel forms. 2. Exposed interior non-finished surfaces - moisture resistanL plywood, 5/8" minimum, large sheets with inconspicuous joints. 3. Exposed finished surfaces and exposed exterior - moisture resistant plastic coated plywood, 5/8" minimum, large sheets with inconspicuous joints. 4. Stoop formwork that remains in place shall be of uril-reated plywood and lumber, such as; Spruce, Pine or other white woo is to facilitate fast deterioration. K. Sealer - Sonneborn "Kure -n-Seal" or approved equal. L. Concrete patching - Tamms Floorstone or Floorstone/Lastex. Install with Tamms FCP Liquid Bond. M. Floor Safe - Rectangular floor safe, AMSEC 'Model 6131500, distributed by Armor Security Co., Minneapolis., to be installed in Manager's Office (12-3/4" x 14-1/2" x 10-3/4"). 2.02 Proportioning A. Concrete shall be working stress type, normal weight, of strengths as shown on structural drawings. B. All exterior concrete shall be air entrained concrete. The ail content shall be as follows for the maximum size coarse aggregate used: 5% to 8% for 3/4" coarse aggregate 4% to 7% for I" coarse aggregate 3% to 6% for 1 1/2" coarse aggregate C. High early strength concrete is not required, but may be used pending approval. D. Tests shall yield an average minimum 28 day strength 15% greater than required. E. Concrete with horizontal average minimum 28 day strength 15% greater than required. F. Concrete with horizontal surfaces exposed to weather shall have a minimum cement content in legs per cubic - yard of 6 for no plasticizing admixture and 5 1/2 with plasticizing admixture. Maximum water shall be six gallons per bag. G. Slump shall be within the following limits: Vertical surfaces - 5" maximum, 3" minimum Slabs - 4" maximum, 2" minimum H. Exposed aggregate concrete shall contain 2 fl, oz. per 100 lb. of cement of Plastiment Retarding Densifier by Sika or equal and be air entrained to 3% to 6%. I. Precast topping - 3,000 psi. 0330-02 0330 - CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE a . * 3.01 Mixing - Batch mixing at site will not be allowed unless approval is obtained. Approval must be obtained from architect. 3.02 Flatwork A. All slabs-on-grade (interior and exterior) shall be placed over a base fill specified in Section 0220, compacted and dampened (but not wet) just prior to placing concrete. B. Construction joints shall conform to Section 704 of ACI 318 and shall not exceed the following maximum spacings: 1. Slabs on grade without intermediate control joints - maximum spacing 30'-0". (Locate joints under partitions) 2. Slabs on grade with intermediate control joints - no limit. C. Control joints - shall not exceed the following maximum spacings: 1. Slabs on grade - 25' with maximum area bound by control joints of 625 sq.ft. D. Depths of control joints shall be as shown on drawings. E. Expansion joints - (Slab-on-grade) shall be provided at all locations indicated on drawings, at walls, steps, where shown, and where new work adjoins exterior walls, slabs, and bituminous surfaces. 60'-0" on center maximum at exterior walks F. Unless otherwise shown, all slabs on grade shall be G" thick. G. Except as otherwise noted, slabs shall have a minimum of three steel trowelings, an approved power disc float machine or rollers not over 24" long and weighing not less than 200 pounds may be used as directed by architect. Slabs to be smooth finish with no variations. H. Concrete benches and counters may be pre-cast or poured subject to approval of the Architect. 3.03 Bar Clearance - Clearance between reinforcing and earth or forms shall be as follows: Footings 3" Slabs (structural) 3/4" BeLuns & Columns (stirrups or ties) 1 1/2" Slabs on grade - approximate center of slab 3.04 Curing A. All horizontal interior slab surfaces shall receive curing/sealing compound as specified. B. In cold weather, (below 40 degrees F) the materials, including forms, shall have been heated to between 70 degrees and 80 degrees before depositing and a heated enclosure provided, with temperature maintained within enclosures of 70 degrees F. for 2 days or 50 degrees F. for 5 days. 3.05 Finishes A. Unless otherwise noted, slabs shall be light broom finish. Counters and benches shall be smooth or rubbed finish. 3.06 Tolerances A. Class A tolerances shall be: 1. 1/16" above or below the line in 10"0". 2. 1/32" above or below the line in W-O". 0330-03 0330 - CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PART 3 EXECUTION: (continued) 3.07 Vapor Barrier A. Install under all interior slabs. END OF SECTION 0330 03309108 BHA10 -89 0330 -04 0401 - MASONRY CONSTRUCTION REFERENCE: Refer to Section 0180 for explanation of abbreviated specification format. �1 Us 1.01 Scon - Provide and install. 1.02 Alternate Bids - See 0110. 1.03 Unit Price - None. 1.04 Shop Drawings - None. 1.05 Samples - None 1.06 Guarantee - Per contract condition. 1.0 Standards - ASTTM, NCMA. SCPI. 1.08 Testing - Not required. 1.09 Include List A. Cold weather protection as required. B. Joint reinforcing. C. Installation of embedded items such as steel reinforcing, well plates, and anchors. D. Concrete for bond beams in accordance with Section 0320 and 0330. F. Loose lintel installation. F. Brick veneer ties. 1.10 Do Not Include List A. Sealant. 1.11 Standards of Qualit - Not applicable. 1.12 Clean Up - Per contract conditions. 1.13 Environmental Conditions A. Provide for heating and protecting in cold weather. Do not use frozen or ice-covered materials. B. Do not lay masonry when temperature is expected to fall below 35 degrees F. Provide ample enclosures and heat for continuatiori of work without interruptions from weather except for days of rain and high winds. Keep masonry moist in hot weather, until mortar has cured. C. Cover tops of walls at end of day's work. Protect finished concrete blockwork from damage. D. Conform to the recommended hot and cold weather masonry practices of the Structural Clay Products Institute. 1.14 Scaffolding - This contractor shall furnish, maintain, and move as required all scaffolding he may require for the installation of his work. 1.15 Codes - Meet requirements of U.B.C. 1.16 Structural Clarification - All relative notes on structural shall have precedence over this section. PART 2 PRODUCTS: 2.01 Materials A. Hollow load-bearing stone aggregate concrete block AST'l C-90-70 grade N, Type I of approved manufacturer, cured 30 (lays before delivery. B. Face Brick Allowance - Brick shall be 3-5/8" x 3-5/8" x 11-5/8" with an allowance of $650.00/1000 F.O.B. jobsite. Basic brick color shall match existing Concession Building. C. Portland Cement: ASTM C-150, Type 1. 0401-01 0401 - MASONRY CONSTRUCTION PART 2 PRODUCTS: (continued) D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C -91, Type M or N. E. Hydrated Lime ASTM -207, Type S or Type N, double hydrated. F. Sand; ASTM C- 144 -70, natural, 100% sieve, 5" (min.) retained on #16 sieve, 30% (max.) pass 450 sieve. G. Water: Free from matter that could impair suitability for use in mortar. H. Cleaning Agent: Sure -Kleen or approved equal, type of cleaner to be approved by architect. I. Concrete Corefill: 1 Portland, 2 1/2" fine sand, 2 pea gravel. J. Non- shrink Grout: "5- Star ", "Por -Rok ", or approved equal. K. Control Joint Strip: Carter Waters Regular Block Joint, Dur -O -Wall Rapid Control Joint - Regular, A -A Wire Products Co. Tite -Wall, Hohmann & Bernard Type QSB -4, Vinylex Regular, or approved equal. L. Bituminous plastic cement: conforming to Federal Spec. SS- C- 153C., Type 1. M. Joint reinforcing: See structural notes. N. Control joint strip: Carters Waters Regular Block Joint, Dur -o -Wall Rapids Control Joint - Regular, A -A Wire Products Co. Tite -Wall, Hohmann & Bernard QSB -4, Vinylex Regular, or approved equal. 0. Brick veneer ties - P. Exterior masonry walls should be filled with poured styrofoam beads, masonry fill insulation. 2.02 Mortar Measurement and Mixing A. All mortar shall be mixed utilizing masonry cement of the appropriate strength. Masonry cement shall be mixed as recommended by the manufacturer for the mortar type. B. Measurement of materials: The method of measuring materials for the mortar used shall be by either volume or weight, and such that the specified preparations can be controlled and accurately maintained. Measurement of sand by shovel will not be permitted. C. Mixing mortars: All cementitious material shall be. mixed for at least 3 minutes and not more than 5 minutes in a mechanical batch mixer with the maximum amount of water to produce a workable consistency. D. Retempering: Mortars that have stiffened because of evaporation of water from the mortar shall be retempered by adding water as frequently as needed to restore the required workable consistency. Mortars shall be used and placed in final position within 2 1/2 hours after initial mixing. E. Colored mortar to be job mixed. Follow manufacturers instructions completely when adding pigments to mortar. 2.03 Use of Mortar Types A. Type M Mortar - shall be used for all masonry, below. B. Type N Mortar - shall be used for all other masonry. 3.01 Laying Block A. Lay block plumb, level, or true to a line. B. Finish flush joints that will not remain exposed. Use concave tooled joints for work that will remain exposed. Tool vertical joints first. Use joints approximately 3/8" wide. 0401 -02 0401 - MASONRY CONSTRUCTION PART 3 EXECUTION: (continued) 3.01 Laying Block (continued) C. Dampen block and concrete brick on mortar faces only, in hot weather, immediately before laying. Lay block without units carrying surface water. D. Lay hollow block in full mortar bed on shell surface and at ends. Lay concrete brick and solid block in full mortar bed with head and edge joints completely filled. E. Block work shall be running bond unless otherwise noted. F. Provide reinforced concrete block lintels at all door, window, and duct openings where other lintels are not provided. G. Furnish solids and special shapes at jambs and corners. Make all cuts with a.masonry saw. No broken units shall be exposed in finish work. H. At control joints, insert control joint strip and premolded joint fillers to provide a 3/4" deep rake joint on both sides of wall for other's sealant. I. Fill void of bond beam and reinforced lintels with 3,000 psi concrete unless noted otherwise, mixed according to Section 0330, which shall apply to this section by reference. J. Install joint reinforcing and ties at spacings shown on structural drawings for the various wall constructions. All ties and reinforcing shall be embedded fully in mortar. K. Install all embedded items required by the drawings and specifications. L. Control joint where shown on exterior elevations. 3.02 Laving Brick A. General: Do not install cracked, broken, or chipped masonry units exceeding ASTM allowances. 1. Use masonry saws to cut and fit exposed units. 2. Lay brick plumb, true to line, and with level courses accurately spaced within allowable tolerances. 3. Do not furrow bed joints. 4. Stop off horizontal run by racking back in each course; toothing is not permitted. 5. Adjust units to final position while mortar is soft and plastic. 6. If units are displaced after mortar has stiffened, remove, clean joints and units of mortar, and relay with fresh mortar. 7. When joining fresh masonry to set or partially set masonry: a. Remove loose brick and mortar. b. Clean and lightly wet exposed surface of set masonry prior to laying fresh masonry. 8. All brick work to be laid with running bond. 9. NOT USED. 10. Dampen brick, in hot weather, immediately before laying. Do not use brick carrying surface water. 11. Block back -up shall be laid simultaneously with the brick facing. 12. Lay out courses to minimize cutting and to avoid jumping bond. 13. Install accessories, and built -in items, as work progresses. Install loose lintels in full bed of mortar. Fill voids of metal frames with mortar. 0401 -03 0401 - MASONRY CONSTRUCTION PART 3 EXEQITION: (continued) 3.02 Laying Brick (continued) A. (continued) 14. Keep cavity walls clean. Slightly bevel mortar bed to incline toward cavity. 15. Install joint reinforcing and wall ties at spacings previously indicated in specifications. 16. The interior surface of single wythe masonry mortar shall be cleaned as required. a. Protection of work 1. Protect sills, ledges, and offsets from mortar drippings or other damage during construction. 2. Remove misplaced mortar or grout immediately. 3. Protect face materials against staining. 4. Protect the door jambs and corners from damage during construction. b. Mortar beds 1. Lay brick with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical joints in all courses. 2. Provide sufficient mortar on ends of brick to fill head joints. 3. Rock closures into place with head joints thrown against two adjacent bricks in place. 4. Do not pound corners or jambs to fit stretcher units after setting in place. 5. Where adjustments to corners or jambs must be made after mortar has started to set, remove mortar and replace with fresh mortar. c. Mortar joints 1. Nominal thickness: 3/8" 2. Construct uniform joints. 3. Shove vertical joints tight. 4. Tool concave joints in exposed surfaces when thumbprint hard using jointing tool. 5. Flush cut all joints not tooled. 3.03 Reinforcing, Fill, and Bearing A. Place specified masonry reinforcing in all block. Embed reinforcing completely in mortar, lap eight inches minimum. B. Reinforcing for bond beams to be provided by others, but installed by this contractor. Fill bond beams and vertical reinforce block cores with not less than 3,000 PSI concrete. Meet applicable requirements specified for concrete work. C. When steel lintels are not detailed, use masonry lintels. For masonry lintels, use block bond beam with 3,000 PSI concrete and reinforced as indicated. Case and cure lintels as specified for lintels with not less than two No. 5 bars. 3.04 Pointing and Cleaning A. Cut out defective joints and holes in exposed masonry and repoint with mortar. B. Dry brush masonry surface after mortar has set at end of each day's work and after final pointing. 0401 -04 0401 - MASONRY CONSTRUCTION PART 3 EXECUTION: (continued) 3.04 Pointing and Cleaning (continued) C. Apply cleaning agent to sample wall area of 20 sq.ft. (sq.m) in location acceptable to the architect /engineer, if cleaning by water does not produce satisfactory results. 1. Do not proceed with cleaning until sample area is acceptable to architect /engineer. 2. Follow manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Thoroughly wet surface of masonry on which no green efflorescence appears before using cleaning agent. 3.04 Pointing and Cleaning (continued) C. 4. Scrub with acceptable cleaning agent. 5. Immediately rinse with clear water. 6. Work small sections at a time. 7. Work from top to bottom. 8. Protect sash, metal lintels, and other materials which may corrode when masonry is cleaned with acid solution. D. Leave work area and surrounding surfaces clean and free of mortar spots, droppings, and broken masonry. END OF SECTION 0401 04019108 BHA10 -89 0401 -05 0510 - STRUCTURAL STEEL REFERENCE: Refer to Section 0180 for explanation of abbreviated specification format. 1.01 Scope - Provide and install. 1.02 Alternate Bids - See 0110. 1.03 Unit Prices - None. 1.04 Shop Drawings - Required. 1.05 Samples - None. 1.06 Guarantee - Per contract conditions. 1.07 Standards - AISC, AWS. 1.08 Testing - Not required. 1.09 Do Not Include List - Grouting under plates or setting of plates, loose steel angles for brick lintel. 1.10 Include List - A. Anchor bolts, installed by 0330 or 0401. B. Setting plates and bearing plates. C. Beams, columns, base plates and other items shown on drawings. 1.11 Structural Clarification - All relative notes on structural drawings shall have precedence over this section. 0, 1 Wit I 2.01 Materials A. Structural Steel: Beams and angles - ASTM A36; Pipes - ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B ; Tubes - ASTM A500, Grade B. B. Bolts: ASTM A325. C. Primer: Federal Specifications TT- P -86a, Type II or approved equal. D. Welding Electrodes: ASTM A223 E70xx. 2.02 Fabrication A. All wall bearing beams shall have wall anchors, except as otherwise shown, and stud anchor bolts as shown for all blocking. B. Beam connection according to Uniform Load constants as given in the AISC manual unless noted on drawings or reactions are noted on the drawings in which case such reactions shall be provided -for. Shop connections may be welded or bolted. C. Standard welded framed beam connections of equal value that conform to the AISC Manual may be substituted for riveted or bolted connections, subject to approval. All bolts shall be 3/4" diameter bolts. D. Punch or drill for temporary field connections and for attachments of work by other trades. E. Where indicated on the drawings, A -325 bolts shall be used for field connections. Two bolts minimum. F. All steel shall be thoroughly cleaned, all rust and mill scale removed and shall receive one shop coat of paint, except areas within 2" of field welds. Unpainted areas left to preserve shop marks will not be permitted. 0510 -01 0510 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 2 PRODUCTS: (continued) 2.02 Fabrication (continued) G. Access to places where materials for this contract are being fabricated or produced shall be provided to the architect for the purpose of inspection. H. Substitutions of sections or modifications of details shall be made only when approved, and at no additional cost to the owner. I. All beam web copes shall be made to a radius of 1" (minimum). PART 3 EXECMON 3.01 Erection A. The contractor shall be responsible for the accurate setting and leveling of all bearing plates and setting plates. Bearing and setting plates shall be leveled on steel wedges or shims or as otherwise detailed and then grouted in place. B. Flame cutting of steel on site not permitted except with specific approval. C. This contractor alone shall be responsible for the correct fitting of all structural members and for elevation and alignment of the finished structure. D. Steel to be encased in concrete shall not be painted. All interior exposed steel shall receive one field coat of paint when noted on the drawings. E. All lintels bearing on masonry shall have a minimum of 8" bearing at each end, with a minimum of three courses of brick or concrete filled concrete block two courses high and 16" in length under bearing ends, unless otherwise noted on drawings or details. F. All welding shall be as required by code and appropriate standards and done by qualified welder. Recently certified by A.W.S. 3.02 Cleaning A. Remove soil, stain, and extraneous materials caused by structural steel work, from adjacent surfaces. B. Remove foreign matter and clean structural steel to satisfactory conditions to receive specified finish. C. Remove and replace items that cannot be satisfactorily cleaned. 3.03 Painting A. All items shall be painted on shop coat of paint as herein specified. Furnish to job a sufficient quantity of the same paint for field touch -up of field welds, abrasions, etc. 0510 -02 0550 - MISCELLANEOUS METALS REFERENCE: Refer to Section 0180 for explanation of abbreviated specification format. .. • .4 flD 1.01 Sco pe - Provide. 1.02 Alternate Bids - See 0110. 1.03 Unit Prices - None required. 1.04 Shop Drawings - Required. 1.05 Samples- None required. 1.06 Guarantee - Per contract conditions. 1.07 Standards - AISC, AWS. 1.08 Testing - None required. 1.09 Include List - A. Anchors and inserts related to this section. B. Loose lintels installed by 0401. C. Clip angles. D. Standard steel pipe railings. 1.10 Do Not Include List 1.11 Standards of Qualit - Not applicable. 1.12 Clean up - Per contract conditions. j•lu % 2.01 Materials A. Steel - All steel shall be ASTM A36 steel unless otherwise noted on the drawings. B. Galvanized steel - ASTM A446-69 and latest standards of American Hot Galvanizers Association. C. Bolts - ASTM A307, latest edition. D. Paint - Federal Specification TT-P-86a, Type II, or approved equal. E. Welding electrodes - ASTM A223E 70xx. 2.02 Fabrication A. Fabricate all items in accordance with the drawings and specifications and approved shop drawings. B. All metal shall be thoroughly cleaned, all rust and scale removed, and shall receive one shop coat of specified paint. 3.01 Erection - All miscellaneous metal shall be neatly and accurately set as shown on the drawings. 0610 - ROUGH CARPENTRY REFERENCE: Refer to Section 0180 for explanation of abbreviated specification format. 9-A .14 M Wei 1.01 Scope - Provide and install. 1.02 Alternate Bids - See 0110. 1.03 Unit Prices - None. 1.04 Shop Drawings - None required. 1.05 Samples None. 1.06 Guarantee - Per contract conditions. 1.07 Standards and Codes A. Lumber grading rules and wood species to be in conformance with Voluntary Product Standard PS 20-70 grading rules of the following associations apply to materials furnished under this section. 1. Northeastern Lumber Manufacturer's Associati6n, Inc. (NELKA) 2. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB) 3. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB) 4. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA) 5. Redwood Inspection Service (RIS) 6. Northern Hardwood and Pine Manufacturer's Association (NTII7- B. Plywood Grading Rules 1. Softwood Plywood - Construction and Industrial: Product Standard PS 1-66. 2. Hardwood Plywood - Product Standard PS 51-71. C. Grade Marks - Identify all lumber and plywood by official grade mark. 1. Lumber - grade stamp to contain symbol of grading agency; mill number or name; grade or lumber; species or species grouping or combination designation; rules under which graded, if applicable; and condition of seasoning at time of manufacture, a. S-MMN: - Unseasoned— b. S-Dry: Maximum of 19% moisture content. c. MC-15 or XD: Maximum of 15% moisture content. d. Dense. 2. Softwood Plywood: Appropriate grade trademark of the Plywood Association. a. Type, grade, class, and identification index. b. Inspection and testing agency mark. 3. Hardwood Plywood: Appropriate grade mark of inspection, testing, or grading. D. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Span tables: National Forest Products Association 2. Working stresses: Softwood Lumber, National Specification, National Forest Products Association. 1.08 Testing - None. 1.09 Do Not Include - not applicable. 1-10 Include List A. Blocking and bracing. B. Roof curbs not provided by mechanical. C. Roof blocking. D. Wood deck. E. Plastic laminate cabinet and countertop. -American qualified Design 0610-01 0610 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL: (continued) 1.11 Clean Up - Required. 1.12 Structural Clarification - All relative notes on structural drawings shall have precedence over this section. PART 2 PRODUCTS: 2. Lumber A. Dimensions 1. Specified lumber dimensions are nominal. 2. Actual dimensions conform to industry standards established by the American Lumber Standards Conuilittee and the Rules Wri ting Agencies. B. Moisture content: Unseasoned or 19% maximum at time of permanent closing in of building ; or structure, for lumber 2 inch or less nominal thickness. C. Surfacing: Surface four sides (S4S), unless specified otherwise. D. Framing lumber: See structural notes. Hem-Fir. No. 2 or better. 2.02 Wood Blocking and Plates in contact with Concrete or Masonry: sh�. be wolmanized lumber C.C.A. preservative and having a retention of preservative of .40 lbs. per cubic foot of wood or equal. 2.03 Roof Blocking: shall be wolmanized lumber C.C.A. preservative and having a retention of preservative of .40 Ibs. per cubic foot of wo,')d or equal. 2.04 Rough Hardware: All exterior hardirare galvanized or cadmium plated. A. Bolts: (Anchor bolts) 1. FS FF-B-575 C. 2. FS FF-B-584 D. B. Nuts: FS FF-N-836 C. C. Expansion shields: FS FF-B 561 C. D. Lag screws and bolts: FS FF-B-561C. E. Toggle bolts: FS FF-B-588C. F. Wood screws: FS FF-S-111C. G. Nails and staples: FS FF-N-105B. exposed to weather shall be 2.05 Metal Framing Accessories: A. Strap Anchors 16 ga. -galvanized. B. Framing Angles 18 ga. galvanized. 2.06 Roof Deck: Shall be 2" x 6" nominal tongue and groove solid wood decking, #2 and better SPF. Place random controlled lay-up. 2.07 Roof Sheathing (Equipment Building): Shall be 5/8" C-D exterior plywood. APA rated panels 30/12. 2.08 Plastic Laminate Cabinet: Shall be custom built in accordance t,;itla AWI standards 400 casework with high pressure laminate finish. All exposed surfaces shall be'1/32" plastic laminate. Provide inside backer sheet. 0610-02 0610 - ROUGH CARPENTRY 3.01 Conditions of Surfaces - Verify that surfaces to receive rough carpentry materials are prepared to exact grade and dimension. 3.02 Roof Blocking - shall be reviewed with the roofing contractor Lind shall be installed to the requirements of his standard specifications and guarantee and at a minimum shall be firmly anchored to deck or perimeter so as to resist a lateral force of '15 pounds per lineal foot. END OF SECTION 0610 06109108 BHA10-89 0610-03 0619 - WOOD TRUSSES REFERENCE: Refer to Section 0180 for explanation of abbreviated specification format. 1.01 Sco - Provide. 1.02 Alternate Bids - See 0110. 1.03 Unit Prices - None. 1.04 Shop Drawings and Engineering Drawings - A. This contractor shall be responsible for all truss and secondary member designs which shall bear the name and seal and/or registered number and state of registry of a Minnesota Licensed Professional Engineer. B. Truss designs shall contain the following data: 1. Design and fabrication data. 2. Metal connectors: Nominal sizes and locations of connectors at all joints. 3. Lumber specifications. 4. Species and stress grade of lumber to be used as members. 5. Design loadings of trusses and allowable stress increase. 6. Force analysis or bar forces in each member. Truss bearing supports: Sizes and location. 8. Camber. 9. Permanent bracing and/or bridging: as required to prevent compression buckling of individual truss members only. 10.Handling and erection instructions. C. Copies 'of the truss designs and/or shop drawings shall be submitted to the architect for approval prior to the fabrication of any components. 1.05 Samples - None. 1.06 Guarantee - Per contract conditions. 1.07 Standards and Codes A. Lumber grading rules and wood species to be in conformance with Voluntary Product Standard PS 20-70 grading rules of the following associations apply to materials furnished under this section: 1. Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association, Inc. (NWLMA) 2. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB) 3. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB) 4. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA) 5. Redwood Inspections Service (RIS) 6. Northern Hardwood and Pine Manufacturer's Association (NHPMA) B. Grade marks: Identify all lumber by official grade mark. 1. Lumber: Grade stamp to contain symbol of grading agency; mill number or name; grade of lumber; species or species grouping or combination designation; rules under which graded, if applicable; and condition of seasoning at time of manufacture. a. S-GYN: Unseasoned. b. S-Dry; Maximum of 19% moisture content. c. MC-15 or RD: Maximum of 15% moisture content. d. Dense. C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Span tables: National Forest Products Association. 2. Working stresses: Softwood lumber, National Design Specification, National Forest Products Association. 0619-01 0619 - WOOD TRUSSES PART 1 GEgERAL: (continued) 1.07 Standards and Codes (continued) D. The design and fabrication criteria of all wood trusses shall meet with "National Design Specifications for Stress Grade Lumber and its Fastenings" by National Forest Products Association (Latest Revision); "Timber Construction Standards" by American Institute of Timber Construction (Latest Revision); and "Design Specifications for Light Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses" by Truss Plate Institute (Latest Revision), the same as if those specifications and all their references were set out in full herein. E. All design shall be in conformance with current State and Local Codes. 1.08 Testing - None. 1.10 Do Not Include List - Installation by 0610. 1.09 Include List - All roof trusses including the furnishing of all materials, equipment and labor necessary for the prefabrication, delivery and permanent setting of the wood trusses. Also include all miscellaneous parts such as: blocking, bridging, temporary and permanent bracing and all related items of hardware, metal hangers, anchors and special metal shapes deemed by the structural engineer and the truss design engineer to be necessary for the proper prefabrication, erection, assembly, supporting and anchoring of the wood trusses. 1.11 Clean Up - Required per contract conditions. 1.12 Product Delivery, Storage, and Handling A. Immediately upon delivery to job site, place materials in area protected from weather. B. Store materials a minimum of 6" above ground on framework or blocking and cover with protective waterproof covering providing for adequate air circulation or air ventilation. C. Do not store seasoned materials in wet or damp portions of the building. 1.13 Standards of Quali - See 1.07 above. 2.01 Open Web Trusses Base Bid - All trusses referred to in this section of the specifications shall be gang-nail Fink wood trusses, or approved equal. A. Lumber: 1. All lumber used for truss members shall conform to the published as set out in the official grading rules of the appropriate lumber association or as.listed in the reference specifications; except that, whenever this specification, notes on the plans, or truss engineering designs calls for lumber which exceeds the minimum set forth therein, the specifications plans, and/or truss engineering designs shall be applicable, and information stated or shown in one shall be applicable the same as if in all of them. 2. The moisture content of all lumber shall be within the proper limits, as stated in the reference specifications, but shall not, in any case, exceed 19% nor be less than 7% at the time of fabrication. 0619-02 0619 - WOOD TRUSSES PART 2 PRODUCTS: (continued) 2.01 Open Web Trusses Base Bid - (continued) A. Lumber (continued) 3. All lumber shall conform to the species and fully recognized nominal sizes shown on the plans or truss engineering designs. All members shall be cut from lumber which bears the proper grade mark stamp of a recognized grading agency association or licenses lumber inspection agency. No lumber shall be used which does not appear to conform to the proper dimensions and/or grade. B. Connectors: 1. All truss connector plates shall be manufactured from only prime commercial quality galvanized sheet steel of no less than 20 gauge thickness which has a minimum yield of 33,000 psi., - and a minimum ultimate tensile strength of 48,000 psi. The corrosion resistant coating shall be 1.25oz. per square foot commercial class hot dipped galvanized before stamping. 2. All metal connectors shall be gang-nail connectors, and shall be stamped "gang-nail". The connectors shall have a series of nail like projections which are designed to separate the fibers of the wood into which they are pressed, in accordance with accepted nailing practices. 3. Where field connections of truss sub-assemblies are necessary, the connections shall be in accordance with the details shown on the truss design drawings, approved by a professional engineer and the architect. C. Fabrication: 1. All trusses and other roof structural components shall be fabricated in a properly equipped manufacturing facility. They shall be manufactured by experienced workmen, using precision cutting and truss fabrication equipment, under the direct supervision of a qualified foreman. All trusses shall be fabricated under strict rules of inspection and quality control as the local code may require, open to the inspection of the architect or his representative at all times. 2. All truss members shall be accurately cut to length, angle and be true to line to assure tight joints for finished truss. 3. All truss members and connector plates shall be properly placed in special jigs and the members tightly clamped in place, remaining in that position until the connector plates have been pressed into the lumber simultaneously on both sides of the joints. 4. Camber shall be built into the trusses, as noted on the engineering truss designs, by properly positioning the members in the fabricating jig. 5. Top and bottom chords shall be 2 x 6. 3.01 Conditions of Surfaces - Verify that surfaces to receive rough carpentry materials are prepared to exact grades and dimensions. 0619-03 0619 - WOOD TRUSSES PART 3 EXE=ION: (continued) 3.02 Installation: A. Trusses: 1. Fabricated trusses and sub-assemblies shall be handled with care so that they are not subject to damage. If the trusses are to be stock-piled or stored prior to erection, they shall be set in vertical positions, resting upon temporary bearing supports and braced so that they will be subjected to no unusual bending or tipping over. 2. All truss members shall be accurately cut to keep horizontal of the trusses to a minimum. 3. The permanent structural cross-bracing to ensure the overall rigidity of the roof system shall be in accordance with the architectural plans of the building structure. 4. Proper erection bracing shall be installed to hold the trusses true and plumb and in safe condition until permanent truss bracing and bridging can be solidly nailed in place to form a structurally sound roof framing system. All erection and permanent bracing shall be installed and all components permanently fastened before the application of any loads. 5. Field erection of !he trusses, including items such as proper handling, safety precautions, temporary bracing to prevent topping or dominoing of the trusses during erection, and any other safeguards or procedures consistent with good workmanship and good building erection practices, shall be the responsibility of the general contractor and/or the erection contractor. 6. Framing anchors and/or truss hangers shall be provided by the contractor in accordance with the architectural plans. 7. During the entire construction period, all contractors shall provide means for adequate distribution of concentrated loads so that the carrying capacity of any one truss and/or component is not exceeded. 0619-04 0753 - ELASTIC SHEET ROOFING, INSULATION & MEMBRANE FLASHINGS REFERENCE: Refer to -Section 0180 for explanation of abbreviated specification format. 1.01 Sco pe - Provide and install. 1.02 Alternate Bids - See 0110. 1.03 Unit Prices - Not required. 1.04 Shop Drawings - Not required. 1.05 Samples - A. Manufacturer's Literature: Materials description and installation instructions for system. B._ Shop Drawings: Details of the conditions encountered on project bearing statement that details have been prepared, or reviewed, and approved by the manufacturer's technical staff. C. Samples: 10-lbs. aggregate ballast. D. Test Reports: Independent testing laboratories reports stating compliance with Federal Specifications for each type rigid polyisocyanurate insulation. Test reports shall be dated wiUn1r) six months of the product manufacture date. 1.06 Guarantee - Ten (10) year written manufacturer's warranty covering materials and workmanship. 1.07 Standards - Per contract condition, ASTTM Specifications, Federal Specifications. 1.08 Testing - Not required. 1.09 Include List - A. Roofing membrane (adhesive applied) B. Roof insulation C. Installation inspection D. Membrane flashing at perimeter, curbs and penetrations. 1.10 Do Not Include List - Roof blocking (except as noted on drawings), sheet metal flashing (unless proposed as voluntary alternate). 1.11 Standard of Quality - Firestone, Carlisle, Goodyear, Diversate General. 1.12 Clean Up - Per contract conditions. 2.01 Manufacturer - Roofing materials shall be by Firestone Industrial Products Company or approved equal. 2.02 Materials A. Membrane: Firestone Rubberguard .045" E.P.D.M. (Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer). B. Flashings: .060" thick Firestone Formflash Membrane. C. 1/2" high pressure recovery board over tapered insulation. D. Insulation: Expanded polystyrene on flat roof only. Tapered 1/8"/ft., minimum 1" thick at roof edge, maximum 4" thick at, center of building. E. Bonding adhesive, splicing cement, lap sealant, water cutoff mastic, pipe seals, night sealant and pourable sealer - all manufactured by Firestone Industrial Products Company. 0753-01 0753 - ELASTIC S= ROOFING, INSULATION & MEMBRANE FLASHINGS 3.01 Stored Material: Materials shall not be stored on the site until a reasonable time before the application of the roofing items. Storage of roofing materials must be in a dry place. Proper protection for all materials must be furnished by the contractor. Roofing materials and roofing insulation must be stored between 60 degrees F. and 80 degrees F. on pallets or wood members and not in contact with the roof or ground. 3.02 Surface Preparation: The entire area to be roofed shall be inspected. by the roofing contractor to determine that it is free from debris, possesses required blocking and is free from other gross irregularities. Contractor shall notify the architect in writing of any and all defects in the receiving surfaces, and work shall not proceed until such defects have been corrected. Proceeding with installation is evidence of surface acceptability. 3.03 Protection: A. Any conditions created by this contractor which shall create a hazard to the building or it's contents, shall be remedied by Lhe providing of temporary protection to the interior and exterior of the building. Such protection shall meet approval. In raisin-- materials alongside finished wall surfaces, protect adjoining walls with tarpaulins to prevent damage. Roofing contractor shall be responsible for cleaning soiled surfaces clue to the -- negligence as required. B. Water cut-offs shall be made by extending the membrane beyond the insulation and setting the end of the membrane in 12" of Firestone Night Sealant. 3.04 Installation: A. Roof Membrane - Roofing and flashing shall only be applied by factory trained and approved roofing contractors familia'r with the product and applied in strict compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. Material shall be homogeneous one-piece loosely laid roof membrane. Seams shall be made by lapping the membrane a minimum of three inches, for continuity and integrity, and sealed with sealant. All seams must be sealed the same- working day. B. Membrane Flashing - Flashing shall be installed at all vertical surfaces, roof interruptions and penetrations in accordance with the manufacturer's currently published drawings and consistent with job conditions. Extend base flashing up vertical surfaces not less than 3", except as shown otherwise on the drawings. 3.05 Curb Insulation A. Apply 3/4" or thicker insulation to mechanical equipment ,,trait curbs and to other curbs where insulation is not provided with the unit. 3.06 Adjusting and Cleaning A. Inspect all work - thoroughly and make corrections iiiimediaLely. 07153-02 0753-- ELASTIC S= ROOFING, INSULATION & MEMBRANE FLASHINGS PART 3 EXECUTION: (continued) 3.07 Protection A. The installer shall advise other contractors of recommended protection for roofing so that the work will be without damage or deterioration (except for normal weathering) at the time of acceptance. END OF SECTION 0753 07539108 BHA10-89 0753-03 0760 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL REFERENCE: Refer to Section 0180 for explanation of abbreviated specification format. PART 1 GENERAL: 1.01 Scope - Provide and install. 1.02 Alternate Bids - See 0110. 1.03 Unit Prices - Not required. 1.04 Shop Drawings - Not required. 1.05 Samples - Not required. 1.06 Guarantee - 2 years. 1.07 Standards - AISC, AISI. 1.08 Testing - None required. 1.09 Include List - A. Gravel stops. B. Metal flashings, reglets and counter flashing. C. Sealants associated with flashing. D. Scuppers. 1.10 Do Not Include List - Not applicable. 1.11 Standards of Quality - Colorklad, Foremost, Pac- Clad. PART 2 PRODUCTS: 2.01 Materials A. Colorklad flashing to be as manufactured by Vincent Brass and aluminum, 24 ga. All readily visible items shall be Colorklad, such as - fascia, scuppers, gravel stops, counterflashing and all accessories associated with these items shall match. B. Galvanized steel - ASTM A526 -71, 24 ga. (typical) or as noted. (Only at unexposed locations.) C. Solder - ASTM B32 -80, alloy grade 58, 50% tin, 50% lead. D. Flux - FS O- F -506C, Type I. E. Asphaltic base paint - FS TT-C -494, Type II. F. Plastic cement - FS SS- C -153G, Type I. G. Metal primer - FS TT-P -641, Type II, Moore's Ironclad Galvanized Primer. H. Sealant - 707 Butyl Sealant by Protective Treatments, Inc. or equal. 2.02 Fabrication A. Fabricate gravel stop, coping and all other flashing sections in lengths as required for joints at 10' -0" o.c. with 1/2" joints with 6" splice plates, profile as indicated on the drawings. B. Fabricate flashing section up to 10' in one piece. For sections over 10', use sheets as large as are practicable. Fold exposed edges back, not less than 3/8" and flatten. C. Form 45 degree drip at bottom of gravel stop, nested over a continuous hook strip of galvanized steel on building exterior. D. Fabricate miscellaneous sheet metal items as noted and detailed on drawings. 0760 -01 0760 - FLASHING AND Sl= METAL PART 3 EXECUTION: 3.01 Flashing A. Install flashing as indicated and as necessary to obtain weathertight conditions. B. Lap ends not less than four inches, set in plastic cement. Flash continuously around internal and external comer. Extend flashings not less than eight inches up onto vertical surfaces unless otherwise shown. C. Extend counterflashings into sawed masonry joints at least 1 1/2". Secure with lead plugs and point with sealant. D. Install flashings around curbs on all roof top equipment, if not supplied with equipment. 3.02 Gravel Stops A. Flash as indicated and as necessary to obtain weathertight condition. B. Flash continuously around internal and external corners. 3.03 Protections A. Where sheet metal abuts or members into adjacent dissimilar materials, the juncture shall be executed in a manner t17--1t will prevent electrolysis between the materials. B. Protect metals from corrosion when embedded in, or in contact with, other materials. 3.04 Miscellaneous Sheet Metal A. Install all miscellaneous sheet metal items as shown on the drawings. When items are exposed, workmanship shall be of the highest quality. END OF SECTION 0760 07609108 BHA10-89 0760-02 0761 - PREFORMED METAL ROOFING, FASCIA AND SOFFIT SYSTEM REFERENCE: Refer to Section 0180 for explanation of abbreviated specification format. 1.01 Scop - Provide and install. 1.02 Alternate Bid - See 0110. 1.03 Unit Price - Not required. 1.04 Shop Drawing - Required. 1.05 Samples - 2 sets - 3" x 6" samples of prefinisbed sheet metal for color selection. 1.06 Guarantee - A. 2 year weather tightness warranty from applicator. B. 20 year finish guarantee from manufacturer. 1.07 Standards - Per contract conditions. 1.08 Testing - Not required. 1.09 Include List - A. Preformed metal fascia, roof and soffit panels. B. Structural hat channel framing system. C. Sealant associated with system. D. Flashing associated with preformed metal roof, fascia and soffit panels. E. All accessories, attaching devices, and trim pieces (color matched where exposed to view) required or shown to provide a weather tight system. 1.10 Do Not Include - A. Interior steel stud system, structural light gauge metal joists and studs. B. Metal roof edge flashing. 1.11 Standards of Qualit - ColorKlad, PAC-CLAD, AEP/SPAN. 1.12 Clean Up - Required. 2.01 Manufacturer - Sheet metal fascia, roof and soffit materials shall be manufactured by ColorKlad or approved equal. 2.02 Design of Preformed Metal Fascia, Roof and Soffit Panel'Svstem A. This contractor shall be responsible for the design of all, metal panel installations including all supports, components, and fasteners noted on the drawings or specified by this section. System shall be designed to resist applicable building code 1,;ind and uplift forces for the spans and points of achievement. System shall be designed to accommodate thermal movement. 2.03 Materials A. Prefinished Sheet Metal: Galvanized carbon steel sheets, 21 gauge, Kynar finish. One pre-formed pan system. Standing seam Lit 18" o.c. with double hem standing seam cap. Color shall be selected from manufacturers standard finshes and protected by plastic film. B. Sealant shall comply with NAM�T SS-la-68. 01161-01 0761 - PREFORMED METAL ROOFING, FASCIA AND SOFFIT SYSTEM PART 2 PRODUCTS: (continued) 2.03 Materials (continued) C. Flashing shall be shop formed as shown on details and on shop drawings to provide weather tightness from sheets or roll material to match quality and color of preformed panels. D. Framing: Galvanized steel hat channels, 24 gauge, spacing as required to meet design and code requirements. E. Provide color matched fasteners where fasteners are exposed to view. F. Provide color matched touch-up paint. G. Miscellaneous supports: As necessary to secure metal panels to building structure. H. Bituminous Paint: Aspha-1t emulsion, ASTIM D 1187-66 (1910), Type A. I. Felt paper, 30#, and red resin paper over felt. PART 3 MCUTION: 3.01 Inspection A. This contractor will be responsible for inspecting the surfaces to which the systems will be attached to insure that proper support structure has been provided by others in accordance with -he construction documents. Any discrepancies should be brought to the attention of the architect prior to the start of inst 'allin-g work. By proceeding with the installation of the panel system, this contractor accepts the job site conditions. 3.02 Preparation A. Coordinate the work with other work f( items which make up the entire weatherproofing or waterproofing. It be permanently watertight, and not manufacturer's published limitations. Dr the correct sequencing of membrane or system r) f is required that the system deteriorate in excess of 3.03 Installation A. This contractor shall take proper precautions when installing roof soffit, and fascia systems to protect work already in place to maintain weather tight conditions. B. Install roof and soffit panels as detailed. C. Fasten panels to subframing with concealed fasteners as recommended by manufacturer. Surface exposed fasteners should be utilized only when concealed fastening is impossible. Surface fasteners should be as small as possible with minimal exposed heads. D. Install all flashings, closures, and trims required. F. Install work with lines and corners of exposed units true and accurate. Form exposed faces flat and free of buckles, excessive waves and avoidable tool marks, considering the temper and reflectivity of the metal. Provide uniform, neat seams. F. Protect metal surfaces which are to be in contact with dissimilar metals, with a coat of bituminous paint specified to prevent, galvanic or corrosive action. Coating shall riot-, extend onto exposed surfaces. G. At completion of work, remove all scrap material from building stn( site. 07 61 -02 0761 - PREFORMED METAL ROOFING, FASCIA AND SOFFIT SYSTEM PART 3 EXMJITION: (continued) 3.03 Installation (continued) H. Remove protective plastic film immediately after installation of prefinished flashings and miscellaneous fabrications. I. Remove all flux, scraps and dirt immediately. Excess flux shall be neutralized with a 5 to 10 percent solution of washing soda and surface drenched with clean water. J. Field touch-up marred or abraded surfaces with paint provided. 1. Replace sections of flashiri-O or trim, which exhibit abrasions on the face of surfaces exposed to view from finished grade. END OF SECTION 0761 07619108 BH-Alo-89 0761-03 0782 - UNIT SKYLIGHTS REFERENCE: Refer to Section 0180 for explanation of abbreviated specification format. PART 1 COS[qII.: 1.01 Scope - Provide and install. 1.02 Alternate Bid - See 0110. 1.03 Unit Price - Not required. 1.04 Shop Drawing - Required. 1.05 Samples - Not required. 1.06 Guarantee - 1 year. 1.07 Standards - ASTM ' AAMA. 1.08 Testing - Not required. 1.09 Standards of Quality - Wasco, APC, Dur-Red, Naturalite. 2.01 Materials A. Skylights to be PALM continuous Ridgelite Model No. 530 by Hillsdale Industries, Inc. or equal. This acrylic sealed single dome shall be clear with a 6063-T5 extruded altuninum curb frzm and dome elevating leg with support gasket and retaining fr,-Urie. B. Refer to Drawings for size and location. 3.01 Installation - as per manufacturer's recommendations. A. Install on top of wood curb in continuous sealant 'bed. B. Secure with 1/4" toggle bolts or attachment screws as per manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 0782 07829108 BHAIO-89 0782-01 0790 - SEALANTS REFERENCE: Refer to Section 0180 for explanation of abbreviated specification format. 1.01 Scope - Provide and install. 1.02 Alternate Bids - See 0110. 1.03 Unit Prices - None required. 1.04 Shop Drawings - None required. 1.05 Samples - Not required. 1.06 Guarantee - Per contract conditions. 1.07 Standards - Per contract conditions. 1.08 Testing - None required. 1.09 Include List A. Joints around exterior doors. B. Joints around any item recessed or set into masonry or concrete. E. Joints at control and expansion joints. G. Joints required to provide a water and weather tight construction. 1.10 Do Not Include List A. Sealants associated with membrane roofing and flashing. 1.11 Standard of Quality A. Parr, Inc. B. Dow Corning. 1.12 Clean Up - Per contract conditions. ... •'•0� 2.01 Materials A. Exterior sealant - exposure beads to be Mono by Tremco. B. Interior sealant - exposure beads to be Mono by Tremco. C. Back -up - Tremco joint backing (round profile) by Tremco Manufacturing Co. D. Sealant primer - as recommended by manufacturer of sealant, when required. E. Color by architect. F. Fireproof sealant - Flameseal Fire Stop Putty by Nelson Electric. G. Acoustical Sealant - Tremco or United States Gypsum. 3.01 Preparation A. Examine all surfaces that are to be caulked. Report unsatisfactory conditions and do not proceed until correction has been properly made. B. Properly prepare joints and surfaces to receive sealant compound. Mask or protect as necessary to prevent smearing of adjacent surfaces. C. Remove dust, moisture, rust, grease, glaze, and loose materials that could interfere with adhesion of compound. D. Rake joints as necessary to obtain minimum of 1/4" for sealant. Maintain sealant width of not more than one inch. 0790 - SEALANTS PART 3 EXECUTION: (continued) 3.02 Installing A. Pack joints more than 3/4" deep, and joints not properly backed, with back-up to within 3/4" of adjacent surfaces. B. Prime surfaces if recommended for best adhesion and apply compound with sufficient pressure to completely below face of adjacent sides of the joint. Sealant joints to be completely weathertight and securely adhered at both sides. C. Complete joint sealant before finish painting is started. Remove any smeared sealant and clean adjacent surfaces with proper solvent cleaner. D. Do not apply sealant when surrounding temperature is below 40 degrees F. or when excessive moisture is present. E. Provide anti-tack agent over beads if required for dust free surfaces. F. Seal air tight all penetrations of fire area separation walls, tenant party walls, and tenant/corridor walls. END OF SECTION 0790 07909108 BHA10-89 MUM 0811 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES (WELDED TYPE) REFERENCE: Refer to Section 0180 for explanation of abbreviated specification format. 1.01 So - Provide and install. 1.02 Alternate Bids - See 0110. 1.03 Unit Prices - None required. 1.04 Shop Drawings - Required. 1.05 Samples - None required. 1.06 Guarantee - Per contract conditions. 1.07 Standards - ANSI. 1.08 Testi - None required. 1.09 Include List - See plan and details. 1.10 Do Not Include List Glass & glazing. 1.11 Standards of Qualit Pioneer Industries, Trussbilt, Mesker, Kewanee, Steelcraft, Curries. 1.12 Clean Up - Per contract conditions. 1.13 Co-operation - Co-operate with other contractors provisions for hardware and other related items. Glewwe Metals, to provide a. . SO 2.01 Basic Material A. Sheet steel for frames shall steel. B. Sheet steel for doors shall steel. be hot rolled prime quality caps on be cold rolled stretcher level sheet 2.02 Frames and Doors A. All hollow metal frames and doors are to be stock or custom made. B. Frames 16 ga. (welded type) C. Doors 18 ga. D. Hollow metal frames are to be of sizes and configurations shown on the drawings. E. Provide frame reinforcing shown as required, integral with frames. 2.03 Fabrication A. Metal Frames 1. Hollow metal door frames, as shown on the drawings shall be formed of gauges as specified for exterior or interior locations. 2. The frames shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped for all mortise hardware except that the drilling tapping for surface door closers and door closer brackets shall be done in the field by the contractor. 3. Furnish three (3) gum rubber bumpers for single frames, two (2) for pairs, equal to Glynn Johnson's GJ64. 4. Provide steel hinges reinforcements 3/16" x 1 1/2" x 9" long. Hinge and strike plate cutouts to be protected with pressed steel cover boxes spotwelded to the back of the frames behind these mortises. 0811-01 PART 2 PRODUCTS: (continued) 2.03 Fabrication (continued) A. Metal Frames (continued) 5. Provide 12 gauge x 14" steel one piece channel reinforcing in head frame for closers and 3/16" x 1 1/2" x 4 steel reinforcing at lock strikes. 6. Frames shall be neatly mitered at corners and continuously fully welded and ground smooth for an invisible joint. 7. Provide angle clips at bottom of all frames with punched holes for securing the frames to floor construction. Also provide 16 gauge spreader channel at bottom of all frames to avoid twisting of frames in shipment. 8. Provide appropriate wall anchors as detailed, with a minimum of four (4) anchors per jamb for frames up to V-V high, adding extra anchor for each additional 16" or fraction thereof. Anchors to suit wall and/or U.L. label 'conditions, with masonry anchors 16 gauge corrugated type, 10" long. 9. All materials, after a thorough cleaning, shall be given one coat of baked-on red oxide prime covering inside as well as outside surfaces. 10. All hardware items shall be installed at the job site by the contractor. Hardware provisions to be made from templates, furnished by the finish hardware supplier. 11. All material shall be pre-assembled at the factory in the largest size units permitted by shipping restrictions for minimum assembly of related parts in field. 12. Should field splicing be required it shall be made by qualified personnel of he manufacturer and shall be done to the satisfaction of the architect. B. Metal Doors 1. Hollow metal full flUsh doors except as otherwise noted (and transom panels where indicated), shall be a 1-3/4" thickness constructed of 16 gauge, full cold rolled, stretcher level sheet steel, spotwelded to a truss-shaped or rigid steel channel core vertically 6" o.c. and insulated with 8 pound density mineral wool. 2. Doors shall be mortised and reinforced for hardware furnished under finished hardware section of the specification. Reinforcements for hinges, locks, closers, etc. shall be the manufacturer's standard. 3. Reinforce doors for surface items such as semi-concealed closers, brackets, surface holders, door stops, etc. Drilling and tapping of these surface items to be done in the field by general contractor. 4. Doors shall be flat and true with a flatness tolerance of 1/16" in all directions, including diagonal. Doors shall be furnished with 1/8" bevel on edges. 0811-02 0811 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES (WELDED TYPE) PART 2 PRODUCTS: (continued) 2.03 Fabrication (continued) B. Metal Doors (continued) 5. All doors, etc. shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust, grease, and other impurities and all welds shall be ground smooth. Metallic tiller shall be ground smooth. Metallic filler shall be applied where necessary to fill construction joints and ground to a smooth surface. Manufacturer's standard prime coat shall be applied, with interior surfaces of exterior doors primed before fabrication. Exterior doors shall be constructed in such a manner that the top and bottom are flat and sealed. 2.04 Protection - Paint on doors and frames shall be thoroughly dry and delivered to project in sturdy crating and stored in a manner to avoid cracking before installation. After installation, protect from abrasions and other damage until acceptance of the building. PART 3 EXECUTION: 3.01 Installation A. Examine surfaces and openings that are to receive metal doors or frames. Report unsatisfactory conditions and do not proceed until corrections have been made. B. Where doors are indicated to open against an intersecting wall, and scheduled to receive a surface mounted, standard exposed closer with a regular arm, the jamb of frame shall be set not less than 6" from face of wall. C. Provide temporary wood spreaders at mid-height of all door frames and cased opening frames while masonry walls are being constructed. Spreader shall be out to fit frame at head of frame. Leave all spreaders in place until mortar sets. Check frequently to insure that frame is plumb and level. Fill all door frames in masonry solidly with grout, as the work progresses, including head frame. I M a n C I O 0811-03 0840 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS REFERENCE: Refer to Section 0180 for explanation of abbreviated specification format. PART I GENERAL: 1.01 Sc - Provide and install. 1.02 Alternate Bid - See 0110. 1.03 Unit Price -_None None required. 1.04 Shop Drawing - Required. 1.05 Samples - None required. 1.06 Guarantee - Required - 2 years. 1.07 Standards - AA, AAMA, NAAMM. 1.08 Testing - None required. 1.09 Include List - A. Sealant associated with aluminum doors and frames, amd storefront. B. Hardware as scheduled below. C. Coordination with the general contractor for closers, weatherstripping, and thresholds, etc. D. Installation of Glass and Glazing by Aluminum Storefront Contractor (Refer to 0880). E. Aluminum Louvers by Aluminum Storefront Contractor (Refev to 1020). 1.10 Do Not Include - Cylinder locks (by Owner). 1.11 Standards of Qualit - Kawneer Mfg., Inc. PART 2 PRODUCTS: 2.01 Materials A. All aluminum doors, entrance frames and window frames shall be extruded from 6063 T5 alloy. B. Finish to be #40 dark bronze. C. Sealant to be Mono by Tremco or approved product as recommended by manufacturer. 2.02 Doors A. Medium Stile "350" doors with 1/4" aluminum panel (.050 skin both. sides), as shown on the drawings. B. All exterior doors shall have surface applied threshold weatherstripping. 2.03 Entrance Frames and Fixed Aluminum Windows A. 1-3/4" x 4 1/2", Kawneer 450, Tri-fab, for entrance frame systems as shown and detailed on the drawings. B. Door frames shall be pile weatherstripped on all door edges. C. Furnish thresholds for all door openings. 2.04 Hardware - US26D finish A. Manufacturer's standard door hardware package including but not necessarily limited to push, CS-9 pull, 1-1/2 pr hinges each door, provision of cut-out for cylinder dead lock, LCN 4040 closer with hold open, flush bolts, threshold, etc. 'Refer to drawings regarding special threshold for door E-101, Equipment Building. 0840 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS a • . 3.01 Aluminum Door - Main frame assembly and hardware shall be installed according to manufacturer's recommendations, and anchored securely at jambs, head and sidelite sills. Seal with specified sealant per manufacturer's recommendations to form watertight joint between frame and surrounding construction. 3.02 Protection and Cleaning - After installation, metal surfaces of the walls, windows, panels, and entrance shall be cleaned on both interior and exterior of all mortar, plaster, paint, and other contaminants. After being cleaned, all work shall be protected against damage until it is accepted by the architect. � / • • m I . 1 i 0852 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS REF=CE: Refer to Section 0180 for explanation of abbreviated specification format. PART 1 GENERAL: 1.01 Sco pe - Provide and install. 1.02 Alternate Bid - None. 1.03 Unit Price - None required. 1.04 Shop Drawing - Required. 1.05 Samples - None required. 1.06 Guarantee - 1 year. 1.07 Standards - ANSI, A*11A. 1.08 Testing - Required. Data to be submitted with shop drawings. 1.09 Include List - Glazing. 1.10 Do Not Include - Sealant. 1.11 Standards of Qualit - Acorn. 1.1.2 Clean Up - Does not apply. UM 9 F 2.01 Materials A. Windows shall be thereto -break fixed, electro-static paint bronze finish, double -hung 2500-A2 Series, as manufactured by Acorn Building Products or approved equal. B. Sizes shall be as shown on drawings. C. Furnish with screens at exterior windows. D. Furnish windows with clear insulating glazing, installed. 5/8" or 7/8" as is standard for manufacturer. E. Furnish with or without nailing flanges as required by the details. PART 3 EXECUTION: 3.01 Fabrication A. Windows and doors are to be fabricated in accordance �,�ith manufacturer's standard specification. B. Factory glaze in vinyl glazing channel, 3.02 Installation A. Install plumb and level, secure and weatherti-ght in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Windows to be placed as shown on the drawings and secured with or without nailing flanges as required. END OF SECTION 0852 08529108 BHA10-89 0852-01 0870 - FINISH HARDWARE REFERENCE: Refer to Section 0180 for explanation of abbreviated specification format. 1.01 Scope - Provide and install. 1.02 Alternate Bids - See 0110. 1.03 Unit Prices - None required. 1.04 Shop Drawings - Required. Furnish complete hardware schedule showing all manufacturers' number, function, and finish of all hardware furnished to the architect for review. Furnish keying schedule after 1.05 1.06 1.0 - 1 1.08 1.09 1.10 1.11 1.12 1.13 1.14 determination of requirements. Samples - Not required. Guarantee - One year. Standards - Federal Specification FF-H-106A, 101. Testing - Not required. Include List - Interior doors only, Do Not Include List Exterior aluminum door Standards of Quality See Part 2. Clean Up - Per contract documents. UL, DIM, NTT)A 80, NFP-A hardware. Packaging of Materials - Hardware shall be properly wrapped in separate packages, complete with all trim, screws, and fasLerdng devices, for each and every door, and distinctly labeled and nurtibere(3. for each opening. A typewritten schedule shall accompany each shipment in conformance with the approved and filed schedule submitted by the contractor. Provide information for proper hardware positioning of each type of assembly with the typewritten schedule. Delivery of Materials - All hardware shall be delivered from the factory, to offices of the subcontractor designated to install same, or to the job site for installation by the General Contractor. Templates will be required for all hardware applied to hollow metal doors and frames. 1.15 Quality Control - Workmanship and finish of all hardware shall be free from all blemishes and defects. All defective pieces shall be rejected, even if they may be set in place before the defect is discovered. Defective products shall be removed and new pieces- substituted in their place by this contractor without extra cost to the owner, including labor to remove and replace the various items. 'fl-ie correct number of screws and/or fasteners, in proper size, finish, and material corresponding with the hardware to be fastened, shall be furnished with each piece of hardware. Furnish products of only one manufacturer for each type of hardware, where possible. 6, . 2.01 Materials A. Furnish and install finish hardware as specified for the allowances listed below: Hollow metal doors - $250.00 per. opening. 0870-01 0870 - FINISH HARDWARE PART 2 PRODUCTS: (continued) 2.01 Materials (continued) B. The manufacturers listed below are approved for use. Finishes shall be as indicated. ITEM MANUFACTURER FINISH Butt Hinges McKinney, Stanley, Hager Exterior-US32D Interior-US26D Locks Schlage, Yale, Corbin, Russwin US26D Closers Norton, Yale, Dorma Aluminum Protective Plates Quality, Brookline, Cipco, US32D Hiawatha Thresholds, Reese, Pemko, National Guard Aluminum Jamb Gaskets 2.02 Butt Hinges A. (2) hinges per leaf for openings through 60" high. Add (1) hinge per leaf for each 30" or fraction in height. B. Standard weight for exterior outswing entrance doors. C. Size: 4 1/2" X 4 1/2" for 1 3/4" thick doors. 2.03 Locks A. Cylinder locks shall be furnished by the Owner. Cut-outs shall be provided by this Contractor. 2.04 Closers A. Determine closer size and mounting method in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Mount on interior side of exterior doors. 2.05 Protective Plates A. Furnish 16 ga., .050 plates as follows: 2" less than width of door and 10" high or as shown on drawings. 2.06 Keying A. Change key and masterh all lock cylinders as directed by the Owner to their existing system. Manufacturer to maintain key serial number records. B. Furnish two change keys for each look and three masterk for each masterkey set. C. Ship masterkeys to Owner via registered mail. D. Hardware supplier shall prepare proposed keying schedule for approval. 2.07 General Description A. Lever handle locksets with lock one side only will be selected for Storage Room Doors, Manager's Office and Janitor's Closet. B. Owner uses "Best" locking and keying system which should be considered herein. 0, • L 3.01 Installation - Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. 08710-02 0870 - FINISH HARDWARE PART 3 EXECUTION: (continued) 3.02 Mounting Heights - Install hardware at mounting heights conforming to the recommended mounting locations of the Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association. PART 4 SCHEDULE: 4.01 Hardware Schedule A. The hardware supplier shall provide a schedule for review by the Architect & Owner. Verification of quantities shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. B. For metal doors, provide; butt hinges, locksets, closers, protective plates and other hardware as required or specified herein. C. All hardware shall be provided with appropriate fasteners, brackets, roses, fillers, extensions, or other items necessary for the appropriate installation and attachment to the materials onto and/or into which it is installed. END OF SECTION 0870 i US i 2 0870 -03 0880 - GLASS AND GLAZING REFERENCE: Refer to Section 0180 for explanation of abbreviated specification format. PART I GENERAL: 1.01 Sco pe - Provide and install. 1.02 Alternate Bids - See 0110. 1.03 Unit Prices - Not required. 1.04 Shop Drawings - Not required. 1.05 Samples - Not required. 1.06 Guarantee - I year. 1.07 Standards - Per contract conditions. 1.08 Testing - Not required. 1.09 Include List - Glazing of doors, windows, fixed interior window, by Aluminum Storefront Contractor. 1.10 Do Not Include List Not applicable. 1.11 Standards of Qualit ASG Industries, Inc. 1.12 Clean Up - Required. 1.13 Handling and Protection A. Handle glazing materials to avoid injury to persons and to avoid damage to materials or to work in place. Satisfactorily repair or remove and replace work that has been damaged. B. All shall not be approved until substantial completion. C. Protect glass from scratching, breaking, or other injury while storing, during installation, and until work is completed. 1.14 Measurements - All sizes of glass shall be taken from the actual frames. Sizes shown on the drawings are approximate, to be used for estimating only. PART 2 PRODLLM: 2.01 Materials A. 1/4" tempered obscure by PPG or equal. B. Glazing 1. Neoprene setting and spacer blocks.. 2. Extruded polybuthene tape sealant such as Parflex Tape by Parr, Inc., or Tremco 440 by Tremco Co. 3. Sealant - Mono by Tremco Manufacturing Co., or Uni-Par-Seal by Parr, Inc. 4. Glazing compound - Tremco "Tremco, Tremglaze" or approved equal, olco-resinous compound. C. Laminated safety glass may be substituted for tempered subject to approval of the architect.. 2.02 Glazing size and location - Refer to drawings for openings to be glazed and the glass to be used. PART 3 EXECUTION: 3.01 Installation A. Set all glazing in the best possible manner and in such a way that there will be equal bearing the entire width of the pane. B. All glazing setting blocks, spacers, tape, etc. shall be set in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. af-2-011 "I 0880 - GLASS AND GLAZING PART 3 EZEION: (continued) 3.01 Installation (continued) C. Thoroughly clean all contact surfaces of sash, stops, reglets, and glass edges of dirt, dust, oil and other foreign matter before starting glazing. D. No glazing shall be done when the air temperature is less than 40 degrees F. nor when frost, ice or moisture is on the glazing surfaces. E. Provide a seal bead of sealant in bottom corners of all wood frame to insure against leaks. F. At the completion of the work of the section, this contractor shall remove from the building and premises all rubbish and accumulated matters of whatever nature not caused by other trades and shall leave work in a clean, orderly, acceptable condition. G. Install temporary coverings necessary to prevent damage to finished surfaces during construction. DI 10 OWN • to ii 1 2• •221 1 0925 - GYPSUM DRYWALL REFERENCE: Refer to Section 0180 for explanation of abbreviated specification format. 1.01 Scope - Provide and install. 1.02 Alternate Bids -See 0110. 1.03 Unit Price - Not required. 1.04 Shop Drawings - Not required. 1.05 Samples - Required for drywall and ceiling texture. 1.06 Guarantee - Per contract conditions. 1.07 Standards - The reference to United States Gypsum Company products or standards in this specification shall be taken as intending to mean and specify the products or standards described, or any other equal thereto in quality, finish, and durability, and equally as serviceable for the purpose for which it is or they are intended; and this quality shall be determined by the architect and he alone shall be the sole judge as to what material or services will be accepted. Other products shall meet requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of standards listed: A. American Society for Testing and Materials - ASTM B. Federal Specifications - FS C. Painting and Decorating Contractors of America - PDCA 1.08 Testing - Not required. 1.09 Include List A. Drywall adhesive. B. Coordination with 0610 regarding wood blocking. 1.10 Do Not Include List - A. Painting specified in 0990. B. Wood framing. 1.11 Protection - This contractor shall protect adjacent ceiling, wall, and floor finish materials in place prior to the installation of drywall and shall properly clean or replace all such materials damaged by his neglect. This contractor shall protect his texturing and provide the necessary touch-up prior to final completion. This contractor shall provide all scaffolding, staging, lay drop cloths, etc. necessary for proper execution of his work. 1.12 Clean Up - Required. 9 , . & 2.01 Materials - The following materials herein specified are manufactured by United States Gypsum Co., unless otherwise indicated. A. Ceilings 1. 5/8" type 'X' Gypsum Board. 2. Apply 1 layer to 2 x framing spaced at 16" o.c. 0925-01 0925 - GYPSUM DRYWALL PART 3 EXECUTION: 3.01 Wallboard Erection A. Gypsum wallboard to be applied as required by Testing Agency rating. B. Wallboard shall be applied with type 'W' drywall screws spaced in accordance with USG recommendations. When required, insulation shall be installed prior to erection. Screws shall be staggered on adjoining edges. C. Fasten gypsum board beginning at the center and work towards the outer edges. Hold the board firmly against the supports while fastenings. Locate fasteners opposite each other on adjacent ends and edges. Fasteners at edge of boards shall be located 3/8" to 1/2" to the edge. D. Openings for electrical devices, piping, grilles, and registers shall be accurately located and neatly made to closely fit the devices and be completely covered by plates and escutcheons. E. Coordinate installation and finishing of gypsum board with work of other trades. If requested, provide early installation and taping of gypsum board. F. Panel attachment -Roof /Ceiling - Attach face layer parallel with framing. Stagger fact layer joints 10" minimum from base layer joints. Face layer to be screw attached 12" o.c. 3.02 Joint Treatment A. All joint compounds shall be USG or equal, premixed or mixed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Taping 1. All purpose compound shall be applied in a thin uniform layer to all joints and angles to be reinforced. Reinforcing tape shall be applied immediately, centered over the joint and sealed into the compound. Sufficient compound, approximately 1/64" to 1/32" must remain under the tape to provide proper bond. A skim coat shall immediately follow tape embedment but not to function as a fill or second coat. Tape shall be properly folded and embedded in the angles to provide a true angle.- The tape or embedding coat must be thoroughly dry prior to application of the fill coat. 2. All purpose compound shall be applied over the embedding coat, filling the board taper flush with the surface. The fill coat shall cover the tape and feather out slightly beyond the tape. On joints with no taper, the fill coat shall cover the tape and feather out at least 4" on either side of the tape. No fill coat is necessary on interior angle. The fill coat shall be thoroughly dry prior to application of the finish coat. Taping compound need only have hardness. 0925 -02 0925 - GYPSUM DRYWALL SYSTEM AND SPRAYING PART 3 EXECiP1'ION: (continued) 3.02 Joint Treatment (continued) B. Taping (continued) 3. Topping compound or all purpose compound shall be spread evenly over and extended slightly beyond the fill coat on all joints and feathered to a smooth uniform finish. Over tapered edges, the finished joint shall not protrude beyond the plane of the surface. All taped angles shall receive a finish coat to cover the tape and taping compound, providing a true angle. Where necessary, sanding shall occur between coats and following the final application of compound to protrude a smooth surface ready for decoration. C. A taping or all purpose type compound shall be applied as the first coat to all fastener depressions. This shall be followed by a minimum of 2 additional coats of topping or all purpose compound, leaving all depressions level with the plane of the surface. D. All corners and edges, durabead, and control joint shall be concealed by at least two coats of USG all purpose compound. When completed, the compound shall extend 8" to 10" from edge of exposed metal nosing. Compound shall be finished as above. END OF SECTION 0925 09259108 BHA10 -89 0925 -03 0930 - CERAMIC TILE REFERENCE: Refer to Section 0180 for explanation of abbreviated specification format. 1.01 Sco pe - Provide and install. 1.02 Alternate Bid - See 0110. 1.03 Unit Price - None required. 1.04 Shop Drawing - None required. 1.05 Samples - Provide color samples. 1.06 Guarantee - Per contract conditions. 1.07 Standards - ANSI, TCA. (Current Handbook) 1.08 Testing - None required. 1.09 Include List - Ceramic tile floors, base and walls. 1.10 Do Not Include - Does not apply. 1.11 Standards of Qualit - Romany Spartan., American Olean, Winburn. 1.12 Clean Up - Per contract conditions. 2.01 Material (based on American Olean Tile Co.) A. Floor - Ceramic mosaics shall be 2" x 2", price group 3. B. Base - Ceramic mosaics coved to match floor, 5" high total. C. Walls - 4 1/4" x 4 1/4" matt glazed tile. D. Grout - Hydroment joint filler. E. Color as selected by owner. F. Provide matching trim pieces as required. 3.01 Installation A. Floor tile and trim TCA F113. B. Base, interior walls TCA W243, 244. C. Slope floors to drains, true to plane. D. Expansion joints - provide expansion joints as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Any deviations depressions, ridges, humps, etc. or other defects that would prevent a satisfactory installation of ceramic tile true to intended plane shall be filled with Floorstone, or Sonnocrete, sanded down or otherwise leveled to proper plane, ready to receive new tile installation. F. Accurately cut tile to fit around pipes, fixtures, etc., and grind cut edges before installing. G. Joints between the shall be uniform in width (approximately 1/16" wide) with the joints open for the full depth (thickness) of the tile. H. Install grout in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, wiping away excess or smeared grout from the tile surface before it starts to set. I. Use care in grouting tile to avoid smearing grout over face of tile. Apply wax to ceramic the face before grouting with fascia sealer grout. 0930-01 0930 - CERAMIC TILE PART 3 EXECLNION: (continued) 3.01 Installation (continued) J. Damp cure portland cement and sand grout for a minimum of three days using polyethylene.film and wetting tile thoroughly on the second day. K. Any inferior workmanship, cracked tile, poorly pointed joints, shall be replaced or corrected as directed by the architect. 3.02 Cleaning A. Ceramic tile surfaces shall be cleaned in accordance with the latest recommendations of the "Tile Manufacturer's Association, Inc." and/or the "Ceramic Tile Council." END OF SECTION 0930 09309108 BHA10-89 0930-02 0970 - SPECIAL FLOORING REFERENCE: Refer to Section 0180 for explanation of abbreviated specification format. 1.01 Scope - Provide and install. 1.02 Alternate Bids - See 0110. 1.03 Unit Price - Not required. 1.04 Shop Drawi - Not required. 1.05 Samples - Required to select colors. 1.06 Guarantee Per contract conditions. 1.07 Standards A. Manufacturer's verification of flame spread 25 maximum and 125 maximum smoke developing for other areas will be required prior to signing of con 1.08 Testing - Not required. 1.09 Include List - As specified below. 1.10 Do Not Include List - 1.11 Standard of Qualit - See spec. below. 1.12 Clean Up - Required. 1.13 Protection - Install necessary covering for surfaces that may have traffic during construction period. lvms & 2.01 Materials A. Ceram-tex Epoxy Broadcast Granular Flooring as manufactured by Ceram-Traz Corporation, Osseo, Minnesota. B. Primer shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the epoxy base granular quartz flooring. C. Epoxy base granular quartz flooring shall be epoxy based material mixed to a mortar consistency with quartz granules seeded in the mix. Floor shall be a non-slip surface for wet foot traffic. Texture of floor is subject to approval of the Architect. D. Sealer shall consist of an over-coat of clear epoxy. 3.01 Installation A. If concrete floor surfaces are irregular, rough, or has low spots, they shall be resurfaced to a level, smooth, finish with a latex-type underla3,ment similar to Armstrong 5 -170 Flormastic or approved equal. B. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for the particular conditions of application. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to the project conditions, consult the manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with the work. C. Preparation of substrate shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Broom or vacuum all substrate surfaces prior to application of any epoxy base granular quartz flooring. 2. Moisture content of concrete substrate, building air temperature and relative humidity must be within limits recommended by manufacturer. 0970 -01 0970 - SPECIAL FLOORING PART 3 EXECUTION: (continued) 3.01 Installation (continued) D. Primer: Primer shall be applied to all substrate surfaces and shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. E. Epoxy base granular quartz flooring shall be trowel applied over primer in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, and shall be applied to not less than 1/8" thickness. F. Sealer: After epoxy base flooring has cured, apply sealer coat in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. G. Protection: After application, protect all epoxy base flooring and cove base from damage by use of heavy Kraft paper or other covering. H. Finishing: After completion of the project and just prior to the final inspection of the work, thoroughly clean all epoxy base flooring and cove and leave in perfect condition. END OF SECTION 0970 09709108 BHA10 -89 1• / i 0990 - PAINTING AND DECORATING REFERENCE: Refer to Section 0180 for explanation - of abbreviated specification format. 1.01 Scope - Provide and install. 1.02 Alternate Bids - See 0110. 1.03 Unit Prices - None required. 1.04 Shop Drawings - None required. 1.05 Samples - None. 1.06 Guarantee - Per contract conditions. 1.07 Standards - ASTM, FS, PDCA, SSPC, ASA. 1.08 Testing - None. 1.09 Include List - A. Interior hollow metal and metal clad doors. B. Gypsum board ceilings as scheduled. C. Steel lintels and beams. D. Wood deck and trusses. E. All unfinished wood in finished spaces. F. All miscellaneous metal items. G. Preparation of surfaces to be painted or finished under this section. H. Paint all exterior mounted equipment whether or not factory finished, aluminum or galvanized, including items furnished by mechanical and electrical. I. Paint galvanized metal in finished spaces. J. Paint exposed surfaces of interior mechanical and electrical equipment and material, whether or not factory finished, occurring in finished spaces or adjacent to finished surfaces, including grills, registers, piping, piping, conduit, panels, and cabinets. K. Touch up of marred and minor damaged prefinished items. 1.10 Do Not Include - A. Prefinished doors and trim. B. All items specified as prefinished. C. Interior concrete block walls, wood Equipment Building. D. Special flooring. 1.11 Standards of Qualit - Benjamin Moore Glidden (G), Olympic (0), and O'Brien 1.12 Clean Up - Per contract conditions. trusses, and plywood deck in (B/M), Pratt & Lambert (P &L), (O-B). 2.01 Manufacture - Basic product selections are based on Benjamin Moore Products, unless otherwise noted. 2.02 Materials A. Materials shall conform to the standards as listed below. 1. Basic paint materials: Benjamin 2. Raw Linseed Oil: ASTM D234. 3. Boiled Linseed Oil: ASTM D260. 4. Turpentine: ASTM D13. 5. Mineral Spirits: ASTM D235. 6. Orange Shellac: ASTM D237. latest adopted or tentative Moore (B/M). 0990-01 0990 - PAINTING AND DECORATING PART 2 PRODUCTS: (continued) 2.02 Materials (continued) A. (continued) 7. Drier: ASTM D600. 8. White Lead: ASTM D81. 9. Red Lead: ASTM D83. 10. Putty: FS TT-P-79a, Type 1. 11. Stain and varnish basic materials: Pratt & Lambert. 12. Tinting colors: by manufacturer of basic materials. 2.03 Mixing and Colors: A. Use factory mixed colors, shades, and tints except as indicated. Job mixing permitted only with specific approval. B. All colors will be picked from color chips. If the contractor uses a different manufacturer or a different type of paint, he shall be responsible for adjusting the tint to compensate and to match the approved color chip. If the substrate is such that it affects the finish color, the contractor shall be responsible for adjusting the tint to compensate and to match the approved color chip. C. A maximum of 15 colors may be utilized. PART 3 EXECUTION' 3.01 Surface Condition Examine all surfaces to receive finish. Report any unsatisfactory condition to architect and do not proceed until corrections are made or assume responsibility. 3.02 Preparation A. All spaces shall be broom clean before painting is started, and all surfaces to be painted shall be dry. Temperature of spaces [ri the building where painting is being done or where it is drying shall be maintained above 50 degrees. B. Before painting, all dust, dirt, plaster, grease, and other extravenous matter which would affect the finished work shall be removed. Foreign matter on surfaces left by other trades will be removed by others. C. The contractor shall properly prepare all new surfaces before painting by cutting, stopping, filling, light sanding before all coats, and final dusting with clean tack cloth to insure a smooth and uniform surface without variation of gloss, suction, or other blemish. Knots, pith or sapwood shall be treated with shellac and all nail holes, cracks, open joints and other defects shall be puttied. 3.03 Priming A. Where metal is pre-primed and is scheduled for painting, clean, sand, and spot prime any areas requiring same. Primer to be as required for metal type. B. Prime all material as required by manufacturer of finish material. 0990 - PAINTING AND DECORATING PART 3 EXECUrION: (continued) 3.04 Painting and Finishing A. All paintings and finishing shall be carefully done and left perfect. No paint spots shall be left on glass, hardware, plumbing trim, fixtures, valves, etc., or other finished work. All workmanship shall be of the very best, with all materials evenly spread and smoothly flowed on without runs, skips, blemishes, or sagging of materials and without brush marks or debris covered marks. B. All surfaces shall be sanded lightly with #00 sandpaper between coats. C. No painting shall be done under conditions unsuitable for producing a good finish nor while plastering or other "wet" work is in progress. D. Wall. surfaces that will be concealed by millwork or casework shall be finished before the cabinets are installed and similar to other similar wall surfaces in same room. E. Coats as specified are intended to cover surfaces perfectly; if surfaces are not covered, further coats shall be applied at no extra cost. F. All brushes shall be clean and maintained in good condition. G. Allow at least 24 hours between coats unless special paints or coatings require more or less drying time as recommended by manufacturer. 3.05 Protection of Work A. The contractor shall furnish and lay drop cloths in all areas where painting is being done to protect floors and other work from damage during the prosecution of his work. B. Where it becomes necessary in order to execute his work, the painter shall remove temporary coverings, receptacle and switch plates, and replace same in a proper manner when uncovered surfaces have been completed. In case these coverings cannot be replaced, the painter shall protect the work in some other manner. All materials used in the building shall be stored where directed by the architect. C. Refrain from smoking while working and at all times limit smoking in restricted areas, such as in storage space for paint products. D. Store all paint materials in metal covered containers and all brushes, rollers, paint thinners, etc., shall be stored in covered metal containers. Used rags shall be removed from the building each night. 3.06 Schedule of Finishes A. Exterior and interior miscellaneous metal: thoroughly clean. One coat B/M Ironclad Retardo Rust Inhibitive Paint. Two coats of B /iyI Moorglo Enamel. B. Interior hollow metal frames and doors, other ferrous metal items, spot prime. Two coats of B/M Satin Impervo. 0990 -03 0990 - PAINTING AND DECORATING PART 3 EXECUTION: (continued) 3.06 Schedule of Finishes (continued) C. Piping and Ductwork (in finished spaces) 1. Galvanized: One coat B/M Ironclad Galvanized Metal Primer. One coat B/M Satin Impervo. D. Gypsum Board Ceiling - One coat B/M Latex Primer and one coat B/M semi-gloss enamel. E. Wood Deck - One coat Moorewood Semi-transparent stain, #081. F. Interior concrete block - Moorcraft Block Filler 4173 and two coats Moorcraft Waterborn Acrylic Epoxy Enamel, #279, and Waterborn Catalyst #2 7 18. G. Wood Trusses - One coat Moorewood solid color stain, #080. 0 0 0990-04 1016 - METAL TOILET PARTITIONS REFERENCE: Refer to Section 0180 for explanation of abbreviated specification format. • • • � • 1.01 Scope - Provide. 1.02 Alternate Bid - See 0110. 1.03 Unit Price - None. 1.04 Shop Drawing - Required. 1.05 Samples - Required for color. 1.06 Guarantee - One year. 1.07 Standards - Per contract conditions. 1.08 Testing - Not required. 1.09 Include List - As shown on drawings. 1.10 Do Not Include - Not applicable. 1.11 Standards of Quality - See below. 1.12 Clean Up - Required. • . • :, 2.01 Materials - A. Furnish floor supported, overhead braced, toilet partitions, shower compartment partitions, dressing cubicles, and wall hung bracket supported urinal partitions. Partitions shall be as manufactured by; Accurate Partitions Division of USG, Capitol Partitions, Inc., Global Steel Products Corp., Sanymetal Products Co., Inc., or approved equal. Doors: 24" X 58" X 1" thick, inswinging typical, and 34" wide outswinging for handicapped where shown. Urinal screen shall be 18" X 42" X 1" thick. B. Finish shall be baked enamel on clean sheet steel surfaces. Color shall be as selected from manufacturer's standard colors. C. Shower Compartments and Privacy Cubicles shall be Presidential Series Showers, for physically handicapped, as manufactured by Capitol Partitions, Inc., or approved equal. All walls shall be 1" thick, material impervious to water. All corner connections shall be made by means of continuous aluminum corner section. Field caulk as required. Headrail shall be annodized aluminum with integral shower curtain track. D. Receptor shall be pre -cast one piece terrazzo 6" high, made of white cement with black and white marble chips. Receptor shoulders shall be rabbeted to receive panels. Brass drain shall be cast integrally and shall provide for a caulked lead connection, not less than 1" deep to a 2" pipe and have removable stainless steel stainer plate. E. Benches shall be solid Poly Pro as manufactured by Capital Partions, Inc., or approved equal. Benches to have full radius edges, 10" wide x 1 -1/4" thick. 1016 -01 1016 - METAL TOILET PARTITIONS PART 3 INSTALLATION: 3.01 Installation A. Coordinate for blocking and rough openings. B. Install per manufacturers recommendations. C. Provide all clips and mounting brackets as required for installation. END OF SECTION 1016 a ! : _ i • 1016 -02 D&M'l I I#Jkvj CIL' I �� REFERENCE: Refer to Section 0180 for explanation of abbreviated specification format. 1.01 Scope - Provide and install. 1.02 Alternate Bid - See 0110. 1.03 Unit Price - None. 1.04 Shop Drawing - Required. 1.05 Samples - Not required. 1.06 Guarantee - Per contract conditions. 1.07 Standards - Pei contract conditions. 1.08 Testing - Not required. 1.09 Include List - Where indicated on drawings by AlUlPinium Storefront Contractor. 1.10 Do Not Include - All items covered. by Mechanical. 1.11 Standards of Quality - Airline Products Co., The Airolite Co., Arroi, United, American Warming and Ventilating Co., Ruskin. 1.12 Clean Up - Per contract conditions. 2.01 Materials - A. Furnish horizontal adjustable aluminum blade louvers, Model T663, size as indicated on the drawings as manufactured by Airolite or approved equal. Louver shall be 4" deep, 45 degree blade angle, 5" centers (blade spacing), chain operated, baked enamel finish. B. Provide all required fasteners. PART 3 INSTALLATION: 3.01 Installation - A. Install per manufacturer's recommendations in aluminum frFune system. B. Coordinate setting of louver with other trades. Set plumb, level and in proper alignment with adjacent work. Use concealed anchorages wherever possible. END OF SECTION 1020 10209108 BHA10-89 1020-01 ��C,E.: Refer to Section 0I80 for explanation of abbreviated specification format. PART 1 GENERAL: 1.01 Scog - Provide. 1,02 Alternate Bid - See 0110. 1.03 Unit Price - None, 1,84 Shop Drawing - Required. 1.05 Samples - Not required, 1.06 Guarantee - Per contract conditions. 1,07 Standards - Per contract conditions. 1.08 Testing - Not required. 1.08 Include List - Where indicated on drawings. 1.10 Do Not Include - Installation by 8810. 1.11 Standards of Qualit - Peucu & American Locker. 1.12 Clean - Per contract conditions. 2.01 Materials - A. Public lookers shall be Vanguard Staourd, #6233V, double tier lockers, as manufactured by Peoco or approved equal. Pro,iGe built-in grooved key lock for each looker. B. Staff lockers shall be Invincible Athletic Locker, single tier lookers, 46113A Cully ventilated, as manufactured by Peoco or approved equal, for padlocks, C. Basket Racks ahuII be #65930, 40''YJx 13-3/16'`D z 79"B, with 32 basket capacity, as manufactured by Peuuo, or approved equal (16 required). Provide number plates on the Racks from 001 to 512. D. Baskets shall be #09646 8, S"W x 13''D x 8"B, as manufactured by Peoco, or approved equal (512 required). Provide number plates on the Baskets from 001 to 512. Baskets shall be chrome plated finish. PART 3 INSTALLATION: 3.01 Installation - By 0610, A. Install per manufacturer's recommendations. B. Install lockers on poured concrete base. C. Install basket racks bolted together in each Basket Room as follows: l. Two groups of two racks fastened end to end. 2. One group of four racks fastened end to end and aide by side. END OF SECTION 1050 10509108 DIB\18-80 IO50-01 1052 - FIRE PPMECTION SPECIALTIES REFERENCE: Refer to Section 0180 for explanation of abbreviated specification format. PART 1 GENERAL: 1.01 Scope - Provide and install. 1.02 Alternate Bid - See 0110, 1.03 Unit Price - Not required. 1,04 Shop Drawing - Required. 1.85 Sampl - Not required.. 1.06 {uarand e - One year. 1.07 Standards - NIFPA 10, UL approved. 1.08 Testing - Not required. 1.09 Include List - Required inspection and maintenance tagging. 1.10 Do Not Include - Does not apply. 1.11 Standard of Qualit - Larueu/e and J. L. Industries. 1,12 Clean - Not required. 2.01 Materials - Iarseo's - Extinguisher and Mounting Bracket. A. Extinguisher - MP10 (44-60B:C) 10 pounds. B. Bracket Model B-2 3tazxdaux} PART 3 EXECUTION: 3.01 Install in locations shown oudrawings. (One in each 6oiIdiog). Provide all necessary fasteners, nnobors, etc. required for installation and install in accordance with oatiuCucturcr'a recommendations. END OF SECTION 1052 10529108 1O52-81 1080 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES REFERENCE: Refer to Section 0180 for explanation of abbreviated specification format. • . • 91 � •. 1.01 Sco - Provide and install. 1.02 Alternate Bid - See 0110. 1.03 Unit Price - None. 1.04 Shop Drawing - Catalog cuts and installation of drawings. 1.05 Samples - Not required. 1.06 Guarantee - Per contract conditions. 1.07 Standards - Per contract conditions. 1.08 Testing - Not required. 1.09 Include List - A. As scheduled below or shown on drawings. B. Compact baby changing station. 1.10 Do Not Include - None. 1.11 Standards of Quality - Bradley. 1.12 Clean Up - Does not apply. 2.01 Materials - Bradley product numbers are indicated. A. Furnish the following for toilet room 110: 1. Mirror, frameless #430 bright annealed stainless steel, 16" x 20 ", with 1/4" masonite backing. 2. Grab bars, #040 and #001, 24 ". 3. Soap dispenser. Provide one new wall mounted dispenser for each two lays to match existing dispensers to be removed from existing Bathhouse and reused in Shower Rooms. 4. Toilet tissue holder, #522. 5. Handicapped shower seat (shower room), 18 "W x 15- 1 /2 "D, #U934T as manufactured by AJ Washroom Accessories. 6. Compact Baby Changing Station, koala Bear Flare, as manufactured by JBL Industries, Inc., Vadnais Heights, Minnesota. 7. Chrome towel hooks, B -677 polished stainless steel, Bobrick or approved equal (20 thus). •_U -►4-_ K_r_ _ • 3.01 Installation A. Coordinate with 0610 for blocking and rough openings. B. Install per manufacturers recommendations. C. Provide all clips and mounting brackets as required for installation. D. Install mirrors with appropriate mounting screws to suit individual field conditions as per manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 1080 10809108 BHA10 -89 1080 -01 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 10/31/89 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15010 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1... CONDITI.ON.S. OF- THE - CONTRACT 1.1 The Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other conditions), and the General Require (Section of Division 1) are hereby made a part of this Section. 1.2 The Articles contained in this section may delete. modify, or add to the provisions of the Conditions of the Contract and shall take precedence over the Conditions of the Contract. 2.0 GENERAL 2.1 The work under this section of the snecifications consists of f urnishing all labor, ecTuipmen t and materials necessary for and reasonably i to the complete installation of the Mechanical Systems as herein described and indicated on. the drawings. including such minor details not specifically mentioned or shown as may be necessary to complete the syste'7•'. ready for successful operation and subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. All work under this division shall be done in accordance with the best - modern practice, using first crrade equipment and material new and previously unused, unless specifically indicated otherwise. 2.2 The drawings are diagrammatic in nature and not intended to show exact locations. Contractor shall coordinate installation with other documents and on-site conditions. 2 .3 It is the intent of the Plans and Specifications to forr a Guide for a complete installation. Everything necessary for the completion and successful operation of the work, whether or not herein definitely specified or indicated on the drawings, shall be furnished ara installed as well as faithfully as if so specified or indicated without additional cost to the Owner. Mechanical Contractor shall verify all dimensions and lengths prior to installation. 2.4 Wherever a question exists as to exact intention of the documents, obtain instructions from the A/E before nroceedinq with the work. Should the drawings disagree in themselves or with the specifications, the better quality or greater quantity of work or materials shall be provided as determined by the Engineer. MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 15010 - 1 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 10/31/89 3.0 ELECTRICAL WORK 3.1 All line voltage power wiring (120 volts or higher) will be furnished, installed and connected by the Electrical Contractor under Division 16. This Contractor shall provide the Electrical Contractor with factory wiring diagrams of mechanical equipment furnished under Division 15. 3.2 All electrical components, wiring, and devices furnished under Division 15 shall conform to the latest revision of the NEC and to Division 16 of this specification. This Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing such equipment and components to operate on the voltaae characteristics as specified under the electrical division. 4.0 CODES, FEES AND PERMITS 4.1 Comply with the requirements of the State and Local codes. Secure all permits and licenses requirecl fL'c the installation of this work, and pay all fees incidental thereto including water and sewer hook up charges, deposits and sewer availability charges (SAC). 4.2 Furnish equipment and supplies that meet the following Standards: Laws of the State Plumbing Codes of the State. Local Ordinances and Regulations. National Board of Fire Underwriters (TTFPr' Testina Code of the American Societv of Mechanical Engineers (A"SME). State Enerav Code. American Society for Testing Materials (AASTI-1). HUD - Minimum Property Standards. Uniform Building Code. Am erican Society of Heating, Refrigeration, Air Conditioning Engineers (AISHRAE). Occupational Safety and Health 'Act (OSHA). 5.0 PAVEMENT, SIDEWALK, SOD AND LANDSCAPING REPLACEHENT 5.1 The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for the replacement of existing sod, street pavement, curbs, sidewalks or other situations removed or danlaqed by hi-t; in the course of the Mechanical Work, not scheduled for replacement under the Contract. 6. SPECIAL A"I.T CONDITIONS 6.1 Each bidder shall examine the site and fa--riliarize himself with all the existing conditions and limitations MECHA'Al"TICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 15010 - 2 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 10/31/39 before subyr-ittina a proposal. I extras will be allowed because of the Contractor's misunderstanding as to the amount of work involved or his lack of knowledge of any existina condition with the work. 0 MATERIALS _S,U.B�STITUTTOITS. 7.1 Where any equipment or materials are specifically named, the Contractor shall base his proposal on that item. The Contractor may, at his option, list on a separate sheet alternate items, subject to the conditions stated herein, along with specific identification of the ite-,,Il - as to the specification paragraph, and charaes in this proposed project price. On major pieces of equipment acceptable alternate manufacturers have been listed as equal from which Contractor may choose for his alternate prices. The list shall be submitted with. and 1 1:)ecore part of, the Contractors proposal. 7.2 The Owner with A/E approval may select items sun-pliv-d by any manufacturer listed, and the Contractor aarees to furnish and install such items as selected for a contract price equal to the bid price stated adjusted by the difference between the sum of the installed oric�:s for all specified items - and the sun of the installed prices for the items selected by the owner. 7.3 Where any equipment or materials is referred to by the*� trade name, or other specific manner, followed by the clause, "or approved equal", it is understood to refer to the grade or quality required uired and is not intended to eliminate other equally desirable equipment or materials, which would meet the requirements of the specifications and approval of the Engineer. Approval of such material is subject to submitted shoe drawincrs. 7.4 This Contractor shall pay, provide, install and be responsible for extra materials required by himself or any other trade due to this Contractor's USEE-1- of alternate approved equipment which has installation requirements different than the specified equipment. This Contractor shall pay other trades for any eortra work they are involved in due to this substitution of equipment. He shall also be responsible and shall pay for any re-desian work associated with the installation requirements of the substituted equipment, orovidinQ either revised drawincrs or sketches prepared by him or the Engineer. All re- design work shall be approved by the Engineer. 8.0 WARRANTY /GUAR ANTEE 8.1 The Contractor shall assume resnonsibilitv for anv defects which may develop in any part of his work caused MECHAFICAAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 15010 - 3 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 10/31/89 by faulty workmanship, material or equipment, and aarees to replace, repair, or alter, at his expense, may such faulty workmanship, material, or equipment that has been brought to his attention during a neriod of one (1) year from the date of the final certificate of navment. ,-cceptance of the work shall not waive this auarantee. 8.2 Defects of any kind due to faulty work or materials appearing during the above mentioned period must be immediately made good by the Contractor at his own expense to the entire satisfaction of the Owner and Enaineer. Such reconstruction and repairs shall include all damage to the finish or furnishings of the building_ resulting from the original defect or repairs thereto. 8.3 This guarantee shall not apply to darn.aaes occurrina after final accentance and due to wind, fire, violence, abuse or carelessness of other Contractors or tl' employees or the agents of the Owner. 8.4 This guarantee shall not apply where other auarantees for greater lengths of time are specifically called for. 9.0 SHOP DRAWINGS 9.1 The Contractor shall provide a minimum of seven (7) sets of approved, stamped and bound collated shop dra.winus for all systems and equipment furnished under This Division or as indicated otherwise in the indivi6 sections of the specifications. Two sets of sho-) drawings will be retained by the A'Architect/Enaineer after final approval. 9.2 The shop drawings shall be properly labeled as to contractor, project, subject, manufacturer's nain.e, etc., with catalog numbers, features, dimensions, etc., clearly indicated and pointed out. 10.0 CORRELATION OF WORK 10.1 Consult the Drawinas and Specifications of electrical and other trades for correlating information and layout work so that it will not interfere with other trades. Verify all dimensions and conditions, i.e., finished ceiling heights, footinas and foundation elevations. bearn, depths, etc., with the architectural and structural drawings. If conflicts occur such that resolution is not possible by the affected trades on the job, notify the Architect/Engineer so that the proper changes can be made to avoid extra cost to the Owner. Where work must be replaced due to failure of the Contractor to verify the conditions existing on the job or due to failure to coordinate with other trades in a timely manner, such replacement must be accomplished by this Contractor at. MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 15010 - a BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 10/31/89 no extra cost to the Owner. This shall apply to shoe fabricated work as well as to work fabricated in place. 11.0 EOUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 11.1 Pinina and duct connections to equipment shown on Drawinas are typical for the style and - ..model of a particular manufacturer. Changes in piping, ductwork connections, pump impellers, and electrical to suit actual installed types shall be made with no additional cost to the Owner. 12.0 PROTECTION 12.1 Protect all openings and all equipment where set, by coverina to prevent obstruction to pipes, breal -acre, misuse or disfigurement of equipment. Immediately cover all openings in equipment upon uncratina or receipt at the job site until permanent connection is made. 12.2 The Contractor is resnonsible for anv damaai� to the plumbing Pines or fixtures and shall keen clean all materials installed by him until acceptance of the entire building by the Owner. 13.0 MANNER.11OF.. RUNIT,.INGI-I PIPING ---AND --I DUCTWORK 13.1 All pipina and ductwork shall be run in the most direct., straiaht and mechanical manner and everywhere nroPeT crraded. Offsets in vertical pipe will be allowed only when unavoidable. All pipe connections shall be so Made as to allow for perfect freedom of move of the pipina during expansion without sprincrina. 13.2 Coordinate work with that of all other trades, properly crrounina piping with other pipes. Run pipes as srovTn the drawings, but the Engineer reserves the t i t r o make slight changes in runs to avoid interf�rerc- r other work or structural conditions without extra charcre by the Contractor. Coordinate location of pipes and their hanaer points with other trades such that the maximum weight imposed on any one bar Joist sha n exceed 25 lb per lineal foot of bar joist. END OF SECTION MECH J,TT("L GEJ%TERAL PROVISIONS 15010 - 5 1.1 General Provisions (Section 15010) are hereby made a part of this Section. 2.0 CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS AND PADS 2.1 All concrete foundations, pads and pits Will be provided by the Division 15 Contractor, and shall be responsible for the proper size and death inc-ludina all necessary anchor bolts, tie plates, etc. 3.0 PAINTING 3.1 This Contractor shall also be res for the touch -up painting of all ecruipment provided under this Division. Any equipment or annaratus (71a - T e d' scratched, or defaced during shipment or installat . shall be touched-up with kits of the proper color furnished by the equipment manufacturer. 4.0 CLEANING 'ND FINISHING 4.1 After all tests have been made and accepted, the Mechanical Contractor shall cro over the whole lob and clean fixtures, pipes, fittings and other eal-iii)7nen" C installed by him, leaving the entire area in a clear and complete working order. 5.0 CUTTING "ND PATCHING All cutting of existing conditions and all patchinci required to install any portion of this work or to correct defects in work shall be the resnonsibilitv of this Contractor. Patching will be don .a- in a rna n n, r 1: c match existing construction, 5.2 All cutting and patching shall be carefully done under the direction of the A/E. Damage caused throucTh neal-ect of this clause shall be made good by this Contractor. 6. INSTRUCTION MANUALS 6.1 Upon substantial completion of this project, Droject, and before final acceptance, this Contractor shall furnish to the Owner two (2) copies of a complete manual fl-111V describing the construction, installation, operation, and maintenance of each piece of equipment and system installed under this contract. Each manual shall be bound in a looseleaf binder with a plastic leather 11ECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 1 BATHHOUSE 10/31/89 the front indicatincf 1. Mechanical operation and Maintenance Instructions and Parts List. 2. Project Name. 3. Date. A. Contractor's Name, Address, and Telephone Number. The manuals shall consist of sections tabbed and labeled according to systems, and shall include wiring diaarams, valve charts, control diagrams, shop drawincrs, spare parts lists, and manufacturer's oneration and maintenance manuals with -names and telephone numbers of parts suppliers. 7.0 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING -, � :M_ .... . ------- 7.1 All excavating and backfillincr for 'underground pinina shall be done by this Contractor. All work shall be carefully protected from injury due to frost, water or other causes, and any work shall be promni:lv and properly repaired. 7.2 After underaround work has been inspected and annroved, the work shall be covered with frost-free earth around piping and sand thoroughly tamped and compacted. 7.3 All backfill up to the top of piping shall be fr of rocks and shall be tamped around the pipe. Rack-F' - 11 ul: to two (2) feet of cover over the nine shall be nlace� by hand and tamped, being careful not to disturb the pine. Backfill from a point two (2) feet above the top of the pipe to grade shall be placed in - maxin-nium... 12 layers and compacted to a density equivalent of 95* oroctor density. Density tests shall big made in sufficient number that the compaction meets the requirements of these specifications. /8 T 8.1 All plumbing work shall be inspected, tested and approved as required by the Local and State Plunbina Inspector, and Department of Health. Test shall be made in the presence of the proper inspector or their duly authorized representative and he shall furnish the Engineer with a certificate. UNIONS 9.1 On inlet and outlet of all anparatus or equipment having screwed and/or soldered connections, 2" and smaller. MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND 14ETHODS 15050 - 2 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE , MINUESOTA 10/31/89 9.2 Malleable iron unions with ground joint brass to iron seat, ANSI 150 lb, black or cralvanized, Grinnell 46 Stockham, 694. 10.0 DIELECTRIC UNIONS 10.1 Where dissimilar metal piping materials come in contact, except for the use of valves, isolate from each other with dielectric couplings. Lines 1-1/2" and smaller shall have universal insulating unions type 2000 series, style No. 3 and 4. Lines 2" and larger shall have insulatina flanges, and larger lines shall have insulating flanges having one brass component and one steel component as manufactured by Service Engineers, Inc., Fort Worth, Texas. 11.0 N I PP LE S 11.1 Nipples shall conform to the requirements of U.S. Department of Commerce Commercial Standard CS-5 - "Pine Nipples7 Brass, (onner, Steel and Wroucht Iron". Use nipples from packages which bear manufacturer's label or tag reading: "Guaranteed Pine Nipples Confor-i-Ino to CS-5 Made From New Pipe" or other words to this effect. 11.2 Make nipples of same material and weight as nine where- on used. 11.3 Floor, wall and ceiling plates for lincoveri:- pips through finished area shall be provided, except within closed cabinet work. Plates shall be chrome plated and have raised edges to accommodate extended sleeves. 12.0 STRAINERS 12.1 Install strainers where indicated on the olans. Strainer shall be Y—pattern type, cast iron or semi -steel (bronze when installed on conner or brass pipe), pressure rated for intended service. Strainers shall have standard brass screen, crasketed machin 6 flanaed cap with threaded blowdown opening, valved to the nearest floor drain. Strainers shall be scr,zwed for sizes 2" and smaller and flanaed for 2-1/2" and laraer. Strainer to have mini-mum effective strainina ratio four_ to one. Strainer shall be by Mueller, C.M. Bailev, Arm.strona. 1 3... Q B 7 A C K F L-10 W - I PREVENTION 13.1 Provide safety devices such as vacuu-m breakers and backflow prevention valves as required by code to prevent contamination of drinking water sunply system. MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 3 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE , MINNESOTA 10/ 31 / 8 9 14.0 VALVES 14.1 Furnish and install all valves indicated on the drawings and as required to sectionalize control valves. individual aroups of risers; and n 1 umnb i n a fixtures. All valves shall be concealed T,-Then in finished room areas, and shall be located in an accessible position through access panels furnished by the General Contractor. 14.2 The valves shall be Gate, Globe, Check or Plucr Type as .indicated with brass bodies, bronze trim, and designed for a working pressure of 125 lbs. per square inch. Valves 2" and under shall have brass or bronze bodies with sweat fitting ends. Gate valves shall have rising stems. Globe valves shall have rising stems. 14.3 These valves shall be Crane, Nibco-Scott or Hammond with the name, size and manufacturer's na_r.e clearly stamped on each valve. 15.0 ROOF JACKET 15.1 Vent stacks from sewer, soil, waste and drain pines shall be extended at least 12" above the roof, and shall be encased in galvanized iron frost -proof - jackets, Moore or equal, each having an air space of at least 1" between the outside surface of the pine and the inside surface of the frost jacket. The top of the frost jacket shall be desianed so as to permit the insertion therein of a testing plug of such form that it can be readily seen until removed; and said nlua shall be removed at once, after a final inspection has been made and anoroved by the Engineer. The vent pipe shall be cast iron where same passes through roof slab. The minimum size of any vent passing throijah the roof shall be 2". 16.0 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 16.1 This Contractor shall furnish and install all nine hangers and supports as required to install all lines under his contract. The hangers shall be of proper strength and placed on the correct centers to support the lines with no saaaina. Any additional steel members required to run the pipes where indicated on the drawinas shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor. 17.0 FLOOR, WALL, _AND CIE I L I1 -PLAT-E.S. 17.1 Where uncovered, exposed pines pass through walls or floors of finished rooms, they shall be fitted with wall or floor plates. wherever projecting sleeves MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 4 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE , MINNESOTA. 10/31/89 occur, the Mates shall have a raised hood desian to cover the sleeves. 18.0 CLEANOUTS .18.1 Full sized brass screw plua cleanout plugs shall be furnished and installed at the foot of all soil waste stacks and at all points where shown on drawings and where necessary to permit the entire drainage system to be rodded out easily. Provide cleanouts at every turn in the sink wastes. Cleanouts appearing in finished floors shall be with polished N.B. Cover and shall finish flush with the finished floor. Cleanouts in walls shall be covered with a flush relate with center screw, with C.G. cover. Soil and waste piping run in the earth under the floor slab shall have cleanouts of double eighth bends and finish flush with floors. All cleanouts must be in accessible positions and not over 50 feet apart. 19.0 FLOOR All floor drains provided under this contract shall be of Josam, J.R. Smith, Zurn, or Wade Manufacture and shall be of type, material and construction indicated. Provide lead flashing for all drains in structural slabs above grade. 19.2 Floor drain shall be Josam #30602-A cast iron body with integral trap and Nickoloy strainer. 20.0 HOS-El" BI-IB 20.1 Furnish and install Josam, Woodford, or "41urn 3/4" brass non-freeze similar to Josam #71150 outside hose faucets where shown on the drawings. Set sill cocks approximately 2'-0" above grade unless directed otherwise. Conceal supply lines where nossibl_r and -provide drain cock for each faucet. The Contractor shall notify Owner as to what drain valves shall be shut and lines drained to prevent freezing. END OF SECTION MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 5 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 10/31/89 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15060 PIPE AND PIPE FITTING CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 1.1 Refer to Section 15010 Mechanical General Provisions and Section 15050 Mechanical Basic Materials and Methods. GENERAL 2.1 All pipes shall be run with proper grades to provide for easy draining. They must be thoroughly reamed and cleaned before installation. Pipes run overhead shall be placed as close to the ceilings as possible to maintain proper headroom and to present a neat appearance, all consistent with the correct pitching of pipes. Piping shall be run as shown on the drawings. Except for piping run in equipment rooms, all piping shall .-)e concealed unless specifically indicated other wise on the drawings. 2.2 Consult manufacturer's data and the large scale details of rooms containina plumbing fixtures on the Architectural drawings before roughing -in piping. Plug or cap pipina immediately after installation. Minimum size of all water piping shall be 1/2" except for short stubs immediately at fixtures. Armaflex pipe insulation shall be used where piping passes through fram-els. 2.3 All screw threads must be tapered and proportioned in accordance with the regulations formally adopted by the manufacturers of wrought iron pipe and boiler fittings. All threads must be cut true and sharp and threaded joints shall be put together and made tight with graphite. 2.4 Pipe welding shall comply with the provisions of the latest revision of the applicable code, -whether ASME Boiler Construction Code, ANSI Code for Pressure Piping, or such state or local requirements as may supersede codes mentioned above. PIPE & FITTING SCHEDULE ACCORDING TO TYPE OF SERVICE 3.1 Water Underground Pipe - 2-1/2" and smaller - Type,/K,coipper with flared water works type fitting. Pipe - 3" and larger - Class 150 cast iron cement lined, ASA specification A21.4 Fittings - Class 250 pipe. Joints - Mechanical joint with lead tipped rubber PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 15060 - 1 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 10/31/89 or push on joints with conductive rubber gaskets or outside strapping 3.2 Domestic cold water and hot water above around (inside building) Pipe - Type L hard temper copper pipe. Fittinas - 1" and smaller - cast bronze solder type or wrought solder type. Fittings - 1-1/4" and larger - wrought solder type. Solder - 95/5 for all domestic water piping. The use of galvanized steel pipe for 3" and larger is optional. Pipe - 3" and larger schedule #40 galvanized steel pipe. Fittings - 3" and larger standard galvanized malleable. 3.3 Sanitary Waste, Sewer, Underaround _(Inside BuijALncr) Pipe - Service weight cast iron soil pipe. Fittings - Service weight cast iron soil pipe. Joiy.ts - Lead and Oakum or Tyseal Neoprene Gasket. 3.4 Sanitary Sewer Underaround (0 ' d - e utsi -- Buil ' di '- n - q Pipe - 12" or less standard strength vitrified clay sewerpipe ASTM-C13, or service weight cast iron. Pipe and fittings - over 12" - extra strength vitrified clay sewer pipe ASTM C-200. Joints - Hot pour type or Tyseal Neoprene Gasket. The use of PVC plastic pipe and fittings shall be approved if allowed by the local codes having jurisdiction. PVC pipes and fittings shall not be used in suspended ceiling air plenums. 3.5 Waste,__Vent and Sewer Above Ground. Pipe - Schedule #40 galvanized steel. Fittings - Black cast iron drainage fittings. The use of hubless cast iron pipe with hubless fiftinas and stainless steel clamps installed and supported as per manufacturer's recommendation in lieu of specified galvanized steel is approved. The use of PVC plastic pipe and fittings shall be approved if allowed by the local codes having jurisdiction. PVC pipes and fittings shall not be used in suspended ceiling air plenums. 3.6 Gas (Inside Building). Pipe - Black steel schedule #40. Fittings - Exposed pipe up thru 2" - 150# black malleable screwed fittinas, or welded fittings. Fittings - 2-1/2" and larger, concealed piping and tunnel piping - standard weight welded fittings. 3.7 Gas (outside Building) Pipe - Black steel schedule #40 coated and wrapped PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 15060 - 2 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 10/31/89 with "Sc.otch wrap". Fittings - Standard weight welding fittings coated and wrapped. 4.0 PIPE INSULATION 4.1 Insulate all hot and cold water pipes with fiberglass insulation according to the following schedule: Insulation Thickness Pipe Size 1-1/4" 1- 1/2 " -2" 2 -1/2" Cold Water 1/2" 3/ Hot Water below 150 dearees F. 1/2" 111 1-1/2" Hot water above l 150 degrees F. l it it 1-1/2" Z' END OF SECTION PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 15060 - 3 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 10/31/89 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL S-EC'1TI-ON-.'-' 210-01 WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM 1-1,110 CONDITI.ONS.10,F...--THIE. COITTR CT 1.1 Refer to Section 15010 Mechanical General Provisions and Section 15050 Mechanical Basic Materials and Methods. 2.0 SCOPE 2.1 This Section includes all labor, ecruip skills and tools necessary to furnish and install the water supply system. 2.2 Pipes, valves, fittings, equipment, pipe hangers and supports as required by any and all eauinment indicated in these Specifications and Drawings. 3.0 SHOCK ABSORBER AND AIR CHAMBERS 3.1 Hot and cold water supply pipes serving all fixtures shall terminate with an approved air chamber or shock absorber to suppress water hammer. Air chamber shall be type, sized and located as required by state or 1.)c plumbing codes. 3.2 Shock absorbers shall be by Zurn, Josam, Wade or approved equal. 4.0 VACUUM BREAKERS AND AIR GAPS 4.1 Water supply connection to fixtures or eaui which have submerged inlet or inlets which are below the spill line of the fixture or equipment. s 1), a I - ". ' r, e provided with an an vacuum breaker device or air gap arrangement as required by code. 5.0 GAS WATER HEATER 5.1 Remove and relocate two (2) existing water heaters in the existing bath house and re-install the same two (2) water heaters in the new bath house. Reuse the existing hot and cold water manifolds connected to both water heaters, also re-use existing 3-way mixers as shown in the plan. Piping pincr connection of the relocated water heaters to be the same as it was connected in the existing bath house. .0 STERILIZATION OF WATER -PIPTNG 6.1 Upon completion of the new domestic cold and hot WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM 15200 - 1 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE. MINNESC)TA 10/31./S9 water systems, and in accordance with the State Plumbina Code, this Contractor shall sterilize these systems with chlorine before they are placed in operation. The amount of chlorine applied shall be such as to provide a dosage of not less than 50 parts per million. Following a contact period of not less than 24 hours, the heavily chlorinated water should be flushed. from the system with clean water until the residual chlorine content is not greater than 0.2 parts per million. All valves in water lines being_ sterilized shall be opened and closed several times durini the eight hour period. 6.2 All sterilization work shall be oerforred in a manner and with methods such as to meet the approval of the-� State Board of Health. END OF SECTION WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM 15200 - 2 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 10/31/29 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 1 1-5- 4 5-0 PLU,MB ING - F - IXTURES 1.0 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 1.1 Refer to Section 15010 Mechanical General Provisions and Section 15050 Mechanical Basic Materials and Methods. 2 1-.1-01 SC-Qlp-E' 2.1 This Section includes all labor, eauipmient, skills and tools necessary to furnish and install the olumbina fixtures, trim., miscellaneous brassware. etc. 3.0 MANUFACTURERS 3.1 Plunbina fixtures and tri as manu 1 ) , 7 American Standard, Crane, Kohler, Eljer, Chicaao Faucet, Oasis, Haws, Halsey-Tavlor, Moen, Delta, Elkay are approved equal. 4.0 PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE 4.1 Refer to the Plumbinq Fixture Schedule on the Drawinas for Models and descriptions of all plumbincr fixtures. END OF SECTION PLUMBING FIXTURES 15450 - 1 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 10/31/89 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15800 VENTILATION 1.0 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 1.1 Refer to Section 15010 Mechanical General Provisions and Section 15050 Mechanical Basic Materials and Methods. 2.0 GENERAL 2.1 The system as specified shall include all ductwork, registers dampers, exhaust fans and equipment herein specified, mentioned or shown on the drawings and shall be furnished and installed in place, connected up, and ready for normal operation. 3.0 TESTING & ADJUSTING THE VENTILATION SYSTEMS 3.1 Adjustment shall be done by properly setting all dampers to obtain the required air flow as shown on the drwgs. Any additional dampers which may be required to get proper air supply and quantity, shall be furnished by this Contractor at no expense to the Owner. 4.0 DUCTWORK 4.1 All sheet metal ductwork shall be constructed of galvanized sheet steel of the best grade "Wheeling" brand, heavily galvanized and of gauge indicated below. WIDTH IN INCHES GAUGE 0 12 #26 13 30 #24 31 60 #22 61 84 #20 Equipment housing #16 Reinforcing shall be in accordance with SMACNA low pressure duct. 4.2 All ductwork must be made practically air tight. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to order any open seams that may be present made tight by soldering and riveting. Ducts shall be sufficiently braced to prevent vibration or sagging. All panels over 10" wide- or deep shall be cross-broken for strength. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to order additional bracing if he deems it necessary. All vertical ducts or risers shall be self-supporting and shall be complete in themselves. No single partitions VENTILATION 15800 - 1 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 10/31/89 between ducts will be allowed. 4.3 All major horizontal ducts shall be rigidly and securely supported in an approved manner with trapeze hangers formed of rods and angle iron under ducts on no greater than 4'-0" centers. The upper ends of hangers shall be securely fastened by an approved method. Hangers fastened to masonry construction shall be anchored with Phillips or Ackerman-Johnson shields, or approved equal. Furnish and install all structural steel supports required for ducts, fan units, etc. 4.4 All ductwork shall be run substantially as shown on the drawings with bends and curves of easy radius. Where possible, the inside radius shall not be less than the width of the duct. 4.5 Changes in size throughout shall be of perfect rectangular cross-section. The Architect /Engineer reserves the right to make minor changes in run of certain ducts without extra cost to the Owner if necessary to avoid unforeseen structural or other interference. 4.6 All fastening and hardware for galvanized ductwork and sheet metal work shall be cadmium plated; and screws, bolts, fastenings, etc., shall not penetrate duct. 5.0 DUCT INSULATION 5.1 All insulation work under this contract shall be done by personnel familiar with this class or work. All insulation work shall present a neat and workmanlike appearance. The lining shall be attached by means of an adhesive-mopped on to cover the entire metal surface. Exhaust ductwork a distance (3') from the roof opening shall be externally wrapped with one inch (1") thick blanket foil faced insulation. EXTERNAL BLANKET DUCT INSULATION A. Johns-Manville, R-6, 1-1/2" thick, FSK Facing, 1-2" Tab. B. Owens-Corning, ED 75, 1-1/2" thick, FRK-25, 1-2" Tab. C. Certain-Teed/St. Gobain, Type IV, thick, FKS, 1-2" Tab. EXTERNAL RIGID FIBERGLASS BOARD INSULATION A. Certain-Teed/St. Gobain, 1" thick, 3 lb. density Fiberglass Board, 1B-300 ASJ. B. Owens-Corning, 1" thick, 3 lb. density Fiberglass Board ASJ. VENTILATION 15800 - 2 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 10/31/89 C. Johns-Manville, 1" thick, 3 lb. density Fiberglass Board 814 APJ. 5.2 Duct Liner 1" thick, 3 lb. density coated fiberglass insulation, adhere, with coated side toward air stream, to all interior sides of the duct with a minimum 50% coverage of fire-resistant insulation bonding adhesive per manufacturer's recommendation. Adhesive shall completely cover the sheet metal at each end of each section of duct work and each butt end of insulation. When duct width idth exceeds 12" or height exceeds 24", further secure the liner to. these surfaces with mechanical fasteners at 16" O.C. Adhesive shall be equal to 3M-EC 1128. Mechanical fasteners shall be Graham Welding pins or Cherry Rivets or equal. Duct sizes shown on plans are inside dimensions and duct shall be increased to give same free area. Where duct work is acoustically lined, it does not have to be thermal covered. 6 DUCT ACCESSORIES 6.1 Gravity Backdraft Dampers Furnish and install backdraft dampers where indicated on the drawings. Dampers shall be Air Balance, or approved equal, made with steel frame and 26 gauge stiffened aluminum blades. Damper blades shall be steel with Oilite or bronze bearings. Damper blades shall have neoprene trim. Blades shall be securely linked together so they will operate simultaneously. 7.0 GRILLES, REGISTERS, DIFFUSERS 7.1 Grilles, registers and diffusers to be Hart & Cooley, of the type and size shown in the schedule on the plan. Barber-Colman and Krueger are approved equal. 8.0 EXHAUST FANS 8.1 Exhaust fans shall be by Greenheck or Acme, of the type and size req. as shown on the plans. Exhaust fan shall be provided with back draft damper. Duct of exhaust fan shall be insulated 3' from exterior wall or roof. END OF SECTION VENTILATION 15800 - 3 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 10/31/89 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION - 1601 1.0 GENERAL ELECTRICAL GENERIL PROVISIONS 1.1 The Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), and the General Requirements (Section of Division 1) are hereby made a part of this Section. 1.2 The Articles contained in this Section may delete, modify, or add to the Provisions of the Conditions of the Contract and shall take precedence over the Conditions of the Contract. CODES, FEES AND PERMITS 2.1 The complete electrical installation shall conformn to all of the requirements of the National Electrical Code and all a<)plicable state and local regulations and ordinances. 2.2 All service charges, fees, permits, licenses, etc., required in connection with the work of this Division, shall be secured by and paid for by this Contractor. 3.0 PAVEMENT, SIDEWALK, SOD AND LANDSCAPING REPLACEMENT 3.1 The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the replacement of existing sod, street pavement, curbs. sidewalks or other situations removed or damaged by him in the course of the Electrical Work, not scheduled for replacement under the Contract. 4.0 SPECIAL AND LOCAL CONDITIONS 4.1 Each bidder shall examine the site and familiarize himself with all the existing conditions and limitations before submitting a proposal. No extras will be allowed because of the Contractor's misunderstanding as to the amount of work involved or his lack of knowledge of any existincr condition in connection with the work. 5.0 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS 5.1 These specifications and corresponding drawings are intended to form a complete set of plans for the electrical work of this project and neither shall be considered complete without the other. Where an item is mentioned in one and not in the other, it shall be considered binding to this contract as though mentioned in both. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010 - 1 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 10/31/89 5.2 Where a question exists as to exact intention of the documents, obtain instructions from the Architect/ Engineer (A/E) before proceeding with the work. Should the drawinas disaaree in themselves or with the specifications, the better quality or greater quantity of work or materials shall be provided as determined by the Engineer, whose decision shall be final. 6.0 MATERIAL 6.1 When any material, device or equipment is followed by "or equal", no prior approval will be required. Approval of such substitution is subject to submittal of shop drawings. 6.2 When any material, device or equipment is specifically named without either the tern., "or equal", or "or approved equal", and no alternate product is listed. i substitution will be allowed, except where a specific Alternate bid is recruested in Section 16001 Base and Alternate Bids, or in any subsequent addendum. 6.3 Contractor may submit voluntary alternate bids with his proposal to substitute material or equipment not otherwise specified. Include sufficient information for Engineer's evaluation and comparison to the specified material or equipment. 6.4 The A/E will make recommendations reaardinc all alternate bids to the Owner for his acceptance or rejection. 6.5 When any material, device or equipment is followed by "or approved -equal", Contractor must obtain prior approval for any proposed substitution, by submitting a written request for approval, together with sufficient catalog and size information to show the equipment is comparable, to the Engineer five (5) working days before the hour of submission of Bids. All reauests will be studied by the A/E who will issue an addendum noting all prior approvals. All approvals are based on .general design and performance of equipment and final approval is subject to submittal of shop drawings. 6.6 No material, device or equipment shall be used by the Contractor in preparing his bid unless it was specif- ically specified without substitution; was specified as "or equal", has received "prior approval", or was included in an alternate bid accepted by the owner, following the procedure specified above. If no alternate bid is accepted by the Owner, the specified equipment shall be furnished. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010 - 2 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 10/31/89 6.7 This Contractor shall pay, provide, install and be responsible for extra materials required by himself or any other trade due to this Contractor's use of alternate approved equipment which has installation requirements different than the specified equipment. 6.8 Final approval of certain materials and equipment will be based on the manufacturer's shop drawings. The Engineer's approval of shop drawings for substitute materials shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from the drawings or specifications unless he has, in writing, called the- Engineer's attention to such deviation at the time of submission nor shall it relieve him of responsibility for error in the drawings. 7.0 SHOP DRAWINGS 7.1 The Contractor shall provide seven (7) sets of bound and collated shop drawings for all systems and equipment furnished under this Division or as indicated otherwise in the individual sections of the specifications. 7.2 The shop drawings shall be properly labeled as to Contractor, project, subject, manufacturer's name, etc., with catalog numbers, features, dimensions, etc., clearly indicated and pointed out. 8.0 TEMPORARY LIGHT, POWER, HEAT, TOILET AND WATER 8.1 Refer to Division 1, Special Conditions, of these- Specifications for requirements. 9.0 WORKMANSHIP 9.1 All work shall be performed in a neat and work manner by personnel experienced and skilled in the electrical trade. 10.0 CORRELATION OF WORK 10.1 Consult the Drawings and Specifications of mechanical and other trades for correlating information and layout work so that it will not interfere with other trades. Verify all footings and foundation elevations, beam depths, etc., with the Architectural and Structural Drawings. If conflicts occur such that resolution is not possible by the affected trades on the job, notify the Architect /Engineer so that the proper changes can be made to avoid extra cost to the Owner. Where work must be replaced due to failure of the Contractor to verify the conditions existing on the job or due to failure to coordinate with other trades in a timely ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010 - 3 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 10/31/89 manner, such replacement must be accomplished by this Contractor at no extra cost to the Owner. This shall apply to shop fabricated work as well as to work fabricated in place. 11.0 AS BUILT DRAWINGS 11.1 Contractor shall maintain one complete set of drawings on the site at all times and mark all field chances and deviations in red pencil." 12.0 GUARANTEE 12.1 The Contractor shall assume responsibility for any defects which may develops in any part of his work caused by faulty workmanship, material or equipment, and agrees to replace, repair, or alter at his own expense, any such faulty workmanship, material, or equipment that has been brought to his attention during a period of one year from the date of the final certificate of payment. Acceptance of the work shall not waive this guarantee. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010 - 4 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 10/311 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16100 ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND 1111ETHODS 1.0 COND1IT.IPN.S 1.1 General Provisions (Section 16010) are hereby made a part of this Section. 2.0 SCOPE 2.1 This Section includes all labor, materials, equip skills and tools necessary to install the basic materials of the electrical system. The work of this Section includes, but is not limited to the following: A. Raceways and Fittings B. Junction and Outlet Boxes C. Hangers & Supports D. Wire and Cable E. Wiring Devices 3.0 CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS 3.1 Foundations, anchor bolts, arout, shims, etc., required for properly placina any equipment furnished and installed under this Division, shall be provided by this Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise in the specifications or on the drawinas. Concrete shall conform to requirements of Division 3. 4.0 PAINTING 4.1 Paintincr shall be by others except where soecifier'" otherwise. All items shall be left clean and in paintable condition, except that this Contractor shall refinish and restore to its oriainal condition all electrical equipment which has sustained da-,rarie to th Manufacturer's prime or finish coat(s) of naint or enamel. 5.0 CLEANING 5.1 This Contractor shall clean all debris, surplus materials, etc., resulting from this work or oneration. He shall cro over the whole job cleaning fixture-s. panelbcards and other equipment installed by him leaving the job and equipment in a clean and first-rate condition. 6.0 CUTTING, P AND SEALING 6.1 The General Contractor will provide openings, chases and clearances in new construction where necessary to ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 16100 - 1 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 10/311/89 accommodate this work. It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to notify him in time of location and required sizes of all openinas, etc., so as to cause him no delay. 6.2 All cutting of existing cond electrical work shall be by craftsmen skilled in their fittings, and re Holes floors must be drilled without around holes. iticns required by t he this Contractor, usina trades for cutting: required to be cut in excessive breaking out 6.3 Seal off all conduit oveninas through fire rated slats. walls and ceilings using UL anDroved mat---r 4 als and methods to maintain a fire ratinas. Seal equipment or components exposed to the weather and nak�- watertight and insect proof. 7.0 MAINTENANCE BROCHURE 7.1 The Electrical Contractor shall prepare two complete maintenance brochures which shall cover all electrical systems and equipment furnished or installe-"' by him for this project. 7.2 Data shall be placed in 8-1/2" x 11" heavy duty three -ring binders. Data shall include a title Page complete table of contents, approved shop drawinas maintenance instructions, catalog brochure information and replacement parts list. 8.0 WIRING METHODS 8.1 All conductors shall be installed in metal race'-ways, with adequate means for expansion. The building has no heating system and inside temperatures will be -20 decrees fahrenheit during the winter. 8.2 Raceways shall be concealed in the wall corstrucr-icn and below the concrete slabs. Raceways installed above the 96" high internal walls shall be neatly installed on the truss members and run parallel to or at right angles to the trusses and walls. Use standoff tv'!:e supports so that all exposed raceways can be painted, (by others), and will not trap moisture. 8.3 Install drain tiles at low points for any run that could otherwise trap moisture. 8.4 All raceways in the existing pool equipment room shall be exposed. 9.0 MATERI AND EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 16100 - 2 BATHHOUSE NET4 HOPE, MINNESOTA 10/31/89 9.1 All materials and equipment ruipment shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., except where no standards have been established for the particular material or equipment specified, and shall bear the U.L. Label. 10.0 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 10.1 Raceways shall be rigid metal (RMC), intermediate metal (IMC),electrical metallic tubina (EMT), flexible metal (FMC), flexible nonmetallic conduit (FNC). or rigid plastic (RPC) as manufactured by Republic, Jones & Laughlin, Youngstown, Gedney, Carlon, Can-Tex, Electroflex, or equal. 10.2 Fittings shall be of construction similar to the particular raceway, weathertight as required. Fittin shall be set-screw or compression type. indentor tvne fittinas are not acceptable. In addition to conduit manufacturers, fittings shall be as manufactured by O.Z., Raco, Efcor, Recral, Pyle-National Crouse-Hinds, or equal. 10.3 Conduit installation shall conform to the followina reauirements: A. Neat and orderly, perpendicular or parallel with building construction. B. Supported with non-corrosive metallic straps, clamps, or hangers. C. Coordinate routing with other trades. Conduit location is secondary to mechanical and aeneral construction elements of buildina. D. Concealed in all finished areas unless explicitly noted otherwise. E. Flexible metal conduit shall be used for conn- ections to all fixed appliances, motors. trans- formers, and All other vibrating equipj-.1enT:. Flexible metal conduit shall also be used for connections to recessed light fixtures and other branch circuit wiring as required for special an F. Use expansion fittings at expansion joints and where temperature chanaes cause excess exnansion. G. All conduit exposed to weather or in direct con- tact with concrete shall be RMC or IMC. H. All conduit concealed in or below concrete slab on crrade, or in masonry constriction within 24" of final grade shall be RMC, IMC or RPC. I. Aluminum conduit shall not be nermitted. J. Provide all trenching and backfill required, including surface restoration. 1 JU.N�CTI-ON.-. AND -,OUTLET - "BOXES , ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 16100 - 3 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 10/31/89 .1 Boxes shall be of craivani zed code aalicre steel as manufactured by Appleton, Steel City, Raco, or equal, and as follows: A. Minimum size 4 inch square or octagon by 1-1/2 inches deep. B. Mud, plaster or extension rings as required. C. Concealed except where explicitly noted otherwise. D. Locations coordinated with other trades. E. Supported independent of conduit system. F. Offset back-to-back boxes a minimum of 6". G. Type FS or FD for surface exterior applications. H. Masonry boxes sized to match bricks. I. Metal boxes used with metal raceway. J. Floor boxes - dual level concrete tight Class 2. 11.2 Hountina heiahts shall be as follows (Nominal): DEVICE FINISHED AREA Receptacles Exterior Receptacles 24 11 Light Switches 52" Telephone Outlets A. Desk type 12" B. Wall type 66?f Motor Starters 66 Thermostats 66" Push Buttons 52" Clock Outlets 7 1 -6 t v UNFINISHED AR FA 12" 52" 24" 52" 1 2 1-.1 0 MULTI-OUTLET ASSEMBLIES 52 11 66" 66 66 11 52" as noted 12.1 Assemblies shall be complete with all adapters, feed-in devices and elbows required for a complete installation, installed in accordance with Article 352 and 353 of the IJEC, as follows: Type - A1 Single receptacles ore-wired on a single 20 amp circuit - Wiremold type 20G. Typ2l-A-21- Same as type Al, except duplex recept- acles - Wiremold type 20DG. Typ.e.B_1. Single receptacles pre-wired on (2) 20 amp circuits - Wiremold type 20GA. Typel.-P1 Same as type Bl, except duplex around- ing type receptacles - Wiremold type 20DGA. The drawinas indicate the spacing of the outlets (in inches), i.e. A2-60, B1-30, etc. ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 16100 - al BATHHOUSE _13.10 CONDUCTORS NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 13.1 Aluminum conductors are expressly forbidden. 10/31/89 13.2 Conductors shall be soft drawn copper as manufactured by American, G.E., Cyprus, Cornish, National Electric, Rockbestoes, Pirelli, or equal to meet IPCEnA Specifications. Conductors shall conform to the followina: A. No. 12 minimum size, except for controls. B. Stranded for No. 8 and larger. C. Color coded. Colored wire for branch circuits and field marked for feeders. D. Feeder splices shall utilize hydraulic comp- ression connectors - Burndy, Ampact Taps, T & B. E. Branch splices shall utilize "Scotchlock" conn- ectors. F. Minimum conductor insulation shall be 600 volt type THHIXT for size #8 A.W.G. and smaller and type THW, THW11, THHN or XHHW for #6 and laraer chanae as req. for high ambient temperatures. 1 4-.0. WIRING 14.1 Devices shall be commercial grade as manufactured by Leviton; equivalent devices by Pass & Sey-moure, G.E. ' Sylvania, Hubbell and Arrow-Hart, or approved equal aS follows: A. Ivory color with smooth nylon plates. Round corner galvanized plates for surface installation, in service spaces. Stainless steel plates shall be used in food preparation areas. B. Toggle type switches, 15 amp, 120/277 volt #5501- 2. C. Duplex receptacles, 15 amp (20 as noted) 12 volt. 3-wire grounding type #5014. D. Pilot-switch combinations with neon pilot in toggle #57501. E. Clock outlets, 15 amp, 125 volts. Leviton #5261CH. F. Wet location covers for weatherproof devices. Heavy duty Bell Electric. G. GFI receptacles 20 amp, 125 volt, and 5 MA trip ratina where required by code. Leviton #6199. Use feed thru type where downstream receptacles need GFI protection. H. Dimmer switches - Lutron NOVA Series with separate de-buzzing coils for Edison Base larins larger than 150 watts. I. Special receptacles shall be as follows: (Dryer) (Rance) ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 16100 - 5 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE, NINNESOTA 10/31/89 120-208V 20 AMP 30 AMP 50 Allp 3-wire non NEMA 10-20R 10-30F 10-50R aroundincr type Hubbell #6810 #9350 #796" 208/240V NEMA 6-20R 6-30R 6_50R I-phase,3-wire Hubbell #5461 #9330 #9367 120/240 volt NEMA 14-20R 14-30R 14-50R 1-phase,4-wire Hubbell #3410 #9430 #9450 15.0 INSTALLATION AND WORKMANSHIP 15.1 All work shall be installed by skilled mechanics in a neat and workmanlike manner and shall be an by the A/E before final acceptance by the Owner. n sufficiently larae work force shall be emploved at all times, and shall be provided with the tools and equipment required to insure progress of the work of this Contractor at a rate comparable with the overall job proaress. 15.2 The conduit system shall be concealed in the buildina construction in all finished areas of the building except where specifically noted otherwise. Conduits for equipment, panelboards, wireways, etc., shall be run exposed in equipment room and unfinished areas. 1 1 6. - 0 IDENTIFICATI 16.1 Provide black and white laminated plastic enaraved nameplates with 3/16" minimum height characters for: A. All circuit protective devices located in service equipment, main distribution switchboari, main distribution panelboards, and meter centers, etc. B. Each panelboard, dry-type transformer, and m, control center (M.C.C.). C. Each switch or device built into control panels. 16.2 Provide 1/4" orange flexible plastic tape, I)y,-no Industries, or equal, havina 1/8" embossed leaends for individually mounted fused switches, disconnect switches, motor starters, relays, time clocks, and other control devices. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 16100 - 6 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 101/31/89 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16400 ELECTRICAL SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 1 COIN-PITIP-US 1.1 Refer to Section 16010 Electrical General Provisions and Section 16100 Electrical Basic Materials and Methods. 2.0 ELECTRIC SERVICE PROVISIONS 2.1 Furnish and install a new 120/208 volt 3 phase, 4 wire, secondary electric service from a new nad mounted transformer to replace the existina 120/240 volt 3-phase, 4 wire, open delta service from the existing pole mounted transformer as shown on the drawings and as specified herein. 2.2 The Local Power Utility Company (LPU Co.) will furnish and install the concrete pad and the pad—mounted transformer as well as all primary cables, and all final connection. Utility company will provide and install transformer crroundincr and will provide meters and current transformers for installation and connection by this Contractor. 2.3 Contractor shall initiate the request for service in a timely manner. 2.4 Contractor shall furnish and install the followina: A. Secondary service feeder from transformer to the main disconnect(s) and metering equipment. B. Main fused switch(es) and/or distribution switchboard and fuses. C. All service around connections. D. Meter sockets to meet the Utility Company requirements. E. Installation and connection of all direct readin(-, meters, CT cabinets, current transformers, - meters and test switches. 3.0 GF I OU - ND I NG - - S Y STEMS 3.1 Service entrance equipment, current transforre-rs. mater sockets, transformer cabinets, panelboards, metal raceway systems, neutral service conductor and all other permanently installed electrical equipment shall be solidly arounded in accordance with the National Electrical Code to form a continuous, permanent and effective crrounding system. ELECTRICAL SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 16400 - 1 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 10/31/39 3.2 The around bus built into the new main fused switch, shall serve as the building electrical system service aroundina point. Connect from same to the existina service grounding conductor. Size per NEC Tab-L-- #250-94 and provide an "additional electrode" per #250-81. existing bonding jumpers around water meter, and around fault relay to remain. Where the bare around wire is subject to physical damage, install wire in a rigid steel conduit. 3.3 The continuity of the grounding system shall be maintained throughout the entire raceway, cabinet and equipment enclosure system. Ground bushings and _Jumpers shall be used wherever normal conduit termination does not insure continuity. Where non-metallic conduit is used for distribution, a properly sized insulated grounding conductor shall be run in the conduit, and shall be properly bonded to equipment at each end of run. Conduit size shall be increased as needed. 1 parts of liahtina fixtures shall be bonded to conduit system with green ground wire. Plug strip shall positively arounded to conduit system. Non-self grounding receptacles shall be grounded to outlet.bo_-, with around piatail. Where switchboards, panellboards or meter centers consist of several sections, Daint sj be scraped off at points of bolting to insure grounding continuity. 4.0 MAIN FUSIBLE CLASS T SWITCH -250 VOLT 4.1 Provide a main fusible disconnect switch at the location shown on the drawing and as specified herein, 4.2 Main switch to be 250 volt, normal duty, multi-pole. with solid neutral assembly suitable for use as service entrance ecruinment when bonded to the main aroundina electrode. all switches shall be UL listed 'to withstand a 100,000 amp R14S symmetrical short circuit when compete with Class T rejection type fuses, have a voidable cover interlock and a NEMA 1 enclosure. 4.3 Provide hinged cover wireway or raceway to connect to the existina main 400 amp circuit breaker and around fault relay which shall remain. Main switch shall be clearly and permanently identified. 4.4 Provide spare fuses per Article 16400.7. 5_.0 P A N EL B 1 0 " 1 : 1 RD S- 5.1 Contractor shall furnish and install branch circuit panelboards of indicated construction, complete with all breakers and accessories required for a complete ELECTRICAL SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 16400 - 2 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 10/31/89 installation. 5.2 Branch circuit panelboards shall be type 00 Load Centers as manufactured by Square D, G.E., ITE, Westinahouse, Sylvania, Crouse Hinds, Cutler - Hammer, or approved equal. 5.3 All other panels shall be equal to Square D, NOO as indicated on the drawings. 5.4 Circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic, blues -on tvDe with a minimum rating of 10,000 A.I.C. full size breakers only. Multiple breakers. shall be common type. 6.0 DISCONNECT SWITCHES 6.1 Switches to be normal duty fusible type, and by sa-ne manufacturer as panels, as follows: 6.2 600 or 250 volt rated, multi-pole, with solid n;=utra! where required. 6.3 Fusible with quick-make and quick-break operation. horsepower rated, with voidable door interlock, 6.4 NEMA enclosure type as reauired by application. 6.5 Mount with ton at 78", or as noted. 7.0 FUSES 7.1 Fuses shall be as manufactured by Buss Gould- Shawmut or approved equal. Provide 10% spare fuses of each size and tv END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 16400 - 3 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 10/31/89 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16500 LIGHTING 1.0 CONDITIONS 1.1 Refer to Section 16010 Electrical General Provisions and Section 16100 Electrical Basic Materials and Methods. 2.0 LAMPS 2.1 Lamps shall be installed in all lighting fixtures unless specifically noted otherwise. 2.2 Lamps shall be as manufactured by G.E., Sylvania, Phillips, or approved equal, as follows, except where noted otherwise. 2.3 Incandescent lamps shall be inside frosted. 2.4 Fluorescent lamps shall be standard output, rapid start or slimline, warm white, except where noted otherwise. 2.5 Twin Tube Compact fluorescent (PL) lamps shall be manufactured by Sylvania, G.E. or Philips. 2.6 High output (800 M.A.) fluorescent lamps shall be Wari- Lite Deluxe energy saver type. 2.7 Mercury vapor lamps (MV) shall be "Warmtone" type with mogul base. 2.8 Metal halide lamps (MH) shall be the clear type with mogul base, manufactured by Sylvania, or Phillips. 2.9 High pressure sodium lamps (HPS) shall be clear type, except where noted otherwise. The lamp and ballast voltage shall be the highest available where a particular size lamp is manufactured in more than one voltage rating. 2.10 Low pressure sodium lamps (LPS) shall be manufactured by G.E., Thorn, or Phillips. 3.0 BALLASTS 3.1 Furnish and install ballasts in all fluorescent and "H.I.D." lighting fixtures and assemblies, manufactured by Advance, Universal, Jefferson, General Electric, or equal. 3.2 Fluorescent ballasts shall be Class "P", high power factor, "CMB" certified, "A" sound rating. All 2-lamp, LIGHTING 16500 - 1 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 10/31/89 425/430 M.A. ballasts shall be of the energy saver type, Advance Mark III or equivalent. 3.3 Contractor shall verify the ballast voltage.of all fluorescent and "H.I.D." lighting fixtures to match the branch circuit voltage prior to ordering fixtures. 3.4 Ballasts for all H.I.D. lamps shall be constant wattage, auto-transformer type, except where reactor or other type is specifically noted. Ballasts for metal halide lamps shall be lead-peak type. 4.0 LIGHTING FIXTURES 4.1 Contractor shall furnish and install light fixtures as indicated on the plans, complete with lamps And accessories necessary for a complete installation. The Contractor, the fixture supplier and fixture manufacturer shall be fully informed of the contents of each fixture description and are cautioned that the catalog nunbers only d o not necessarily include all components or features required. 4.2 Where a fixture allowance of a specific amount is indicated, it shall refer to the Contractor's actual invoiced cost without mark-up for overhead and profit. 4.3 All fixtures shall be firmly supported by structural members of the building. In areas without suspended ceilings, where truss construction is used, fixtures shall be mounted from the trusses. Where trusses are not located directly above the fixtures, support same with wooded members of sufficient strength set between the trusses and nailed or screwed firmly in place. Equal means of support shall be installed from wood joists, purlins, etc., where applicable. Support all fixtures and chandeliers which weigh in excess of 50 pounds directly from structure and not from suspended ceiling, or add #12 support wires to the ceiling as required to adequately support the fixtures. 4.4 All fluorescent fixtures in rows shall be hung level and in straight lines with fixtures butted tightly, and pendants spaced to meet fixture mfr's. specifications. Use jack chains only where specifically noted. 5.0 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 5.1 Provide photocell, time clock and/or relays as indicated on the drawings. - END OF SECTION LIGHTING 16500 - 2 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16700 TELEPHONE RACEWAY SYSTEM 1.0 CONDITIONS 10/31/89 1.1 Refer to Section 16010 Electrical General Provisions and Section 16100 Electrical Basic Materials and Methods. 2.0 TELEPHONE SERVICE PROVISIONS 2.1 Provide 1-1/4" RPC conduit(s) stubbed out of buildina 24" below grade and capped where shown on the drawings for Public Telephone Utility Company's (PTU Co-'s) direct burial underground cable. Stub up 12" AFF at the Main Telephone Terminal(s) MTT(S). 2.2 Provide arounding conductor to main electrical service aroundina point with size to meet PTU Co. requirements. 2.3 Coordinate the timing of PTU Co's cable installation with the site work and keep them informed as to the progress of the work. 3.0 TELEPHONE TERMINAL CABINETS 3.1 This Contractor shall provide 1/2" thick 24" wide x 48" high plywood backboard for main terminal (MTT). 4.0 TELEPHONE OUTLETS 4.1 The telephone wall outlets on stud walls or concrete walls will have a 4" x 4" x 2" outlet box with. a horizontal split cover plate with a 7/8" diameter hole in the center complete with vinyl arom-ni.et. Plates shall match the receptacle plates in the area. 4.2 Telephone outlets shall not be placed in a back-to-back oosition, but shall be seoarated bv a mini-mum of 12 inches horizontally. 5.0 TELEPHONE CONDUITS 5.1 Provide empty conduit with bushings for multiple telephone outlets as follows: A. One outlet B. Two outlets C. Three outlets 3/4" diameter 1" diameter 1-1/4" diameter TELEPHONE RACEWAY SYSTEM 16700 -1 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 10/31/219 5.2 Conduits shall be run to the main telephone te-ernminal, or shall be stubbed out of the wall above accessible suspended ceilinas, or into the unfinished service space just below the roof or floor. 5.3 Furnishing of telephone instruments, cable, jacks, etc. will be by others. END OF SECTION TELEPHONE RACEWAY SYSTEM 16700 -22 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 10/31/89 SECTION 16750 1.0 CONDITIONS PAGING/BACKGROUND MUSIC SYSTEM 1.1 Refer to Section 16010 Electrical General Provisions and Section 16100 Electrical Basic Materials and Methods. 2.0 SCOPE 2.1 This Section includes all materials, equipment, labor, skills and tools required to furnish and install a complete Paging/ Background Music system throughout the building and the outdoor pool area as specified herein and as shown on the drawings. 3.0 GENERAL 3.1 System shall include back boxes and wiring for a complete and satisfactorily operating single zone system consisting of microphone, speakers, cable, volume controls, and amplifier. 3.2 The system shall distribute signal from an available music source arranged by Owner and paging via a paging microphone to be located in the managers office and at the cashiers area. 3.3 Activating the paging shall mute the music. 4.0 PERFORMANCE - TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 4.1 The system shall be free of noticeable distortion, clipping, hum, buzz, hiss and other undesired signals when operated at required levels. 4.2 Constant voltage loudspeaker distribution shall be 70 volt unless specifically indicated otherwise. 4.3 The total loudspeaker (in watts) of any amplifier shall not be greater than 80 percent of the amplifiers continuous sine wave output rating, as measured at 400 Hertz, i.e. - the loudspeaker load impedance shall be at least 1.25 times the amplifiers nominal output impedance. 5.0 SUBMITTALS 5.1 Contractor and system supplier shall produce a wiring diagram for the complete system. 5.2 Contractor shall furnish complete shop drawing package for this system. This submittal shall consist of, but not be limited to: A. A material list showing quantity, manufacturer, type, and description of each item being furnished. PAGING/BACKGROUND MUSIC SYSTEM 16750 - 1 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 10/31/89 WSJ 6.1 6.2 B. Product data sheets for each item being furnished, including type of cable. EQUIPMENT Equipment shall be as follows - or approved equal. The amplification equipment shall be mounted on a wall shelf located in the managers office size to hold the amplifier. Provide a flush receptacle in the wall 6" above the shelf. 6.3 The amplifier shall be Dukane Model 1A1660 or approved equal, 60 watt RMS output, with less than 1% distortion between 20 and 20,000 Hz., 20 to 20,000 Hz. frequency response, 25 and 70 volt output. The amplifier shall be complete with #2A32 dual input module and protective devices to protect against overload or short circuit, and shall be mounted on the shelf. 6.4 Microphona shall be DuKane Model 7A766 - Desk type (2 req.). 6.5 Bathhouse speakers shall be Dukane #5A607, flush mounted in wall as high as possible, mounted in a #145-226 back box with a #6A342 steel grille attached with tamperproof screws. Provide 10'0" cable with wall mike receptacle and matching plug. 6.6 Exterior horns shall be Dukane #5A31. Mount (1) horn on (1) existing pool light pole at 20+ feet above grade and (2) horns on building where shown. 6.7 Volume controls to be Dukane Model 9A1550A locate in basket rooms. 6.8 Microphone input cable shall be West Penn 290 in conduit. 6.9 Loudspeaker cable shall be West Penn #223 installed in conduit. 7.0 INSTALLATION 7.1 Contractor shall furnish and install all conduit, junction and outlet boxes, wiring, etc., as required to provide a complete system. 7.2 Contractor shall identify and tag all cables with permanent type markers to denote location served. 7.3 All splices shall be made in an approved manner and shall be located only in junction boxes and other identifiable and accessible points. No splices are permitted in conduits or raceways. When PAGING/BACKGROUND MUSIC SYSTEM 16750 - 2 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 10/31/89 splicing shielded cables, continuity and isolation of the shield shall be maintained throughout the circuit. 7.4 Microphone lines (or any signal line carrying levels of less than 10 millivolts) shall be installed without splices. 7.5 Microphone lines and program lines shall not be routed near loudspeaker or power lines. 7.6 Internal loudspeakers shall be tapped at 2 watts and external horns at 4.0 watts, unless specifically indicated otherwise. 8.0 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS 8.1 Upon completion of the installation phase the system supplier shall thoroughly test and adjust the system to insure proper operation. 8.2 The supplier shall measure the impedance of the amplifiers connected load after all units are installed and taps properly set. These measurements shall be made with proper test equipment using a 400 Hertz sine wave signal. The results of these measurements shall be recorded for inclusion in the as-built manuals. Where required, appropriate correction(s) and adjustments shall be made. 9.0 MANUALS 9.1 The Contractor shall furnish two (2) complete as-built manuals as specified in Section 16100 which shall contain the following: A. As-built system function block diagrams. B. Operating and maintenance manuals. C. Name, address and phone number of the responsible service organization. END OF SECTION PAGING/BACKGROUND MUSIC SYSTEM 16150 - 3 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE, /MINNESOTA 10/31/ DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECT I 1,6.8,0_0 1 _._ 0 CONDITIONS� ELECTRIC POWER/HEATING EQUIPMENT 1.1 Refer to Section 16010 Electrical General Provisions and Section 16100 Electrical Basic Materials and Methods. 2,0 1 SCOPE 2.1 This Section includes all labor, - materials, equiprent, skills, and tools necessary to install the electric service to all motors, electrical poT ectuipment, and controls. The work of this section includes, but is not limited to, the following: A. All HVAAC System motors and equipment. B. All electrical powered equipment furnished under other sections or divisions of the specifications, or by others. C. Control wiring. D. Manual motor starters. 3.0 3.1 4.0 4.1 5.0 5.1 RELATED I WORK The following related work is specified under other Sections or Divisions of this Specification. A. HVAC and mechanical system equipment is specified under Division 15. B. Non-mechanical electrically powered equipment is specified in Division 2 thru 14. SHOP DRAWINGS Provide shop drawings for all types and sizrvs of motor control equipment furnished under this section and used on the project. MANUFA Manufacturers shall be as specified below, or anorovea equal. Requests for approval of other manufacturers shall be made as specified in Section 16010. ELECTRICAL POWER /HE EQUIPMENT 16800 - 1 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 10/31/89 6.0 POWER WIRING 6.1 All motors divisions otherwise. to control install no shall test will be furnished and installed under other of this specification, unless noted With the exception of motors factory wired apparatus, the electrical contractor shall wer wiring for and connect all motors and same for direction and rotation. 6.2 All motor and equipment ruipment disconnect switches shall be provided and installed by this Contractor unless noted or snecified otherwise and shall be non-fused type, unless specifically noted to be complete with fuses. Non-fused disconnect switches may be used for roof-top HVA' units if feeder is protected by an overcurrent protective device in panel and where approved by thl-:-- local inspector. Switch size may be reduced to 115 of full load current rating. 6.3 Power wiring is defined as all wiring associated with a , motor or other item of equipment that carries the same line current as the motor or equipment. Thus, the wirina to the main controls of a maanetic starter, relay or manual starter and from the starter to the motor. terminals is "Power wiring" and part of this Contractor's work. All equipment power wirina shall he provided and installed by this Contractor. 7. CONTROL, WI.,RIING. 7.1 Control devices and wirina shall be defined as "the devices and wirina associated with a motor or system of several motors or other equipment, that does not carry the full load current of the motor or equipment ". Control wiring may be either line voltage or at some lesser voltage. 7.2 This Contractor shall furnish and install only those control devices and control wirina shown on the drawings and for proper operation of the equipment. 8.0 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS 8.1 This Contractor shall furnish and install manual motor starters where shown on the drawings and as specified herein. Starters shall be Square D, Class 2510 complete with thermal overload elements sized by this Contractor using the actual motor nameplate data. 8.2 Starters shall be Type FG-1 where surface mounted on unfinished walls or located at the motor. Provide Type FS-1 where recessed into finished walls. All -manual starters located remote from the motor shall have a built-in pilot light No. FG-1P or FS-1P. ELECTRICAL POWER /HEATING EQUIPMENT 16800 - 2 BATHHOUSE NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 10/31/89 Special manual starters such as 2 -pole, two-speed type, reversing, etc., shall be as specified on the drawinas. Contractor shall verify the exact type of reversina or two-speed motor to be suppiie6 before orderincr the manual starters. 8.4 Equivalent equipment manufactured by W_astinqhouse. ITE, General Electric, Allen Bradley, F.P.1, or Cutler-Hammer is approved. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL POWER/HEATING EOUIP14EIJT 16800 - 3 November 10, 1989 ADDENDUM NO. 1 Bernard Herman Architects, Inc. 4825 Olson Memorial Highway, Suite 230 Minneapolis, Minnesota 55422 City of New Hope Swimming Pool Bathhouse and Equipment Building - N , ....... . ... 13 This Addendum shall be made a part of the contract documents. Bidders shall include the work described herein as part of the Base Bid and insert the Addendum Number in the space provided on the Proposal Form. SPECIFICATIONS Section 0101 - Summary of Work Item 2.0, General Description of the Work Delete the phrase "soap dispensers (8)" from third paragraph. Section 0211 - Demolition Part I General - Item 1.09, Include List Add the following item: F. Trees Section 0280 - Landscaping Part I General - Item 1.09, Include list Substitute "Redwood Chips" in place of rock border, and add "Landscape Fabric" and "Valley View Edging" to the list of items. Part 2 Products 2.03 Landscape Fabric A. Furnish and install Wheeler Landscape Fabric in all planting areas and at new trees, installed according to manufacturer's recommendations. 2.04 Wood Chips A. Furnish and install redwood chips or bark, 2"+ size, installed at a depth of 3" at all planting areas and border around buildings.